Installation, Operation, and Maintenance

Series R® Rotary Liquid Chillers

Water-Cooled Model RTWD — 60 to 250Tons
Compressor-Chillers Model RTUD — 80 to
250 Tons

RTWD chillers are part of the Trane EcoWise™ portfolio

of products that are designed to lower the environmental impact
with next-generation, low global warming potential (GWP)
refrigerants and high efficiency operation.

SAFETY WARNING
Only qualified personnel should install and service the equipment. The installation, starting up, and servicing of
heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment can be hazardous and requires specific knowledge and training.
Improperly installed, adjusted or altered equipment by an unqualified person could result in death or serious injury.
When working on the equipment, observe all precautions in the literature and on the tags, stickers, and labels that are
attached to the equipment.

June 2020 RLC-SVX09L-EN

Introduction
Read this manual thoroughly before operating or servicing
this unit.
WARNING
Warnings, Cautions, and Notices Proper Field Wiring and Grounding
Required!
Safety advisories appear throughout this manual as
Failure to follow code could result in death or serious
required. Your personal safety and the proper operation of
injury. All field wiring MUST be performed by qualified
this machine depend upon the strict observance of these personnel. Improperly installed and grounded field
precautions. wiring poses FIRE and ELECTROCUTION hazards. To
avoid these hazards, you MUST follow requirements for
The three types of advisories are defined as follows: field wiring installation and grounding as described in
NEC and your local/state electrical codes.
Indicates a potentially hazardous
WARNING situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury. WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
CAUTIONs situation which, if not avoided, could
result in minor or moderate injury. It Required!
could also be used to alert against Failure to wear proper PPE for the job being undertaken
unsafe practices. could result in death or serious injury. Technicians, in
Indicates a situation that could result in order to protect themselves from potential electrical,
NOTICE mechanical, and chemical hazards, MUST follow
equipment or property-damage only
accidents. precautions in this manual and on the tags, stickers,
and labels, as well as the instructions below:

Important Environmental Concerns • Before installing/servicing this unit, technicians

MUST put on all PPE required for the work being
Scientific research has shown that certain man-made undertaken (Examples; cut resistant gloves/sleeves,
chemicals can affect the earth’s naturally occurring butyl gloves, safety glasses, hard hat/bump cap, fall
stratospheric ozone layer when released to the protection, electrical PPE and arc flash clothing).
atmosphere. In particular, several of the identified ALWAYS refer to appropriate Safety Data Sheets
chemicals that may affect the ozone layer are refrigerants (SDS) and OSHA guidelines for proper PPE.
that contain Chlorine, Fluorine and Carbon (CFCs) and
those containing Hydrogen, Chlorine, Fluorine and • When working with or around hazardous chemicals,
ALWAYS refer to the appropriate SDS and OSHA/GHS
Carbon (HCFCs). Not all refrigerants containing these
(Global Harmonized System of Classification and
compounds have the same potential impact to the
Labeling of Chemicals) guidelines for information on
environment. Trane advocates the responsible handling of
allowable personal exposure levels, proper
all refrigerants-including industry replacements for CFCs
respiratory protection and handling instructions.
and HCFCs such as saturated or unsaturated HFCs and
HCFCs. • If there is a risk of energized electrical contact, arc, or
flash, technicians MUST put on all PPE in accordance
Important Responsible Refrigerant with OSHA, NFPA 70E, or other country-specific
Practices requirements for arc flash protection, PRIOR to
servicing the unit. NEVER PERFORM ANY
Trane believes that responsible refrigerant practices are
SWITCHING, DISCONNECTING, OR VOLTAGE
important to the environment, our customers, and the air
TESTING WITHOUT PROPER ELECTRICAL PPE AND
conditioning industry. All technicians who handle
ARC FLASH CLOTHING. ENSURE ELECTRICAL
refrigerants must be certified. The Federal Clean Air Act
METERS AND EQUIPMENT ARE PROPERLY RATED
(Section 608) sets forth the requirements for handling,
FOR INTENDED VOLTAGE.
reclaiming, recovering and recycling of certain
refrigerants and the equipment that is used in these
service procedures. In addition, some states or
municipalities may have additional requirements that
must also be adhered to for responsible management of
refrigerants. Know the applicable laws and follow them.

© 2020 Trane RLC-SVX09L-EN

 Introduction

advance of the scheduled disassembly work to

WARNING coordinate the disassembly and reassembly work.

Follow EHS Policies! • Startup must be performed by Trane or an agent of

Trane specifically authorized to perform startup and
Failure to follow instructions below could result in warranty of Trane® products as noted above.
death or serious injury.
Trane, or an agent of Trane specifically authorized to
• All Trane personnel must follow the company’s
perform startup and warranty of Trane® products, will
Environmental, Health and Safety (EHS) policies
provide qualified personnel and standard hand tools to
when performing work such as hot work, electrical,
perform the disassembly work at a location specified by
fall protection, lockout/tagout, refrigerant handling,
the contractor. The contractor shall provide the rigging
etc. Where local regulations are more stringent than
equipment such as chain falls, gantries, cranes, forklifts,
these policies, those regulations supersede these
etc. necessary for the disassembly and reassembly work
policies.
and the required qualified personnel to operate the
• Non-Trane personnel should always follow local necessary rigging equipment.
regulations.
Copyright
This document and the information in it are the property of
WARNING Trane, and may not be used or reproduced in whole or in
Refrigerant under High Pressure! part without written permission. Trane reserves the right
Failure to follow instructions below could result in an to revise this publication at any time, and to make changes
explosion which could result in death or serious injury to its content without obligation to notify any person of
or equipment damage. System contains oil and such revision or change.
refrigerant under high pressure. Recover refrigerant to
relieve pressure before opening the system. See unit
nameplate for refrigerant type. Do not use non-
Trademarks
approved refrigerants, refrigerant substitutes, or
All trademarks referenced in this document are the
refrigerant additives.
trademarks of their respective owners.

Factory Warranty Information Revision History

Compliance with the following is required to preserve the
• Compressor model number updated in Model Number
factory warranty:
Descriptions.
All Unit Installations • General Data tables updated in General Information
Startup MUST be performed by Trane, or an authorized chapter.
agent of Trane, to VALIDATE this WARRANTY. Contractor • Miscellaneous updates.
must provide a two-week startup notification to Trane (or
an agent of Trane specifically authorized to perform
startup).
Additional Requirements for Units Requiring
Disassembly
When a new fully assembled chiller is shipped and
received from our Trane manufacturing location, and, for
any reason, it requires disassembly or partial disassembly
— which could include but is not limited to the evaporator,
condenser, control panel, compressor/motor, or any other
components originally attached to the fully assembled unit
— compliance with the following is required to preserve
the factory warranty:
• Trane, or an agent of Trane specifically authorized to
perform startup and warranty of Trane® products, will
perform or have direct onsite technical supervision of
the disassembly and reassembly work.
• The installing contractor must notify Trane — or an
agent of Trane specifically authorized to perform
startup and warrant of Trane® products — two weeks in

RLC-SVX09L-EN 3
Table of Contents
Factory Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Evaporator Water Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Model Number Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Low Evap Refrigerant Cutout/Percent Glycol
Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Nameplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Condenser Water Piping (RTWD Units Only)
Unit Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
53
Compressor Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Refrigerant Relief Valve Venting . . . . . . . . .54
Model Number Coding System . . . . . . . . 6
RTUD Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
ASME Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Model Number Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Remote Air-Cooled Condenser Interconnec-
Unit Model Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 tion Refrigerant Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Compressor Model Number . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Condenser by Others
Requirement for Stable fan operation at low
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 ambient temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Unit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Accessory/Options Information . . . . . . . . . . 9 Equivalent Line Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
General Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Liquid Line Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
RTWD Units, 60 Hz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Discharge (Hot Gas) Line Sizing . . . . . . . .64
RTWD Units, 50 Hz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
RTUD and Condenser General Data . . . . 18
Refrigerant Charge Determination . . . . . .67
Pre-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 RTUD Chilled Water Flow Contro . . . . . . .68
Inspection Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Oil Charge Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Unit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor Installation
Installation requirements and Contractor re- Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
sponsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Fan Control for Remote Air Cooled Condens-
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Unit Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 RTUD Condenser Elevation Setting . . . . .69
Service Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Shipping Spacers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Installation - Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
RTWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 General Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
RTUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Installer-Supplied Components . . . . . . . . . .71
Air-Cooled Condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Power Supply Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Installation - Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Control Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Location Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Interconnecting Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Noise Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Chilled Water Flow (Pump) Interlock . . . .72
Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Condenser Water Flow Interlock . . . . . . . .72
Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Chilled Water Pump Control . . . . . . . . . . .72
Rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Alarm and Status Relay Outputs (Program-
mable Relays) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Lifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Relay Assignments Using TechView™ . .74
Unit Isolation and Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Low Voltage Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Center of Gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Remote Air Cooled Condenser . . . . . . . . .77
4 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Table of Contents

Communications Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

Optional Tracer® Communications Interface Power Up to Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
78
Stopped to Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
LonTalk® Communications Interface for
Normal Shutdown to Stopped . . . . . . . .127
Chillers (LCI-C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
BACnet® Communications Interface for Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Chillers (BCI-C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Operating Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Weekly Maintenance and Checks . . . . . .129
RTWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Monthly Maintenance and Checks . . . . .129
RTUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Annual Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Refrigeration (Cooling) Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Scheduling Other Maintenance . . . . . . .130
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Refrigerant and Oil Charge Management 130
Cycle Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Heat Exchanger Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Cleaning the Condenser (RTWD Only) . .130
Oil Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Cleaning the Evaporator . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Controls Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 RTUD Air Cooled Condenser Applications .
134
CH530 Communications Overview . . . . . . 83
Lubrication System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Controls Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Compressor Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
DynaView™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Oil Sump Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Display Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Starter Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Chiller Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Main Processor Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Settings Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Communication Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . .150
Lockout Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Main Processor (Boot Messages and Diagnos-
Power Up and Self Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 tics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
TechView™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Limit Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Fan Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
A/C Fan Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Log and Check Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Low Ambient Fan Control Type . . . . . . 116
Fan Deck Arrangement Circuit 1 . . . . . . 117
Fan Deck Arrangement Circuit 2 . . . . . . 117
Example for Fan Configurations . . . . . . 117
A/C Fan Controls (ACFC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Pre-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Start-Up and Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Unit Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Seasonal Unit Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Seasonal Unit Start-Up Procedure . . . . . 121
Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

RLC-SVX09L-EN 5
Model Number Information
Nameplates Model Number Coding System
Model numbers for unit and compressors are comprised
The RTWD/RTUD unit nameplates are applied to the
of numbers and letter which represent equipment
exterior surface of the control panel door.
features.
A compressor nameplate is located on each compressor.
See “Unit Model Number,” p. 7 and “Compressor Model
Unit Nameplate Number,” p. 8 for details.
Each position, or group of positions, in a number or letter
See Figure 1. Unit nameplate includes the following:
is used to represent a feature. For example, from the chart,
• Unit model and size descriptor. we can determine that “F” in digit 8 of unit model number
• Unit serial number. indicates unit voltage is 460/60/3.
• Identifies unit electrical requirements. ASME Nameplate
• Lists correct operating charges of R-134a and Oil 48.
The ASME nameplate is different for the evaporators,
• Lists unit test pressures condensers (RTWD only) and oil separators. The
• Identifies installation, operation and maintenance and evaporator nameplate is located on the left portion of the
service data literature. shell. The insulation over the nameplate is intentionally
left unglued, for ease in viewing the nameplate.
• Lists drawing numbers for unit wiring diagrams.
The condenser nameplate is on the backside of the
Figure 1. Unit nameplate condenser below circuit 2 compressor.
See Figure 39 and Figure 40, p. 80 for location of ASME
nameplates.

Compressor Nameplate
Compressor nameplate includes the following:
• Compressor model number.
• Compressor serial number.
• Compressor electrical characteristics.
• Utilization Range.
• Recommended refrigerant.

6 RLC-SVX09L-EN
Model Number Descriptions
Unit Model Number
Digits 1, 2, 3, 4 — Chiller Model Digit 16 — Pressure Relief Valve Digit 28 — Unit Operator
RTWD= Water-Cooled Series R® Chiller 1 = Single Relief Valve Interface
RTUD= Series R® Compressor Chiller 2 = Dual Relief Valve with 3-Way A = DynaView™/English
Isolation Valve B = DynaView/Spanish
Digits 5-7 — Unit Nominal
Digit 17 — Water Connection C = DynaView/Spanish-Mexico
Tonnage D = DynaView/French
060 = 60 Nominal Tons Type E = DynaView/German
070 = 70 Nominal Tons A = Grooved Pipe - Standard F = DynaView/Dutch
080 = 80 Nominal Tons G = DynaView/Italian
090 = 90 Nominal Tons
Digit 18 — Evaporator Tubes
H = DynaView/Japanese
100 = 100 Nominal Tons A = Internal and External Enhanced
J = DynaView/Portuguese-Portugal
110 = 110 Nominal Tons Evap Tube
K = DynaView/Portuguese-Brazil
120 = 120 Nominal Tons Digit 19 — Evaporator Passes L = DynaView/Korean
130 = 130 Nominal Tons M = DynaView/Thai
140 = 140 Nominal Tons 2 = 2-Pass Evaporator
3 = 3-Pass Evaporator N = DynaView/Simplified Chinese
150 = 150 Nominal Tons P = DynaView/Traditional Chinese
160 = 160 Nominal Tons Digit 20 — Evaporator Water R = DynaView/Russian
180 = 180 Nominal Ton Side Pressure T = DynaView/Polish
200 = 200 Nominal Tons U = DynaView/Czech
220 = 220 Nominal Tons A = 150 psi/10.5 bar Evaporator
Water Pressure V = DynaView/Hungarian
250 = 250 Nominal Tons W = DynaView/Greek
Digit 8 — Unit Voltage Digit 21 — Evaporator X = DynaView/Romanian
A = 200/60/3
Application Y = DynaView/Swedish
B = 230/60/3 1 = Standard Cooling Digit 29 — Remote Interface
D = 380/60/3 2 = Low Temperature (Digital Comm)
E = 400/50/3 3 = Ice Making
0 = No Remote Digital Comm
F = 460/60/3 Digit 22 — Condenser Tubes 1 = LonTalk®/Tracer® Summit
G = 575/60/3
X = Remote Condenser Interface
Digit 9 — Manufacturing Plant A = Enhanced Fin - Copper 2 = Time of Day Scheduling
2 = Pueblo, USA B = Internally Enhanced 90/10 CuNi 4 = BACnet® Interface
Fin Digit 30 — External Water and
Digits 10, 11 — Design
Sequence Digit 23 — Condenser Water Current Limit Setpoint
** = Factory Assigned
Side Pressure 0 = No External Water and Current
0 = Remote Condenser Limit Setpoint
Digit 12 — Unit Type 1 = 150 psi/10.5 Bar Condenser A = External Water and Current Limit
1 = Standard Efficiency/Performance Water Pressure Setpoint 4-20 mA
2 = High Efficiency/Performance B = External WAter and Current Limit
3 = Premium Efficiency/Performance
Digit 24 — Compressor Starter Setpoint 2-10 Vdc
Type
Digit 13 — Agency Listing Digit 31 — Ice Making
Y = Wye-Delta Closed Transition
0 = No Agency Listing Starter 0 = No Ice Making
A = UL Listed to US and Canadian X = Across-the-Line Starter A = Ice Making with Relay
Safety Standards B = Ice Making without Relay
D = IBC Seismically Rated Unit Digit 25 — Incoming Power Line
Digit 32 — Programmable
E = UL/Canadian and IBC Connection
F = OSHPD Seismically Rated Unit Relays
1 = Single Point Power Connection
G = UL/Canadian and OSHPD 2 = Dual Point Power Connection 0 = No Programmable Relay
A = Programmable Relay
Digit 14— Pressure Vessel Code Digit 26 — Power Line
1 = ASME Pressure Vessel Code Digit 33— Condenser
Connection Type
3 = Chinese Code Pressure Vessel Refrigerant Pressure
A = Terminal Block
S = Special
B = Mechanical Disconnect Switch Output
Digit 15 — Unit Application D = Circuit Breaker 0 = No Condenser Refrigerant
E = High Fault Rated Panel with Output
A = Std Condenser <=95°F/35°C
Circuit Breaker 1 = Condenser Water Control Output
Entering Water Temperature
3 = Differential Pressure Output
B = High Temperature Condenser Digit 27 — Under/Over Voltage
>95°F/35°C Entering Water Temp Protection Digit 34 — Outdoor Air Temp
C = Water-to-Water Heat Pump Sensor
D = Remote Condenser by Trane 0 = No Under/Over Voltage
Protection 0 = No Outdoor Air Temp Sensor
E = Remote Condenser by Others
1 = Under/Over Voltage Protection A = Outdoor Air Temp Sensor - CWR
Low Ambient

RLC-SVX09L-EN 7
Model Number Descriptions

Digit 35 — Condenser Leaving Digit 44 — Insulation Compressor Model

Hot Water Temp Control 0 = No Insulation Number
0 = No Condenser Leaving Hot 1 = Factory Insulation
Water 2 = Insulation for High Humidity Digits 1, 2, 3, 4, — Compressor
Temp Control Digit 45 — Factory Charge Model
1 = Condenser Leaving Hot Water
0 = Full Factory Refrigerant Charge CHHP= Positive displacement,
Temp Control
(R-134a) helical rotary (twin screw)
Digit 36 — Power Meter 1 = Nitrogen Charge hermetic compressor
0 = No Power Meter 5 = Full Factory Refrigerant Charge
(R-513A)
Digits 5, 6, 7— Size
P = Power Meter
0N2= 120 Tons
Digit 37 — Motor Current Digit 46 — Base Rail Forklifting 0N1= 100 Tons
Analog Output (%RLA) 0 = No Base Rail Forklifting 0M2= 85 Tons
0 = No Motor Current Analog Output B = Base Rail Forklifting 0M1= 70 Tons
0L2 = 60 Tons
1 = Motor Current Analog Output Digit 47 — Label and Literature 0L1 = 50 Tons
Digit 38 — A/C Fan Control Language 0K2= 40 Tons
0 = No Fan Controls (RTWD) B = Spanish 0K1= 35 Tons
A = Fan Control By Others D = English
E = French
Digit 8— Unit Voltage
B = Integral Fan Controls
G = Chinese - Traditional A = 200/60/3
Digit 39 — Low Ambient Fan R = 220/50/3
Control Digit 48 — Special C = 230/60/3
0 = None D = 380/60/3
0 = No Low Ambient Fan Control
F = Ship to Final Finisher H = 575/60/3
(RTWD)
S = Special T = 460/60/3 or 400/50/3
1 = Two Speed Fans
2 = Variable Speed Fan with Analog Digits 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55 Digit 9— Internal Relief
Interface 0 = Not Used K = 450 psid
3 = Variable Speed Fan with PWM
Interface Digit 56 — Shipping Package Digits 10, 11— Design Sequence
Digit 40 — Installation 0 = No Skid (Standard) XX = Factory Assigned
1 = Skid
Accessories 2 = Shrink Wrap
Digit 12— Capacity Limit
0 = No Installation Accessories 3 = Skid + Shrink Wrap N = Standard capacity controls
A = Elastomeric Isolators (no capacity limit
B = Flanged Water Connection Kit Digit 59 — Performance Test
0 = No Performance Test
Digits 13, 14, 15— Motor kW
C = Isolators and Flanged Water
Connection Kit C = 1-Point Test with Report Rating
D = 2-Point Test with Report 134 = 134 kW (N2/60Hz)
Digit 41 — Flow Switch E = 3-Point Test with Report 112 = 112 kW (N2/50Hz)
0 = No Flow Switch F = 4-Point Test with Report 092 = 092 kW (M2/60Hz)
1 = 150 psi NEMA 1: Flow Switch x 1 G = Witness 1-Point Test with Report 077 = 077 kW (M2/50Hz)
2 = 150 psi NEMA 1: Flow Switch x 2 G = Witness 1-Point Test with Report 069 = 069 kW (L2/60Hz)
3 = 150 psi NEMA 4: Flow Switch x 1 Rapid Restart 058 = 058 kW (L2/50Hz)
4 = 150 psi NEMA 4: Flow Switch x 2 H = Witness 2-Point Test with Report 050 = 050 kW (K2/60Hz)
7 = Factory Installed Proof of Flow J = Witness 3-Point Test with Report 041 = 041 kW (K2/50Hz)
(Evap/Cond) K = Witness 4-Point Test with Report 112 = 112 kW (N1/60Hz)
8 = Factor Installed Proof of Flow K = Witness 4-Point Test with Report 093 = 093 kW (N1/50Hz)
(Evap) Rapid Restart 077 = 077 kW (M1/60Hz)
Digit 42 — 2-Way Water 065 = 065 kW (M1/50Hz)
Digit 60 — Evaporator Fluid 057 = 057 kW (L1/60Hz)
Regulating Valve Type 048 = 048 kW (L1/60Hz)
0 = No 2-Way Water Regulating 0 = Water 043 = 043 kW (K1/60Hz)
Valve 1 = Calcium Chloride 036 = 036 kW (K1/60Hz)
A = 3” 150 psi/88.9 mm 10.5 bar 115V 2 = Ethylene Glycol
B = 3” 150 psi/88.9 mm 10.5 bar 220V 3 = Propylene Glycol
Digit 16— Volume Ratio
C = 4” 150 psi/114.3 mm 10.5 bar 4 = Methanol A = High volume ratio
115V N = Low volume ratio
D = 4” 150 psi/114.3 mm 10.5 bar Digit 61 — Condenser Fluid Type
220V 0 = Water
A = Calcium Chloride
Digit 43 — Sound Reduction B = Ethylene Glycol
Package C = Propylene Glycol
0 = No Sound Reduction Package D = Methanol
A = Sound Reduction - E = Air-Cooled Condenser
Factory Installed

8 RLC-SVX09L-EN
General Information
Unit Description
The RTWD units are helical-rotary type, water-cooled,
liquid chillers, designed for installation indoors. The units
have 2 independent refrigerant circuits, with one
compressor per circuit. The RTWD units are packaged with
an evaporator and condenser.
Note: Each RTWD unit is a completely assembled,
hermetic package that is factory-piped, wired, leak-
tested, dehydrated, charged and tested for proper
control operations prior to shipment. The chilled
water inlet and outlet openings are covered for
shipment.
The RTWD series features Trane's exclusive Adaptive
Control logic with CH530 controls. It monitors the control
variables that govern the operation of the chiller unit.
Adaptive Control logic can correct these variables, when
necessary, to optimize operational efficiencies, avoid
chiller shutdown, and keep producing chilled water.
Compressor unloaders are solenoid actuated. Each
refrigerant circuit is provided with filter, sight glass,
electronic expansion valve, and charging valves on the
RTWD.
The evaporator and condenser are manufactured in
accordance with ASME standards. The evaporator is fully
insulated. Both evaporator and condenser are equipped
with water drain and vent connections.
The RTUD units are helical-rotary type compressor
chillers, designed to be most effective when used with the
Levitor II air-cooled condenser. The RTUD unit consists of
an evaporator, two helical rotary compressors (one per
circuit), oil separators, oil coolers, liquid line service
valves, sightglasses, electronic expansion valves and
filter. The discharge line leaving the oil separator and
liquid line entering the filters are capped and brazed. The
unit ships with a full charge of oil and a nitrogen holding
charge.

Accessory/Options Information
Check all the accessories and loose parts which are
shipped with the unit against the original order. Included
in these items will be water vessel drain plugs, rigging
diagrams, electrical diagrams, and service literature,
which are placed inside the control panel and/or starter
panel for shipment. Also check for optional components,
such as flow switches and isolators.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 9
General Information

General Data
RTWD Units, 60 Hz

Table 1. General data – RTWD, 60 Hz, standard efficiency

Size 80 90 100 110 120 130 140

Compressor
Size Ckt1/Ckt2 K1/K1 K2/K2 K2/L1 L1/L1 L1/L2 L2/L2 L2/M1
Evaporator
2 Pass Arrangement
Water Conn. Size NPS 4 4 4 4 5 5 5
mm 100 100 100 100 125 125 125
Water Storage gal 11.2 11.2 12.6 14.0 15.2 16.2 17.7
l 42.2 42.2 47.6 53.0 57.4 61.5 66.8
Minimum Flow gpm 77 77 89 101 101 110 122
l/s 4.9 4.9 5.6 6.3 6.3 6.9 7.6
Maximum Flow gpm 281 281 325 368 368 400 444
l/s 17.8 17.8 20.5 23.2 23.2 25.3 28.0
3 Pass Arrangement
Water Conn. Size NPS 3 3 3 3 4 4 4
mm 80 80 80 80 100 100 100
Water Storage gal 11.2 11.2 12.6 14.0 15.2 16.2 17.7
l 42.2 42.2 47.6 53.0 57.4 61.5 66.8
Minimum Flow gpm 52 52 59 67 67 73 81
l/s 3.2 3.2 3.7 4.2 4.2 4.6 5.1
Maximum Flow gpm 187 187 216 244 244 266 295
l/s 11.8 11.8 13.6 15.5 15.5 16.8 18.6
Condenser
Water Conn. Size NPS 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
mm 125 125 125 125 125 125 125
gal 12.4 14.2 16.0 16.9 18.5 18.5 20.9
Water Storage
l 46.8 53.6 60.4 63.8 70.1 70.1 79.2
Minimum Flow gpm 83 99 115 124 135 135 156
l/s 5.2 6.2 7.3 7.8 8.5 8.5 9.8
Maximum Flow gpm 301 361 421 451 491 491 572
l/s 19.0 22.8 26.6 28.5 31.0 31.0 36.1
General Unit
Refrigerant Type R-134a or R-513A
# Refrig Circuits 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Refrigerant Charge lb 114.6/114.6 114.6/114.6 112.4/114.6 112.4/112.4 132.3/132.3 130.1/130.1 127.9/132.3
kg 52/52 52/52 51/52 51/51 60/60 59/59 58/60
Oil Type OIL00048
Oil Charge qt 7.2/7.2 7.2/7.2 7.2/10.5 10.5/10.5 10.5/10.5 10.5/10.5 10.5/10.5
l 6.8/6.8 6.8/6.8 6.8/9.9 9.9/9.9 9.9/9.9 9.9/9.9 9.9/9.9
Notes:
1. Data containing information on two circuits is shown as circuit 1/circuit 2.
2. Flow limits are for water only.

10 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 General Information

Table 2. General data – RTWD, 60 Hz, high efficiency

Size 80 90 100 110 120 130

Compressor
Size Ckt1/Ckt2 K1/K1 K2/K2 K2/L1 L1/L1 L1/L2 L2/L2
Evaporator
2 Pass Arrangement
Water Conn. Size NPS 4 4 5 5 5 5
mm 100 100 100 125 125 125
Water Storage gal 9.8 11.9 12.8 15.3 16.4 17.3
l 37.0 45.2 48.3 57.9 62.3 65.4
Minimum Flow gpm 72 92 100 112 123 130
l/s 4.5 5.8 6.3 7.0 7.7 8.2
Maximum Flow gpm 263 336 364 409 448 476
l/s 16.6 21.2 23.0 25.8 28.3 30.0
3 Pass Arrangement
Water Conn. Size NPS 3 3 4 4 4 4
mm 80 80 80 100 100 100
Water Storage gal 9.8 11.9 12.8 15.3 16.4 17.3
l 37.0 45.2 48.3 57.9 62.3 65.4
Minimum Flow gpm 48 61 67 75 82 87
l/s 3.0 3.9 4.2 4.7 5.1 5.5
Maximum Flow gpm 175 223 242 271 298 316
l/s 11.1 14.1 15.3 17.2 18.8 20.0
Condenser
Water Conn. Size NPS 5 5 5 5 5 5
mm 125 125 125 125 125 125
gal 11.9 12.7 14.9 16.6 17.2 18.0
Water Storage
l 45.1 48.1 56.3 62.7 65.2 68.3
Minimum Flow gpm 87 95 117 130 136 145
l/s 5.5 6.0 7.4 8.1 8.6 9.1
Maximum Flow gpm 317 347 427 473 498 528
l/s 20.0 21.9 27.0 29.9 31.4 33.3
General Unit
Refrigerant Type R-134a or R-513A
# Refrig Circuits 2 2 2 2 2 2
Refrigerant Charge lb 99.2/99.2 97/97 123.5/125.7 123.5/123.5 121.3/121.3 119/119
kg 45/45 44/44 56/57 56/56 55/55 54/54
Oil Type OIL00048
Oil Charge qt 7.2/7.2 7.2/7.2 7.2/10.5 10.5/10.5 10.5/10.5 10.5/10.5
l 6.8/6.8 6.8/6.8 6.8/9.9 9.9/9.9 9.9/9.9 9.9/9.9
1. Data containing information on two circuits is shown as circuit 1/circuit 2.
2. Flow limits are for water only.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 11
General Information

Table 3. General data – RTWD, 60 Hz, high efficiency (continued)

Size 150 160 180 200 220 250

Compressor
Size Ckt1/Ckt2 L2/M1 M1/M1 M1/M2 M2/M2 M2/M1 N1/N1
Evaporator
2 Pass Arrangement
Water Conn. Size NPS 5 5 5 5 6 6
mm 125 125 125 125 150 150
Water Storage gal 19.2 20.3 22.3 24.2 28.6 31.8
l 72.6 77.0 84.5 91.5 108.3 120.3
Minimum Flow gpm 141 151 170 187 211 240
l/s 8.9 9.5 10.7 11.8 13.3 15.1
Maximum Flow gpm 515 554 621 683 772 879
l/s 32.5 35.0 39.2 43.1 48.8 55.5
3 Pass Arrangement
Water Conn. Size NPS 4 4 4 4 4 4
mm 100 100 100 100 100 100
Water Storage gal 18.8 20.0 22.0 23.8 27.9 31.0
l 71.2 75.6 83.2 90.1 105.5 117.5
Minimum Flow gpm 94 101 113 124 141 160
l/s 5.9 6.4 7.1 7.8 8.9 10.1
Maximum Flow gpm 343 369 414 455 515 586
l/s 21.7 23.3 26.2 28.7 32.5 37.0
Condenser
Water Conn. Size NPS 6 6 6 6 6 6
mm 150 150 150 150 150 150
gal 21.6 22.9 24.6 26.2 31.1 39.2
Water Storage
l 81.7 86.8 93.0 99.2 117.8 148.3
Minimum Flow gpm 160 173 190 206 245 326
l/s 10.1 10.9 12.0 13.0 15.4 20.5
Maximum Flow gpm 583 634 694 754 895 1192
l/s 36.8 40.0 43.8 47.6 56.5 75.3
General Unit
Refrigerant Type R-134a or R-513A
# Refrig Circuits 2 2 2 2 2 2
Refrigerant Charge lb 134.5/143.3 141.1/141.1 138.9/138.9 136.7/136.7 178.6/185.2 180.8/180.8
kg 61/65 64/64 63/63 62/62 81/84 82/82
Oil Type OIL00048
Oil Charge qt 10.5/12.4 12.4/12.4 12.4/12.4 12.4/12.4 12.4/12.4 12.4/12.4
l 9.9/11.7 11.7/11.7 11.7/11.7 11.7/11.7 11.7/11.7 11.7/11.7
1. Data containing information on two circuits is shown as circuit 1/circuit 2.
2. Flow limits are for water only.

12 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 General Information

Table 4. General data – RTWD, 60 Hz, premium efficiency

Size 150 160 180 200

Compressor
Size Ckt1/Ckt2 L2/M1 M1/M1 M1/M2 M2/M2
Evaporator
2 Pass Arrangement
Water Conn. Size NPS 6 6 6 6
mm 150 150 150 150
Water Storage (gal) 27.8 27.8 29.3 31.3
(L) 105.1 105.1 110.9 118.3
Minimum Flow (gpm) 175 175 187 202
(L/s) 11.0 11.0 11.8 12.7
Maximum Flow (gpm) 638 638 683 739
(L/s) 40.3 40.3 43.1 46.7
3 Pass Arrangement
Water Conn. Size NPS 4 4 4 4
mm 100 100 100 100
Water Storage (gal) 27.1 27.1 28.6 30.6
(L) 102.4 102.4 108.3 115.7
Minimum Flow (gpm) 117 117 125 135
(L/s) 7.3 7.3 7.8 8.5
Maximum Flow (gpm) 425 425 455 492
(L/s) 26.9 26.9 28.7 31.1
Condenser
Water Conn. Size NPS 6 6 6 6
mm 150 150 150 150
(gal) 30.0 30.0 32.9 32.9
Water Storage
(L) 113.4 113.4 124.4 124.4
Minimum Flow (gpm) 206 206 231 231
(L/s) 13.0 13.0 14.6 14.6
Maximum Flow (gpm) 754 754 845 845
(L/s) 47.6 47.6 53.3 53.3
General Unit
Refrigerant Type R-134a
# Refrig Circuits 2 2 2 2
Refrigerant Charge (lb) 174.2/183.0 183.0/183.0 180.8/180.8 178.6/178.6
(kg) 79/83 83/83 82/82 81/81
Oil Type OIL00048
Oil Charge (qt) 10.5/12.4 12.4/12.4 12.4/12.4 12.4/12.4
(L) 9.9/11.7 11.7/11.7 11.7/11.7 11.7/11.7
1. Data containing information on two circuits is shown as circuit 1/circuit 2.
2. Flow limits are for water only.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 13
General Information

RTWD Units, 50 Hz

Table 5. General data – RTWD, 50 Hz, standard efficiency

Size 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150

Compressor
Size Ckt1/Ckt2 K2/K2 K2/L1 L1/L1 L1/L2 L2/L2 L2/M1 M1/M1 M1/M2 M2/M2
Evaporator
2 Pass Arrangement
Water Conn. Size NPS 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5
(mm) 100 100 100 100 100 125 125 125 125
Water Storage (gal) 11.2 12.6 14.0 14.0 14.0 16.2 17.7 17.7 19.1
(L) 42.2 47.6 53.0 53.0 53.0 61.5 66.8 66.8 72.2
Minimum Flow (gpm) 77 89 101 101 101 110 122 122 133
(L/s) 4.9 5.6 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.9 7.6 7.6 8.4
Maximum Flow (gpm) 281 324 368 368 368 400 444 444 487
(L/s) 17.8 20.5 23.2 23.2 23.2 25.3 28.0 28.0 30.8
3 Pass Arrangement
Water Conn. Size NPS 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4
(mm) 80 80 80 80 80 100 100 100 100
Water Storage (gal) 11.2 12.6 14.0 14.0 14.0 16.2 17.7 17.7 19.1
(L) 42.2 47.6 53.0 53.0 53.0 61.5 66.8 66.8 72.2
Minimum Flow (gpm) 52 59 67 67 67 73 81 81 89
(L/s) 3.2 3.7 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.6 5.1 5.1 5.6
Maximum Flow (gpm) 187 216 244 244 244 266 295 295 324
(L/s) 11.8 13.6 15.5 15.5 15.5 16.8 18.6 18.6 20.5
Condenser
Water Conn. Size NPS 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
(mm) 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125
Water Storage (gal) 12.4 14.2 16.0 16.9 16.9 18.5 20.9 20.9 22.4
(L) 46.8 53.6 60.4 63.8 63.8 70.1 79.2 79.2 84.8
Minimum Flow (gpm) 83 99 115 124 124 135 156 156 170
(L/s) 5.2 6.2 7.3 7.8 7.8 8.5 9.8 9.8 10.7
Maximum Flow (gpm) 301 361 421 451 451 491 571 571 622
(L/s) 19.0 22.8 26.6 28.5 28.5 31.0 36.1 36.1 39.3
General Unit
Refrigerant Type R-134a or R-513A
# Refrig Circuits 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
114.6/ 112.4/ 110.2/ 110.2/ 112.4/ 130.1/ 127.9/ 127.9/ 130.1/
Refrigerant Charge (lb)
114.6 112.4 110.2 112.4 112.4 130.1 127.9 132.3 130.1
(kg) 52/52 51/51 50/50 50/51 51/51 59/59 58/58 58/60 59/59
Oil Type OIL00048
Oil Charge (qt) 7.2/7.2 7.2/7.2 7.2/7.2 7.2/10.5 10.5/10.5 10.5/10.5 10.5/10.5 10.5/10.5 10.5/10.5
(L) 6.8/6.8 6.8/6.8 6.8/6.8 6.8/9.9 9.9/9.9 9.9/9.9 9.9/9.9 9.9/9.9 9.9/9.9
1. Data containing information on two circuits is shown as circuit 1/circuit 2.
2. Flow limits are for water only.

14 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 General Information

Table 6. General data – RTWD, 50 Hz, high efficiency

Size 60 70 80 90 100 110 120

Compressor
Size Ckt1/Ckt2 K1/K1 K2/K2 K2/L1 L1/L1 L1/L2 L2/L2 L2/M1
Evaporator
2 Pass Arrangement
Water Conn. Size NPS 4 4 4 5 5 5 5
(mm) 100 100 100 125 125 125 125
Water Storage (gal) 9.8 10.6 11.9 15.3 15.3 16.4 17.3
(L) 37.0 40.2 45.2 57.9 57.9 62.3 65.4
Minimum Flow (gpm) 72 80 92 112 112 123 130
(L/s) 4.5 5.0 5.8 7.0 7.0 7.7 8.2
Maximum Flow (gpm) 263 291 336 408 408 448 476
(L/s) 16.6 18.4 21.2 25.8 25.8 28.3 30.0
3 Pass Arrangement
Water Conn. Size NPS 3 3 3 4 4 4 4
(mm) 80 80 80 100 100 100 100
Water Storage (gal) 9.8 10.6 11.9 15.3 15.3 16.4 17.3
(L) 37.0 40.2 45.2 57.9 57.9 62.3 65.4
Minimum Flow (gpm) 48 53 61 75 75 82 87
(L/s) 3.0 3.3 3.9 4.7 4.7 5.1 5.5
Maximum Flow (gpm) 175 193 223 271 271 298 316
(L/s) 11.1 12.2 14.1 17.2 17.2 18.8 20.0
Condenser
Water Conn. Size NPS 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
(mm) 125 125 125 125 125 125 125
(gal) 11.9 11.9 13.8 15.3 16.6 16.6 18.0
Water Storage
(L) 45.1 45.1 52.2 58.1 62.7 62.7 68.3
Minimum Flow (gpm) 87 87 106 117 130 130 145
(L/s) 5.5 5.5 6.7 7.4 8.1 8.1 9.1
Maximum Flow (gpm) 317 317 387 427 473 473 528
(L/s) 20.0 20.0 24.5 27.0 29.9 29.9 33.3
General Unit
Refrigerant Type R-134a or R-513A
# Refrig Circuits 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Refrigerant Charge (lb) 99.2/99.2 99.2/99.2 97/97 121.3/121.3 121.3/123.5 121.3/121.3 119/119
(kg) 45/45 45/45 44/44 55/55 55/56 55/55 54/54
Oil Type OIL00048
Oil Charge (qt) 7.2/7.2 7.2/7.2 7.2/7.2 7.2/7.2 7.2/10.5 10.5/10.5 10.5/10.5
(L) 6.8/6.8 6.8/6.8 6.8/6.8 6.8/6.8 6.8/9.9 9.9/9.9 9.9/9.9
1. Data containing information on two circuits is shown as circuit 1/circuit 2.
2. Flow limits are for water only.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 15
General Information

Table 7. General data – RTWD, 50 Hz, high efficiency (continued)

Size 130 140 160 180 200 220 250

Compressor
Size Ckt1/Ckt2 M1/M1 M1/M2 M2/M2 M2/N1 N1/N1 N1/N2 N2/N2
Evaporator
2 Pass Arrangement
Water Conn. Size NPS 5 5 5 5 6 6 6
(mm) 125 125 125 125 150 150 150
Water Storage (gal) 19.2 20.3 22.3 24.2 28.6 29.9 31.8
(L) 72.6 77.0 84.5 91.5 108.3 113.3 120.3
Minimum Flow (gpm) 141 152 170 187 211 224 240
(L/s) 8.9 9.5 10.7 11.8 13.3 14.1 15.1
Maximum Flow (gpm) 515 554 621 683 773 817 879
(L/s) 32.5 35.0 39.2 43.1 48.8 51.6 55.5
3 Pass Arrangement
Water Conn. Size NPS 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
(mm) 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Water Storage (gal) 18.8 20.0 22.0 23.8 27.9 29.2 31.0
(L) 71.2 75.6 83.2 90.1 105.5 110.5 117.5
Minimum Flow (gpm) 94 101 114 125 141 149 160
(L/s) 5.9 6.4 7.1 7.8 8.9 9.4 10.1
Maximum Flow (gpm) 344 370 415 456 515 545 586
(L/s) 21.7 23.3 26.2 28.7 32.5 34.4 37.0
Condenser
Water Conn. Size NPS 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
(mm) 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
Water Storage (gal) 21.6 22.9 24.6 26.2 31.1 31.1 35.2
(L) 81.7 86.8 93.0 99.2 117.8 117.8 133.3
Minimum Flow (gpm) 160 173 190 206 245 245 286
(L/s) 10.0 10.9 12.0 13.0 15.4 15.4 18.0
Maximum Flow (gpm) 583 634 694 755 895 895 1046
(L/s) 36.8 40.0 43.8 47.6 56.5 56.5 66.1
General Unit
Refrigerant Type R-134a or R-513A
# Refrig Circuits 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Refrigerant Charge (lb) 134.5/134.5 132.3/136.7 134.5/134.5 132.3/136.7 178.6/178.6 176.4/183.0 180.8/180.8
(kg) 61/61 60/62 61/61 60/62 81/81 80/83 82/82
Oil Type OIL00048
Oil Charge (qt) 10.5/10.5 10.5/10.5 10.5/10.5 10.5/12.4 12.4/12.4 12.4/12.4 12.4/12.4
(L) 9.9/9.9 9.9/9.9 9.9/9.9 9.9/11.7 11.7/11.7 11.7/11.7 11.7/11.7
1. Data containing information on two circuits is shown as circuit 1/circuit 2.
2. Flow limits are for water only.

16 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 General Information

Table 8. General data – RTWD, 50 Hz, premium efficiency

Size 160 180 200

Compressor
Size Ckt1/Ckt2 M2/M2 M2/N1 N1/N1
Evaporator
2 Pass Arrangement
Water Conn. Size NPS 6 6 6
(mm) 150 150 150
Water Storage (gal) 29.3 31.3 31.8
(L) 110.9 118.3 120.3
Minimum Flow (gpm) 187 202 240
(L/s) 11.8 12.7 15.1
Maximum Flow (gpm) 683 739 879
(L/s) 43.1 46.7 55.5
3 Pass Arrangement
Water Conn. Size NPS 4 4 4
(mm) 100 100 100
Water Storage (gal) 28.6 30.6 31.0
(L) 108.3 115.7 117.5
Minimum Flow (gpm) 125 135 160
(L/s) 7.8 8.5 10.1
Maximum Flow (gpm) 455 492 586
(L/s) 28.7 31.1 37.0
Condenser
Water Conn. Size NPS 6 6 6
(mm) 150 150 150
Water Storage (gal) 30.0 34.5 39.2
(L) 113.4 130.6 148.3
Minimum Flow (gpm) 206 245 326
(L/s) 13.0 15.4 20.5
Maximum Flow (gpm) 754 895 1192
(L/s) 47.6 56.5 75.3
General Unit
Refrigerant Type R-134a
# Refrig Circuits 2 2 2
Refrigerant Charge (lb) 176.4/176.4 174.2/178.6 176.4/174.2
(kg) 80/80 79/81 80/79
Oil Type OIL00048
Oil Charge (qt) 10.5/10.5 10.5/12.4 12.4/12.4
(L) 9.9/9.9 9.9/11.7 11.7/11.7
1. Data containing information on two circuits is shown as circuit 1/circuit 2.
2. Flow limits are for water only.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 17
General Information

RTUD and Condenser General Data

Table 9. General data – RTUD, 60 Hz

Size 80 90 100 110 120 130

Compressor
Size Ckt1/Ckt2 K1/K1 K2/K2 K2/L1 L1/L1 L1/L2 L2/L2
Evaporator
2 Pass Arrangement
Water Conn. Size NPS 4 4 4 5 5 5
mm 100 100 100 125 125 125
Water Storage (gal) 9.8 10.6 12.0 14.0 15.3 15.3
(L) 37.1 40.2 45.3 53.0 58.0 58.0
Minimum Flow (gpm) 77 79 91 99 111 111
(L/s) 4.9 5.0 5.7 6.2 7.0 7.0
Maximum Flow (gpm) 281 291 335 363 408 408
(L/s) 17.7 21.2 23.0 25.8 28.3 30.0
3 Pass Arrangement
Water Conn. Size NPS 3 3 3 4 4 4
mm 80 80 80 100 100 100
Water Storage (gal) 9.5 10.3 11.6 13.7 15.1 15.1
(L) 36.0 39.0 44.0 52.0 57.0 57.0
Minimum Flow (gpm) 51 53 61 66 74 74
(L/s) 3.2 3.3 3.8 4.2 4.7 4.7
Maximum Flow (gpm) 187 194 224 242 272 272
(L/s) 11.8 12.2 14.1 15.3 17.2 17.2
General Unit
Refrigerant Type R-134a
# Refrig Circuits 2 2 2 2 2 2
Refrigerant Charge (lb) 50/50 49/49 47/47 65/65 64/64 64/64
(kg) 22.7/22.7 22.2/22.2 21.3/21.3 29.5/29.5 29.0/29.0 29.0/29.0
Oil Type OIL00048
Oil Charge (qt) 7.2/7.2 7.2/7.2 7.2/10.5 10.5/10.5 10.5/10.5 10.5/10.5
(L) 6.8/6.8 6.8/6.8 6.8/9.9 9.9/9.9 9.9/9.9 9.9/9.9
Discharge Connection
(inch) 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.6 2.6 2.6
Diameter
Liquid Connection Diameter (inch) 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.4 1.4 1.4
1. Data containing information on two circuits is shown as circuit 1/circuit 2.
2. Flow limits are for water only.

18 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 General Information

Table 10. General data – RTUD, 60 Hz (continued)

Size 150 160 180 200 220 250

Compressor
Size Ckt1/Ckt2 L2/M1 M1/M1 M1/M2 M2/M2 M2/N1 N1
Evaporator
2 Pass Arrangement
Water Conn. Size NPS 5 5 5 5 5 5
mm 125 125 125 125 125 125
Water Storage (gal) 16.5 19.2 19.2 20.3 22.3 24.2
(L) 62.4 72.6 72.6 77.0 84.5 91.5
Minimum Flow (gpm) 122 140 140 151 169 186
(L/s) 7.7 8.8 8.8 9.5 10.7 11.7
Maximum Flow (gpm) 447 514 514 553 620 681
(L/s) 28.2 32.4 32.4 34.9 39.1 43.0
3 Pass Arrangement
Water Conn. Size NPS 4 4 4 4 4 4
mm 100 100 100 100 100 100
Water Storage (gal) 16.1 18.8 18.8 20.0 22.0 23.8
(L) 61.0 71.2 71.2 75.6 83.2 90.1
Minimum Flow (gpm) 81 94 94 100 112 124
(L/s) 5.1 5.9 5.9 6.3 7.1 7.8
Maximum Flow (gpm) 298 343 343 368 413 454
(L/s) 18.8 21.6 21.6 23.2 26.1 28.6
General Unit
Refrigerant Type R-134a
# Refrig Circuits 2 2 2 2 2 2
Recommended Refrigerant
(lb) 62/62 66/66 66/66 66/66 63/63 61/61
Charge¹,³
(kg) 28.1/28.1 29.9/29.9 29.9/29.9 29.9/29.9 28.6/28.6 27.7/27.7
Oil Type OIL00048
Oil Charge¹ (qt) 10.5/10.5 10.5/10.5 10.5/12.4 12.4/12.4 12.4/12.4 12.4/12.4
(L) 9.9/9.9 9.9/9.9 9.9/11.7 11.7/11.7 11.7/11.7 11.7/11.7
Discharge Connection
(inch) 2.6 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1
Diameter
Liquid Connection Diameter (inch) 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.6
1. Data containing information on two circuits is shown as circuit 1/circuit 2.
2. Flow limits are for water only.
3. Condenserless chiller is not factory charged, the refrigerant must be purchased and charged in the field.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 19
General Information

Table 11. General data – condenser by Trane, 60 Hz

Size 80 90 100 110 120 130

Condenser
Condenser Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1
Fins/Inch 12 10 10 12 8 10
Coil Length (inch) 162 216 216 216 270 270
(mm) 4115 5486 5486 5486 6858 6858
Coil Width (inch) 85 85 85 85 85 85
(mm) 2159 2159 2159 2159 2159 2159
Number of Rows 3 3 4 4 4 4
Condenser Fans
Fan Quantity 6 8 8 8 10 10
Diameter (inch) 30 30 30 30 30 30
(mm) 762 762 762 762 762 762
Nominal RPM (rpm) 850 850 850 850 850 850
Air Flow (cfm) 56,646 78,280 72,248 69,280 94,490 90,310
Tip Speed (fpm) 6676 6676 6676 6676 6676 6676
Motor HP (hp) 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
General
Recommended Refrigerant
(lbs) 40/40 52/52 68/68 68/68 85/85 85/85
Charge¹
(kg) 18.1/18.1 23.6/23.6 30.8/30.8 30.8/30.8 38.6/38.6 38.6/38.6
Discharge/Liquid Connection
(inch) 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1
Diameters
(mm) 54 54 54 54 54 54
1. Data containing information on two circuits is shown as circuit 1/circuit 2.
2. Condenser is not factory charged, the refrigerant must be purchased and charged in the field.

20 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 General Information

Table 12. General data – condenser by Trane, 60 Hz (continued)

Size 150 160 180 200 220 250

Condenser
Condenser Quantity 2 2 2 2 2 2
Fins/Inch¹ 8/12 12/12 12/8 8/8 8/10 10/10
Coil Length¹ (inch) 162/162 162/162 162/216 216/216 216/216 216/216
4115/4115 4115/4115 4115/5486 5486/5486 5486/5486 5486/5486
Coil Width¹ (inch) 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85
2159/2159 2159/2159 2159/2159 2159/2159 2159/2159 2159/2159
Number of Rows 3/3 3/3 3/3 3/3 3/4 4/4
Condenser Fans
Fan Quantity¹ 6/6 6/6 6/8 8/8 8/8 8/8
Diameter (inch) 30 30 30 30 30 30
Nominal RPM (rpm) 850 850 850 850 850 850
Air Flow¹ (cfm) 60,954/56,646 56,646/56,646 56,646/81,272 81,272/81,272 81,272/72,248 72,248/72,248
Tip Speed (fpm) 6676 6676 6676 6676 6676 6676
Motor HP (hp) 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
General
Recommended Refrigerant
(lbs) 76/76 76/76 76/101 101/101 101/134 134/134
Charge²,³
(kg) 34.5/34.5 34.5/34.5 34.5/45.8 45.8/45.8 45.8/60.8 60.8/60.8
Discharge/Liquid Connection
(inch) 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125
Diameters
(mm) 54 54 54 54 54 54
1. Data containing information on two condensers is shown as cond 1/cond 2.
2. Data containing information on two circuits is shown as circuit 1/circuit 2.
3. Condenser is not factory charged, the refrigerant must be purchased and charged in the field.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 21
Pre-Installation
Inspection Checklist Installation requirements and
When the unit is delivered, verify that it is the correct unit Contractor responsibilities
and that it is properly equipped. Compare the information
which appears on the unit nameplate with the ordering A list of the contractor responsibilities typically associated
and submittal information. See “Model Number with the unit installation process is provided in Table 13.
Descriptions,” p. 7. Note: Unit Start-up must be completed by a qualified
Inspect all exterior components for visible damage. Report Trane service technician.
any apparent damage or material shortage to the carrier Table 13. Installation requirements
and make a “unit damage” notation on the carrier's Trane Supplied
delivery receipt. Specify the extent and type of damage Type of Field Field Supplied
found and notify the appropriate Trane Sales Office. Rqmt Trane Installed Installed Field Installed
Foundation • Meet foundation
Important: Do not proceed with installation of a requirements
damaged unit without sales office approval. Rigging • Safety chains
Clevis connectors
To protect against loss due to damage incurred in transit, Lifting beam
complete the following checklist upon receipt of the unit. Isolation • Isolation • Isolation pads or neoprene
pads or isolators (optional)
• Inspect the individual pieces of the shipment before neoprene
accepting the unit. Check for obvious damage to the isolators
unit or packing material. (opt)
Electrical • Circuit • Flow • Circuit breakers or fusible
• Inspect the unit for concealed damage as soon as breakers or switches disconnects (opt)
possible after delivery and before it is stored. fusible (may be • Electrical connections to unit
Concealed damage must be reported within 15 days. disconnects field mounted starter (opt)
(optional) supplied) • Electrical connections to
• If concealed damage is discovered, stop unpacking the • Unit mounted • Water remote mounted starter
shipment. Do not remove damaged material from the starter regulating (opt)
valve • Wiring sizes per submittal
receiving location. Take photos of the damage, if (optional) and NEC
possible. The owner must provide reasonable • Terminal lugs
evidence that the damage did not occur after delivery. • Ground connection(s)
• Notify the carrier's terminal of the damage • BAS wiring (opt)
• Control voltage wiring
immediately, by phone and by mail. Request an • Chilled water pump
immediate, joint inspection of the damage with the contactor and wiring
carrier and the consignee. including interlock
• Condenser water pump
• Notify the Trane sales representative and arrange for contactor and wiring
repair. Do not repair the unit, however, until damage is including interlock
inspected by the carrier's representative. • Option relays and wiring
Water • Flow • Flow • Taps for thermometers and
piping switches switches gauges
Unit Storage (optional)
(may be • Thermometers
field • Strainers (as required)
supplied) • Water flow pressure gauges
If the chiller is to be stored for more than one month prior • Water • Isolation and balancing
to installation, observe the following precautions: regulating valves in water piping
valve
• Do not remove the protective coverings from the • Vents and drain on waterbox
(optional)
valves
electrical panel.
• Pressure relief valves (for
• Store the chiller in a dry, secure area. waterboxes as required)
• At least every three months, attach a gauge and Relief • Single relief • Vent line and flexible
valve connector and vent line from
manually check the pressure in the refrigerant circuit. • Dual relief relief valve to atmosphere
If the refrigerant pressure is below 71 psig at 70°F (or valves (opt)
46 psig at 50°F), call a qualified service organization Insulation • Insulation • Insulation
and the appropriate Trane sales office. • High humidity
insulation (opt)
Note: Pressure will be approximately 20 psig if shipped Water • Grooved pipe
with the optional nitrogen charge. Piping • Grooved pipe
Connection to flanged
Componen connection
ts (opt)
Other • R-134a refrigerant (1 lb.
Materials max per machine as needed)
• Dry nitrogen (20 psig max
per machine as needed)

22 RLC-SVX09L-EN
Dimensions and Weights
Unit Dimensions
See unit submittals for specific unit dimensions and water
connection locations.

Service Clearances
Figure 2. RTWD/RTUD service clearances

E F G C

A D

Notes:
• See Table 14 for clearance values. • All clearance values are taken from the edge of the unit.
• All unit configurations require 36 inch (914 mm) Actual unit configuration may vary from that shown in
clearance above the unit. figure above.

Table 14. Service clearances

Clearance Door Swing

Unit Configuration A(a) B C(b) D(c) E(d) F(e) G(f)
Model Tons Efficiency Hz in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm
RTWD 80-140 Standard 60
36 914 36 914 36 914 127 3226 31.3 796.9 31.1 790.1 22.4 568.1
RTWD 70-150 Standard 50
RTWD/
80-130 High 60
RTUD 36 914 36 914 36 914 115 2921 31.3 796.9 31.1 790.1 22.4 568.1
RTWD 60-120 High 50
RTWD 150-250 High 60
36 914 36 914 40 1016 114.8 2916 31.3 796.9 31.1 790.1 22.4 568.1
RTUD 150-250 High 60
RTWD 150-200 Premium 60 36 914 36 914 40 1016 134.5 3416 31.3 796.9 31.1 790.1 22.4 568.1
(a) Condenser supply waterbox end - minimum clearance required for maintenance.
(b) Clearance of 42 inches (1067 mm) is required to other ground parts. Clearance of 48 inches (1220 mm) required for two units installed with panels
facing each other or other live parts.
(c) Condenser return waterbox end - minimum clearance required for tube removal.
(d) Door swing - panel power section (left).
(e) Door swing - panel power section (middle).
(f) Door swing - panel control section door swing.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 23
Dimensions and Weights

Weights
RTWD

Table 15. Weights – RTWD – 60 Hz

Standard Efficiency High Efficiency Premium Efficiency

Model Operating Shipping Operating Shipping Operating Shipping
lb kg lb kg lb kg lb kg lb kg lb kg
80 5900 2676 5703 2587 5732 2600 5551 2518 - - - -
90 5933 2691 5721 2595 5792 2627 5587 2534 - - - -
100 6140 2785 5902 2677 6255 2837 6025 2733 - - - -
110 6332 2872 6074 2755 6475 2937 6208 2816 - - - -
120 6530 2962 6248 2834 6510 2953 6230 2826 - - - -
130 6535 2964 6244 2832 6543 2968 6248 2834 - - - -
140 6971 3162 6649 3016 - - - - - - - -
150 - - - - 7884 3576 7544 3422 8724 3957 8243 3739
160 - - - - 8395 3808 8036 3645 9171 4160 8691 3942
180 - - - - 8490 3851 8098 3673 9290 4214 8772 3979
200 - - - - 8578 3891 8157 3700 9337 4235 8803 3993
220 - - - - 9493 4306 8995 4080 - - - -
250 - - - - 10071 4568 9478 4299 - - - -
Note: Weights include optional base rail fork lifting. Subtract 300 lbs (136.1 kg) if this option is not selected.

Table 16. Weights – RTWD – 50 Hz

Standard Efficiency High Efficiency Premium Efficiency

Model Operating Shipping Operating Shipping Operating Shipping
lb kg lb kg lb kg lb kg lb kg lb kg
60 - - - - 5706 2588 5525 2506 - - - -
70 5874 2664 5677 2575 5724 2596 5534 2510 - - - -
80 6030 2735 5807 2634 5893 2673 5680 2576 - - - -
90 6186 2806 5937 2693 6319 2866 6063 2750 - - - -
100 6268 2843 6010 2726 6412 2908 6145 2787 - - - -
110 6332 2872 6074 2755 6495 2946 6220 2821 - - - -
120 6903 3131 6614 3000 6914 3136 6619 3002 - - - -
130 7337 3328 7015 3182 8188 3709 7848 3555 - - - -
140 7342 3330 7020 3184 8256 3784 7895 3606 - - - -
150 7395 3354 7049 3197 - - - - - - - -
160 - - - - 8353 3740 7963 3576 9061 4110 8595 3885
180 - - - - 8770 3980 8351 3789 9581 4346 9032 4097
200 - - - - 9740 4426 9242 4200 10060 4563 9467 4294
220 - - - - 9778 4442 9268 4211 - - - -
250 - - - - 9943 4517 9383 4263 - - - -
Note: Weights include optional base rail fork lifting. Subtract 300 lbs (136.1 kg) if this option is not selected.

24 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Dimensions and Weights

RTUD

Table 17. RTUD weights - 60 Hz

Operating Shipping
Model lb kg lb kg
80 4874 2211 4793 2174
90 4892 2219 4804 2179
100 5073 2301 4974 2256
110 5326 2416 5221 2368
120 5322 2414 5194 2356
130 5322 2414 5194 2356
150 5917 2684 5781 2622
160 6804 3086 6643 3013
180 6876 3119 6715 3046
200 6980 3166 6810 3089
220 7300 3311 7112 3226
250 7602 3448 7401 3357
Note: Weights include optional base rail fork lifting, subtract 300 lbs (136.1 kg) if this option is not selected.

Air-Cooled Condenser
Table 18. Air-cooled condenser shipping weights

Condenser 1 Condenser 2
RTUD Size lb kg lb kg
80 2100 953 - -
90 2651 1202 - -
100 2884 1308 - -
110 2950 1338 - -
120 4005 1817 - -
130 4046 1835 - -
150 2044 927 2100 953
160 2100 953 2100 953
180 2100 953 2526 1146
200 2526 1146 2526 1146
220 2526 1146 2884 1308
250 2884 1308 2884 1308

RLC-SVX09L-EN 25
Installation - Mechanical
Location Requirements gravity dimensions. Refer to the rigging label attached to
the unit for further details.
Noise Considerations
WARNING
• Refer to Trane Engineering Bulletin -Series RChiller
Sound Ratings and Installation Guide for sound Heavy Objects!
consideration applications. Failure to follow instructions below or properly lift unit
could result in unit dropping and possibly crushing
• Locate the unit away from sound-sensitive areas.
operator/technician which could result in death or
• Install the isolation pads under the unit. Refer to “Unit serious injury, and equipment or property-only damage.
Isolation.”
• Equipment is top heavy. Use caution when lifting/
• Install rubber vibration isolators in all water piping. moving equipment to prevent unit from tipping.
• Seal all wall penetrations. • Ensure that all the lifting equipment used is properly
Note: Consult an acoustical engineer for critical rated for the weight of the unit being lifted.Each of
applications. the cables (chains or slings), hooks, and shackles
used to lift the unit must be capable of supporting the
Foundation entire weight of the unit. Lifting cables (chains or
slings) may not be of the same length. Adjust as
Provide rigid, non-warping mounting pads or a concrete
necessary for even unit lift.
foundation of sufficient strength and mass to support the
applicable operating weight (i.e., including completed • The high center of gravity on this unit requires the use
piping, and full operating charges of refrigerant, oil and of an anti-rolling cable (chain or sling). To prevent unit
water). See chapter“Dimensions and Weights,” p. 23 for from rolling, attach cable (chain or sling) with no
unit operating weights. Once in place, the unit must be tension and minimal slack around compressor
level within 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) over its length and width. suction pipe as shown.
The Trane Company is not responsible for equipment • Do not use fork lift to move or lift unit unless unit has
problems resulting from an improperly designed or lifting base with locations marked by caution labels
constructed foundation. installed.

Clearances Figure 3. Equipment is top heavy (see warning above)

Provide enough space around the unit to allow the
installation and maintenance personnel unrestricted
access to all service points. Refer to submittal drawings for
the unit dimensions, to provide sufficient clearance for the
opening of control panel doors and unit service. Refer to
the chapter on “Unit Dimensions/Weights” for minimum
clearances. In all cases, local codes which require
additional clearances will take precedence over these
recommendations.
Note: Required vertical clearance above the unit is 36 inch
WARNING
(914.4 mm). There should be no piping or conduit
located over the compressor motor. If the unit Improper Unit Lift!
configuration requires a variance to the clearance Failure to properly lift unit could result in unit dropping
dimensions, contact your Trane Sales Office and possibly crushing operator/technician which could
Representative. Also refer to Trane Engineering result in death or serious injury, and equipment or
Bulletins for application information on RTWD/ property-only damage. Test lift unit approximately 24
RTUD chillers. inches to verify proper center of gravity lift point. To
avoid dropping of unit, reposition lifting point if unit is
not level.
Rigging
The Model RTWD/RTUD chiller should be moved by lifting, Lifting Procedure
unless the unit is ordered with the Base Rail Forklifting Attach chains or cables to lifting beam, as shown in
option. Refer to the unit model number, digit 46, for more Figure 4. Lifting beam crossbars MUST be positioned so
details. lifting cables do not contact the sides of the unit. Attach the
See Table 15, p. 24 thru Table 17, p. 25 for typical unit lifting anti-rolling cable to the circuit 2 compressor suction pipe.
weights and Table 23, p. 33 thru Table 27, p. 35 for center of Adjust as necessary for even level lift.

26 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Installation - Mechanical

Figure 4. RTWD/RTUD rigging

60 D eg. M A X

40” MIN

110” MIN 48” MIN

ANTI-ROLLING CABLE

48” MIN

CG CG

Approximate location Z
X of center of gravity

Unit Isolation and Leveling Neoprene Isolator Installation (optional)

Mounting Install the optional neoprene isolators at each mounting
location. Isolators are identified by part number and color.
Construct an isolated concrete pad for the unit or provide Refer to submittal drawing for correct isolators.
concrete footings at each of the four unit mounting points.
Mount the unit directly to the concrete pads or footings. 1. Secure the isolators to the mounting surface, using the
mounting slots in the isolator base plate, as shown in
Level the unit using the base rail as a reference. The unit Figure . Do not fully tighten the isolator mounting bolts
must be level within 1/4 inch over the entire length and at this time.
width. Use shims as necessary to level the unit.
2. Align the mounting holes in the base of the unit, with
Isolation Pads the threaded
positioning pins on the top of the isolators.
Note: The elastomeric pads shipped (as standard) are
adequate for most installations. For additional 3. Lower the unit on to the isolators and secure the
details on isolation practices, refer to Trane isolator to the unit with a nut.
Engineering Bulletin -Series RChiller Sound 4. Level the unit carefully. Refer to “Leveling”. Fully
Ratings and Installation Guide, or consult an tighten the isolator mounting bolts.
acoustical engineer for sound-sensitive
installations.
During final positioning of the unit, place the isolation
pads under the evaporator and condenser tube sheet
supports as shown in Figure 5, p. 28. Level the unit as
described in the next main paragraph.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 27
Installation - Mechanical

Figure 5. Isolator pad placement

Note:
Note: Level
Level unit
unit to to 1/4”
1/4” (6.35
(6.35 mm)mm) across
across

NOTE:
Unit level to 1/4” (6.35mm)
across width and length.

Figure 6. RTWD/RTUD neoprene isolator

L
C
Mounting molded in Neoprene 1/2-13NC-2B

H (RD) W
H (R) D

Table 19. Isolator part numbers and dimensions(a)

Isolator Type Maximum Dimension - in (mm)

Color [Ext](b)
Max Load-
Model Size Hz Effic. lbs (kg) Deflection (in) A B C D E H L W
80, 90, 100, 110,
RTWD 60 STD
120, 130, 140
80, 90, 100, 110,
RTWD 60 HIGH
120, 130
70, 80, 90, 100, RDP-4
3.0 0.50 5.00 0.56 0.38 2.75 6.25 4.63
RTWD 110, 120, 130, 50 STD Red [62] 0.50
(76.2) (12.7) (127.0) (14.2) (9.7) (69.8) (158.8) (117.6)
140, 150 2250 (1021)
60,70,80, 90,
RTWD 50 HIGH
100, 110, 120
80, 90, 100, 110,
RTUD 60 HIGH
120, 130
150, 160, 180,
RTWD 60 HIGH
200, 220, 250
150, 160,
RTWD 60 PREM
180, 200
RDP-4
130, 140, 160, 3.0 0.50 5.00 0.56 0.38 2.75 6.25 4.63
Green [63] 0.50
RTWD 180, 200, 220, 50 HIGH (76.2) (12.7) (127.0) (14.2) (9.7) (69.8) (158.8) (117.6)
3000 (1361)
250
RTWD 160, 180, 200 50 PREM
150, 160, 180,
RTUD 60 HIGH
200, 220, 250
(a) See submittal drawing to verify correct isolators.
(b) Part number is X10140305-xx

28 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Installation - Mechanical

Figure 7. Mounting point locations and weights

RTWD - Std efficiency (all)
RTWD - High efficiency, 80-120T (60 Hz), 60-120T (50 Hz)
RTUD - 80-130T

Figure 8. Mounting point locations and weights

RTWD - High efficiency, 150-250T (60Hz), 130-250T (50Hz)
RTWD - Premium efficiency (all)
RTUD - 150-250T

Without
Panel

With
Panel

RLC-SVX09L-EN 29
Installation - Mechanical

Corner Weights
Important: Isolators need to be placed under G1, G2, G3 and G4.

Table 20. Corner weights, RTWD, 60 Hz

G1 G2 G3 G4
Unit lb kg lb kg lb kg lb kg Reference
Standard Efficiency
80 1566 710 1566 710 1385 628 1385 628 Figure 7
90 1571 713 1577 715 1390 630 1396 633 Figure 7
100 1599 725 1617 733 1454 660 1471 667 Figure 7
110 1662 754 1690 767 1477 670 1503 681 Figure 7
120 1689 766 1795 814 1477 670 1569 712 Figure 7
130 1688 765 1797 815 1478 670 1573 713 Figure 7
140 1654 750 1905 864 1586 719 1827 829 Figure 7
High Efficiency
80 1465 664 1595 724 1279 580 1393 632 Figure 7
90 1479 671 1610 730 1294 587 1409 639 Figure 7
100 1602 726 1704 773 1429 648 1521 690 Figure 7
110 1673 759 1789 811 1457 661 1557 706 Figure 7
120 1680 762 1798 816 1465 664 1569 711 Figure 7
130 1685 764 1808 820 1472 668 1580 716 Figure 7
150 1181 853 2010 911 1937 878 2070 939 Figure 8
160 1987 901 2261 1025 1946 883 2215 1004 Figure 8
180 2002 908 2284 1036 1969 893 2246 1019 Figure 8
200 2020 916 2309 1047 1989 902 2273 1031 Figure 8
220 2171 985 2515 1141 2226 1010 2579 1170 Figure 8
250 2256 1023 2728 1237 2296 1041 2776 1259 Figure 8
Premium Efficiency
150 2089 947 2195 996 2171 985 2281 1035 Figure 8
160 2173 985 2416 1096 2176 987 2420 1097 Figure 8
180 2194 995 2454 1113 2198 997 2458 1115 Figure 8
200 2207 1001 2461 1116 2213 1004 2468 1119 Figure 8

30 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Installation - Mechanical

Table 21. Corner weights, RTWD, 50 Hz

G1 G2 G3 G4
Unit lb kg lb kg lb kg lb kg Reference
Standard Efficiency
70 1555 705 1563 709 1375 624 1382 627 Figure 7
80 1560 708 1595 723 1422 645 1454 659 Figure 7
90 1592 722 1655 751 1442 654 1498 680 Figure 7
100 1621 735 1668 756 1468 666 1511 685 Figure 7
110 1662 754 1690 766 1477 670 1503 681 Figure 7
120 1634 741 1872 852 1578 716 1814 823 Figure 7
130 1692 767 2091 948 1590 721 1965 891 Figure 7
140 1696 769 2092 949 1591 722 1964 891 Figure 7
150 1707 774 2107 956 1603 727 1978 897 Figure 7
High Efficiency
60 1455 660 1592 722 1270 576 1389 630 Figure 7
70 1461 663 1595 723 1275 578 1392 631 Figure 7
80 1468 666 1632 740 1324 600 1471 667 Figure 7
90 1600 726 1747 792 1421 645 1551 704 Figure 7
100 1631 740 1765 800 1448 657 1567 711 Figure 7
110 1678 761 1793 813 1463 663 1563 709 Figure 7
120 1635 741 1894 859 1569 711 1817 824 Figure 7
130 1889 857 2211 1003 1884 855 2205 1000 Figure 8
140 1904 863 2231 1012 1899 861 2225 1009 Figure 8
160 1927 874 2257 1023 1921 871 2250 1020 Figure 8
180 1931 876 2314 1049 2060 934 2468 1119 Figure 8
200 2195 995 2628 1192 2239 1015 2681 1216 Figure 8
220 2208 1001 2635 1195 2250 1021 2686 1218 Figure 8
250 2241 1016 2686 1218 2281 1035 2735 1240 Figure 8
Premium Efficiency
160 2106 955 2396 1087 2138 970 2433 1103 Figure 8
180 2127 964 5491 1130 2286 1037 2677 1214 Figure 8
200 2245 1018 2723 1235 2291 1039 2778 1260 Figure 8

Table 22. Corner weights, RTUD, 60 Hz, high efficiency

G1 G2 G3 G4
Unit lb kg lb kg lb kg lb kg Reference
80 1331 605 1254 570 1173 533 1104 502 Figure 7
90 1338 608 1258 572 1179 536 1109 504 Figure 7
100 1357 617 1280 582 1247 567 1177 535 Figure 7
110 1454 661 1357 617 1296 589 1210 550 Figure 7
120 1468 666 1367 620 1310 594 1219 553 Figure 7
130 1468 666 1367 620 1310 594 1219 553 Figure 7
150 1242 564 1549 704 1386 630 1729 786 Figure 8
160 1522 692 1709 777 1676 762 1881 855 Figure 8
180 1549 704 1714 779 1707 776 1890 859 Figure 8
200 1606 730 1745 793 1731 787 1881 855 Figure 8
220 1582 719 1782 810 1844 838 2077 944 Figure 8
250 1628 740 1901 864 1872 851 2185 993 Figure 8

RLC-SVX09L-EN 31
Installation - Mechanical

Center of Gravity

Figure 9. Center of gravity

RTWD - Std efficiency (all)
RTWD - High efficiency, 80-120T (60 Hz), 60-120T (50 Hz)
RTUD - 80-130T

Figure 10. Center of gravity

RTWD - High efficiency, 150-250T (60Hz), 130-250T (50Hz)
RTWD - Premium efficiency (all)
RTUD - 150-250T

Without
Panel

With
Panel

32 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Installation - Mechanical

RTWD Units

Table 23. Center of gravity, RTWD, 60Hz, with panel

X Y Z
Unit in mm in mm in mm Reference
Standard Efficiency
80 61 1543 34 868 15 381 Figure 9
90 61 1544 34 868 15 381 Figure 9
100 62 1566 35 879 15 382 Figure 9
110 61 1547 35 891 15 383 Figure 9
120 60 1534 34 876 15 390 Figure 9
130 60 1535 35 876 15 391 Figure 9
140 63 1607 36 903 16 403 Figure 9
High Efficiency
80 55 1393 35 879 16 394 Figure 9
90 55 1395 35 877 16 394 Figure 9
100 55 1409 34 869 15 390 Figure 9
110 55 1391 35 880 15 391 Figure 9
120 55 1393 35 879 15 391 Figure 9
130 55 1394 35 879 15 392 Figure 9
150 59 1511 39 995 15 391 Figure 10
160 58 1475 40 1020 16 401 Figure 10
180 58 1478 40 1018 16 401 Figure 10
200 58 1479 40 1016 16 402 Figure 10
220 59 1508 41 1035 16 404 Figure 10
250 59 1502 41 1046 16 411 Figure 10
Premium Efficiency
150 70 1772 39 986 15 388 Figure 10
160 68 1741 40 1012 16 397 Figure 10
180 69 1742 40 1010 16 398 Figure 10
200 69 1742 40 1008 16 398 Figure 10

Table 24. Center of gravity, RTWD, 60Hz, without panel

X Y Z
Unit in mm in mm in mm Reference
High Efficiency
150 60 1518 38 959 17 441 Figure 10
160 58 1478 39 989 18 449 Figure 10
180 58 1481 39 987 18 449 Figure 10
200 58 1482 39 985 18 449 Figure 10
220 60 1513 40 1006 18 446 Figure 10
250 59 1507 40 1019 18 451 Figure 10
Premium Efficiency
150 70 1773 37 949 17 434 Figure 10
160 68 1740 39 980 17 441 Figure 10
180 68 1740 38 978 17 442 Figure 10
200 68 1741 38 977 17 441 Figure 10

RLC-SVX09L-EN 33
Installation - Mechanical

Table 25. Center of gravity, RTWD, 50Hz, with panel

X Y Z
Unit in mm in mm in mm Reference
Standard Efficiency
70 61 1543 34 868 15 381 Figure 9
80 62 1567 34 875 15 384 Figure 9
90 61 1562 35 882 15 387 Figure 9
100 61 1562 35 886 15 385 Figure 9
110 61 1547 35 891 15 383 Figure 9
120 63 1612 36 905 16 403 Figure 9
130 63 1591 37 929 16 414 Figure 9
140 63 1590 37 929 16 414 Figure 9
150 63 1590 37 927 16 414 Figure 9
High Efficiency
60 55 1393 35 879 16 395 Figure 9
70 55 1393 35 878 16 395 Figure 9
80 56 1416 35 885 16 397 Figure 9
90 55 1405 34 871 16 395 Figure 9
100 55 1405 34 876 15 393 Figure 9
110 55 1393 35 879 15 391 Figure 9
120 57 1460 36 907 16 404 Figure 9
130 55 1393 35 879 16 395 Figure 9
150 59 1488 40 1018 16 406 Figure 10
160 59 1488 40 1015 16 406 Figure 10
180 60 1536 41 1031 16 409 Figure 10
200 59 1504 41 1052 16 409 Figure 10
220 59 1504 41 1050 16 409 Figure 10
250 59 1503 41 1047 16 409 Figure 9
Premium Efficiency
160 69 1752 40 1007 16 401 Figure 10
180 71 1800 40 1023 16 406 Figure 10
200 59 1504 41 1047 16 411 Figure 10

Table 26. Center of gravity, RTWD, 50Hz, without panel

X Y Z
Unit in mm in mm in mm Reference
High Efficiency
150 59 1492 39 986 18 455 Figure 10
160 59 1492 39 983 18 454 Figure 10
180 61 1544 39 1002 18 456 Figure 10
200 59 1509 40 1025 18 451 Figure 10
220 59 1509 40 1023 18 450 Figure 10
250 59 1508 40 1020 18 450 Figure 10
Premium Efficiency
160 69 1752 38 974 17 446 Figure 10
180 71 1804 39 993 18 448 Figure 10
200 59 1509 40 1021 18 452 Figure 10

34 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Installation - Mechanical

RTUD Units

Table 27. Center of gravity, RTUD, 60Hz, high efficiency

X Y Z
Unit in mm in mm in mm Reference
With Control Panel
80 55 1400 35 895 15 371 Figure 9
90 55 1400 35 894 15 371 Figure 9
100 56 1430 36 906 15 372 Figure 9
110 55 1408 36 909 15 370 Figure 9
120 55 1408 36 908 15 369 Figure 9
130 55 1408 36 908 15 369 Figure 9
150 62 1568 38 973 16 416 Figure 10
160 61 1558 42 1067 16 399 Figure 10
180 61 1559 42 1069 16 397 Figure 10
200 61 1543 42 1069 16 394 Figure 10
220 63 1599 43 1084 16 399 Figure 10
250 63 1589 43 1097 16 405 Figure 10
Without Control Panel
150 64 1627 38 959 17 439 Figure 10
160 62 1573 41 1034 18 457 Figure 10
180 62 1574 41 1037 18 454 Figure 10
200 61 1557 41 1037 18 450 Figure 10
220 64 1618 42 1055 18 454 Figure 10
250 63 1607 42 1070 18 457 Figure 10

RLC-SVX09L-EN 35
Installation - Mechanical

Evaporator Water Piping

Figure 11. Typical water piping setup

Pressure
Water Regulating Shutoff Differential
Valve Valves Gauge
Thermometers
Isolation Manifold
Relief
Valves
Flow Valve
Switch
Cond
Water
Flow

Evap
Water
Flow

Manifold Flow
Shutoff Switch Relief
Isolation
Valves Pressure Valve
Valves
Differential Thermometers
Gauge

Thoroughly flush all water piping to the unit before making

the final piping connections to the unit.
NOTICE:
Components and layout will vary slightly, depending on
Proper Water Treatment!
the location of connections and the water source. The use of untreated or improperly treated water could
result in scaling, erosion, corrosion, algae or slime. It is
NOTICE: recommended that the services of a qualified water
treatment specialist be engaged to determine what
Evaporator Damage! water treatment, if any, is required. Trane assumes no
The chilled water connections to the evaporator are to responsibility for equipment failures which result from
be grooved-pipe type connections. Do not attempt to untreated or improperly treated water, or saline or
weld these connections, as the heat generated from brackish water.
welding can cause microscopic and macroscopic
fractures on the cast iron waterboxes that can lead to Locate the unit near a large capacity drain for water vessel
premature failure of the waterbox. To prevent damage drain-down during shutdown or repair. Condensers and
to chilled water components, do not allow evaporator evaporators are provided with drain connections. 0 All
pressure (maximum working pressure) to exceed 150 local and national codes apply.
psig (10.5 bar).
A vent is provided on the top of the evaporator at the
return end. Be sure to provide additional vents at high
NOTICE: points in the piping to bleed air from the chilled water
Equipment Damage! system. Install necessary pressure gauges to monitor the
If using an acidic commercial flushing solution when entering and leaving chilled water pressures.
flushing the water piping, construct a temporary Provide shutoff valves in lines to the gauges to isolate
bypass around the unit to prevent damage to internal them from the system when they are not in use. Use
components of the evaporator. rubber vibration eliminators to prevent vibration
transmission through the water lines.
NOTICE: If desired, install thermometers in lines to monitor
Equipment Damage! entering and leaving water temperatures. Install a
To prevent evaporator or condenser damage, pipe balancing valve in leaving water line to control water flow
strainers must be installed in the water supplies to balance. Install shutoff valves on both entering and
protect components from water born debris. Trane is leaving water lines to isolate evaporator for service.
not responsible for equipment-only-damage caused by A pipe strainer must be installed in entering water line to
water born debris. prevent water-borne debris from entering the evaporator.

36 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Installation - Mechanical

Reversing Waterboxes
NOTICE:
NOTICE: Water Born Debris!
Equipment Damage! To prevent evaporator or condenser damage, pipe
strainers must be installed in the water supplies to
Do NOT rotate or swap evaporator or condenser water protect components from water born debris. Trane is
boxes end-for-end. Altering water boxes can affect not responsible for equipment-only-damage caused by
equipment operation and can cause equipment water born debris.
damage.

Waterboxes on evaporator and condenser can NOT be NOTICE:

rotated or swapped end for end. Altering waterboxes will Evaporator Damage!
lead to poor efficiency, poor oil management and possible
The chilled water connections to the evaporator are to
freeze-up of evaporator.
be grooved-pipe type connections. Do not attempt to
Figure 12. RTWD water boxes weld these connections, as the heat generated from
welding can cause microscopic and macroscopic
fractures on the cast iron waterboxes that can lead to
premature failure of the waterbox. To prevent damage
to chilled water components, do not allow evaporator
pressure (maximum working pressure) to exceed 150
psig (10.5 bar).

Leaving Chilled Water Piping - Field Installed

• Air vents (to bleed air from system)
Evaporator Piping Components • Water pressure gauges with shutoff valves
• Vibration eliminators
Piping components include all devices and controls used
• Shutoff (isolation) valves
to provide proper water system operation and unit
operating safety. These components and their general • Thermometers
locations are given below. • Cleanout tees
• Balancing valve
Drains and Vents
• Flow Switch (not required if factory installed flow
switch option is selected)
NOTICE: Evaporator Flow Switch (Optional)
Waterbox Damage! If factory installed flow switch option is selected, switch is
Failure of follow these instructions could result in programmed based on the operating conditions
damage to the waterbox. Do not use Teflon® pipe tape submitted with the order. The leaving evaporator
or overtighten when installing valves, drains, plugs, and temperature, fluid type and fluid concentration affect the
vents on cast iron waterboxes. selected flow switch. If the operating conditions on the job
site change, the flow switch may need to be replaced.
Drains and vents are located on each evaporator waterbox.
When the unit is shipped, the drain plugs are removed and The flow switch is powered with 24 Vac. Indicators on
placed in a plastic bag in the control panel, along with the switch are as follows:
condenser drain plugs. Each drain and vent must be piped • Green ON — power is applied
with a shutoff valve, or plug reinstalled, prior to water
pump operation. • Amber - always off

Entering Chilled Water Piping - Field Installed NOTICE:

• Air vents (to bleed air from system) Proper Water Treatment!
• Water pressure gauges with shutoff valves The use of untreated or improperly treated water in this
• Vibration eliminators equipment could result in scaling, erosion, corrosion,
• Shutoff (isolation) valves algae or slime. It is recommended that the services of a
qualified water treatment specialist be engaged to
• Thermometers (if desired)
determine what water treatment, if any, is required.
• Cleanout tees Trane assumes no responsibility for equipment failures
• Relief valve which result from untreated or improperly treated
• Pipe strainer water, or saline or brackish water.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 37
Installation - Mechanical

Important: If using an acidic commercial flushing Flow Proving Devices

solution, construct a temporary bypass
around the unit to prevent damage to
internal components of the evaporator. NOTICE:
Dirt, scale, products of corrosion and other foreign Evaporator Damage!
material will adversely affect heat transfer between the For all RTUD units, chilled water pumps MUST be
water and system components. Foreign matter in the controlled by the Trane CH530 to avoid catastrophic
chilled water system can also increase pressure drop and, damage to the evaporator due to freezing.
consequently, reduce water flow. Proper water treatment
must be determined locally, depending on the type of Important: If factory installed flow switch option is not
system and local water characteristics. selected, installer must provide flow
switches or differential pressure switches
Neither salt nor brackish water is recommended for use in with pump interlocks to prove water flow.
Trane air-cooled Series R® chillers. Use of either will lead
to a shortened life to an indeterminable degree. The Trane To provide chiller protection, install and wire flow switches
Company encourages the employment of a reputable in series with the water pump interlocks, for both chilled
water treatment specialist, familiar with local water water and condenser water circuits (see chapter
conditions, to assist in this determination and in the “Installation - Electrical,” p. 71). Specific connections and
establishment of a proper water treatment program. schematic wiring diagrams are shipped with the unit.

Using untreated or improperly treated water in these units Flow switches must prevent or stop compressor operation
may result in inefficient operation and possible tube if either system water flow drops off below the required
damage. Consult a qualified water treatment specialist to minimum shown on the pressure drop curves. Follow the
determine whether treatment is needed. manufacturer’s recommendations for selection and
installation procedures. General guidelines for flow switch
Indexing Flow Switch installation are outlined below.
To properly index the flow switch, the following • Mount the switch upright, with a minimum of 5 pipe
requirements must be met: diameters straight, horizontal run on each side.
• Dot must be at a position no greater than 90° off Index. • Do not install close to elbows, orifices or valves.
• Torque must be between 22 ft-lb min and 74 ft-lb max. Note: The arrow on switch must point in direction of
• A minimum distance of 5x pipe diameter must be water flow.
maintained between flow switch and any bends, • To prevent switch fluttering, remove all air from water
valves, changes in cross sections, etc. system.
Figure 13. Proper flow switch indexing Note: CH530 provides a 6-sec time delay on flow switch
input before shutting down unit on loss-of-flow
Top View
diagnostic. Contact a qualified service organization
if nuisance machine shutdowns persist.
Flow
Index • Adjust switch to open when water flow falls below
minimum. See General Data tables for minimum flow
recommendations. Flow switch is closed on proof of
water flow.
The flow switch must have the dot in the shaded area
to the left of this line for proper indexing (±90° off Index) NOTICE:
Evaporator Damage!
To prevent evaporator damage, do not use water flow
switch to cycle the system.

38 RLC-SVX09L-EN
RLC-SVX09L-EN
Waterside Pressure Drop - 60 Hz Units - 2 Pass Evaporator
45.0
RTWD080 Std
Pressure Drop Curves

RTWD090 Std
40.0
RTWD100 Std

35.0 RTWD110 Std

RTWD120 Std

30.0 RTWD130 Std

RTWD140 Std
25.0
RTWD80 High

RTWD90 High
20.0
RTWD100 High &
RTUD110 High
RTWD110 High &
15.0

Pressure Drop (ft. H2O)

RTUD120, 130 High
RTWD120 High &
Figure 14. Evaporator pressure drop curves - 2 pass, 60 Hz - RTWD, RTUD

RTUD150 High
10.0 RTWD130 High

5.0

0.0
0.0 50.0 100.0 150.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 350.0 400.0 450.0 500.0
Water Flow (GPM)
For overlapping pressure drop curves, see General Data tables in section “General Information,” p. 9 for limit values.
Installation - Mechanical

39
40
Waterside Pressure Drop - 60 Hz Units - 2 Pass Evaporator
50.0
RTWD150 High

45.0 RTWD160 High

Installation - Mechanical

RTWD180 High
40.0
RTWD200 High
35.0
RTWD220 High

30.0 RTWD250 High

RTWD150 Prem
25.0
RTWD160 Prem

20.0 RTWD180 Prem

Pressure Drop (ft. H2O)

RTWD200 Prem
15.0
Figure 15. Evaporator pressure drop curves - 2 pass, 60 Hz - RTWD, RTUD

10.0

5.0

0.0
0.0 100.0 200.0 300.0 400.0 500.0 600.0 700.0 800.0 900.0
Water Flow (GPM)

RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Waterside Pressure Drop - RTWD 50Hz/RTUD 60Hz Units - 2 Pass Evaporator

RLC-SVX09L-EN
45.0
RTWD70 Std 50Hz
RTWD80 Std 50Hz
40.0 RTWD90 Std 50Hz
RTWD100 Std 50Hz

35.0 RTWD110 Std 50Hz

RTWD120 Std 50Hz
RTWD130 Std 50Hz
30.0
RTWD140 Std 50Hz
RTWD150 Std 50Hz
25.0 RTWD60 High 50Hz &
RTUD80 High 60Hz
RTWD70 High 50Hz &
RTUD90 High 60Hz
RTWD80 High 50Hz &
20.0 RTUD100 High 60Hz
RTWD90 High 50Hz
RTWD100 High 50Hz

Pressure Drop (ft. H2O)

15.0
RTWD110 High 50Hz
RTWD120 High 50Hz
Figure 16. Evaporator pressure drop curves - 2 pass - RTWD 50 Hz, RTUD 60 Hz

10.0

5.0

0.0
0.0 50.0 100.0 150.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 350.0 400.0 450.0 500.0
Water Flow (GPM)
Installation - Mechanical

41
42
Waterside Pressure Drop - 50 Hz Units - 2 Pass Evaporator
50.0
RTWD130 High

45.0
RTWD140 High
Installation - Mechanical

40.0 RTWD160 High

35.0 RTWD180 High

RTWD200 High
30.0
RTWD220 High

25.0
RTWD250 High

20.0 RTWD160 Prem

Figure 17. Evaporator pressure drop curves - 2 pass, 50 hz - RTWD

Pressure Drop (ft. H2O)

15.0 RTWD180 Prem

RTWD200 Prem
10.0

5.0

0.0
50.0 150.0 250.0 350.0 450.0 550.0 650.0 750.0 850.0
Water Flow (GPM)

RLC-SVX09L-EN
RLC-SVX09L-EN
Waterside Pressure Drop - 60 Hz Units - 3 Pass Evaporator
70.0
RTWD080 Std

RTWD090 Std

60.0 RTWD100 Std

RTWD110 Std

50.0 RTWD120 Std

RTWD130 Std

RTWD140 Std
40.0
RTWD80 High

RTWD90 High
30.0
RTWD100 High &
RTUD110 High
RTWD110 High &

Pressure Drop (ft. H2O)

RTUD120, 130 High
20.0 RTWD120 High &
Figure 18. Evaporator pressure drop curves - 3 pass, 60 hz - RTWD, RTUD

RTUD150 High
RTWD130 High

10.0

0.0
0.0 50.0 100.0 150.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 350.0 400.0
Water Flow (GPM)
Installation - Mechanical

43
44
Waterside Pressure Drop - 60 Hz Units - 3 Pass Evaporator
80.0
RTWD150 High &
RTUD160, 180 High
RTWD160 High &
Installation - Mechanical

70.0 RTUD200 High

RTWD180 High &
RTUD 220 High
60.0 RTWD200 High &
RTUD 250 High
RTWD220 High

50.0 RTWD250 High

RTWD150 Prem
40.0
RTWD160 Prem

RTWD180 Prem
30.0
RTWD200 Prem

Pressure Drop (ft. H2O)

Figure 19. Evaporator pressure drop curves - 3 pass, 60 hz - RTWD, RTUD

20.0

10.0

0.0
0.0 100.0 200.0 300.0 400.0 500.0 600.0
Water Flow (GPM)

RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Waterside Pressure Drop - RTWD 50Hz/RTUD 60 Hz Units - 3 Pass Evaporator

RLC-SVX09L-EN
70.0
RTWD70 Std 50Hz

RTWD80 Std 50Hz

RTWD90 Std 50Hz

60.0
RTWD100 Std 50Hz

RTWD110 Std 50Hz

RTWD120 Std 50Hz

50.0
RTWD130 Std 50Hz

RTWD140 Std 50Hz

RTWD150 Std 50Hz

40.0
RTWD60 High 50Hz &
RTUD80 High 60Hz
RTWD70 High 50Hz &
RTUD90 High 60Hz
RTWD80 High 50Hz &
30.0 RTUD100 High 60Hz
RTWD90 High 50Hz

RTWD100 High 50Hz

Pressure Drop (ft. H2O)

RTWD110 High 50Hz
20.0
RTWD120 High 50Hz
Figure 20. Evaporator pressure drop curves - 3 pass - RTWD 50 Hz, RTUD 60 Hz

10.0

0.0
0.0 50.0 100.0 150.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 350.0 400.0
Water Flow (GPM)
Installation - Mechanical

45
46
Waterside Pressure Drop - 50 Hz Units - 3 Pass Evaporator
80.0
RTWD130 High

RTWD140 High
70.0

RTWD160 High
Installation - Mechanical

60.0
RTWD180 High

RTWD200 High
50.0
RTWD220 High

40.0 RTWD250 High

RTWD160 Prem
Figure 21. Evaporator pressure drop curves - 3 pass, 50 Hz - RTWD

30.0

Pressure Drop (ft. H2O)

RTWD180 Prem

RTWD200 Prem
20.0

10.0

0.0
50.0 150.0 250.0 350.0 450.0 550.0
Water Flow (GPM)

RLC-SVX09L-EN
RLC-SVX09L-EN
Waterside Pressure Drop - 60 Hz Units - Condenser
40.0
RTWD080 Std
RTWD090 Std
35.0
RTWD100 Std
RTWD110 Std
30.0 RTWD120 Std
RTWD130 Std

25.0 RTWD140 Std

RTWD80 High
RTWD90 High
20.0
RTWD100 High
Figure 22. Condenser pressure drop curves - RTWD 60 Hz

RTWD110 High
15.0 RTWD120 High

Pressure Drop (ft. H2O)

RTWD130 High

10.0

5.0

0.0
0.0 100.0 200.0 300.0 400.0 500.0 600.0 700.0
Water Flow (GPM)
Installation - Mechanical

47
48
Waterside Pressure Drop - 60 Hz Units - Condenser
45.0
RTWD150 High

40.0 RTWD160 High

Installation - Mechanical

RTWD180 High
35.0
RTWD200 High

30.0 RTWD220 High

RTWD250 High
25.0
RTWD150 Prem

RTWD160 Prem
Figure 23. Condenser pressure drop curves - RTWD 60 Hz

20.0
RTWD180 Prem
15.0

Pressure Drop (ft. H2O)

RTWD200 Prem

10.0

5.0

0.0
0.0 200.0 400.0 600.0 800.0 1000.0 1200.0

Water Flow (GPM)

RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Waterside Pressure Drop - 50 Hz Units - Condenser

RLC-SVX09L-EN
40.0
RTWD70 Std 50Hz
RTWD80 Std 50Hz
35.0 RTWD90 Std 50Hz
RTWD100 Std 50Hz
RTWD110 Std 50Hz
30.0 RTWD120 Std 50Hz
RTWD130 Std 50Hz
RTWD140 Std 50Hz
25.0 RTWD150 Std 50Hz
RTWD60 High 50Hz
RTWD70 High 50Hz
20.0
Figure 24. Condenser pressure drop curves - RTWD 50 Hz

RTWD80 High 50Hz

RTWD90 High 50Hz
RTWD100 High 50Hz
15.0
RTWD110 High 50Hz

Pressure Drop (ft. H2O)

RTWD120 High 50Hz

10.0

5.0

0.0
0.0 100.0 200.0 300.0 400.0 500.0 600.0 700.0
Water Flow (GPM)
Installation - Mechanical

49
50
Waterside Pressure Drop - 50 Hz Units - Condenser
45.0
RTWD130 High

40.0 RTWD140 High

Installation - Mechanical

RTWD160 High
35.0
RTWD180 High

30.0 RTWD200 High

RTWD220 High

25.0
RTWD250 High
Figure 25. Condenser pressure drop curves - RTWD 50 Hz

RTWD160 Prem
20.0

RTWD180 Prem

Pressure Drop (ft. H2O)

15.0
RTWD200 Prem

10.0

5.0

0.0
100.0 300.0 500.0 700.0 900.0 1100.0
Water Flow (GPM)

RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Installation - Mechanical

Low Evap Refrigerant Cutout/Percent Glycol Recommendations

Table 28 and Table 29, p. 52 show the low evaporator If additional inhibitor is used, then use the actual percent
temperature cutout for various freeze inhibitor options to establish the low refrigerant cutout setpoint.
and solution levels.
Additional inhibitor beyond the recommendations will
adversely effect unit performance. The unit efficiency will
be reduced and the saturated evaporator temperature will
be reduced. For some operating conditions this effect can
be significant.
Table 28. Low evaporator refrigerant temperature cutout (LRTC) and low water temperature cutout (LWTC) —
ethylene or propylene glycol
Ethylene Glycol Propylene Glycol
Inhibitor Solution Minimum Minimum Inhibitor Solution Minimum Minimum
Percentage Freeze Point Recommended Recommended Percentage Freeze Point Recommended Recommended
(%) (°F) LRTC (°F) LWTC (°F) (%) (°F) LRTC (°F) LWTC (°F)
0 32.0 28.6 35.0 0 32.0 28.6 35.0
2 31.0 27.6 34.0 2 31.0 27.6 34.0
4 29.7 26.3 32.7 4 29.9 26.5 32.9
5 29.0 25.6 32.0 5 29.3 25.9 32.3
6 28.3 24.9 31.3 6 28.7 25.3 31.7
8 26.9 23.5 29.9 8 27.6 24.2 30.6
10 25.5 22.1 28.5 10 26.4 23.0 29.4
12 23.9 20.5 26.9 12 25.1 21.7 28.1
14 22.3 18.9 25.3 14 23.8 20.4 26.8
15 21.5 18.1 24.5 15 23.1 19.7 26.1
16 20.6 17.2 23.6 16 22.4 19.0 25.4
18 18.7 15.3 21.7 18 20.9 17.5 23.9
20 16.8 13.4 19.8 20 19.3 15.9 22.3
22 14.7 11.3 17.7 22 17.6 14.2 20.6
24 12.5 9.1 15.5 24 15.7 12.3 18.7
25 11.4 8.0 14.4 25 14.8 11.4 17.8
26 10.2 6.8 13.2 26 13.8 10.4 16.8
27 9.0 5.6 12.0 27 12.7 9.3 15.7
28 7.7 4.3 10.7 28 11.6 8.2 14.6
29 6.4 3.0 9.4 29 10.5 7.1 13.5
30 5.1 1.7 8.1 30 9.3 5.9 12.3
32 2.3 -1.1 5.3 32 6.8 3.4 9.8
34 -0.7 -4.1 5.0 34 4.1 0.7 7.1
35 -2.3 -5.0 5.0 35 2.7 -0.7 5.7
36 -3.9 -5.0 5.0 36 1.3 -2.1 5.0
38 -7.3 -5.0 5.0 38 -1.8 -5.0 5.0
40 -10.8 -5.0 5.0 40 -5.2 -5.0 5.0
42 -14.6 -5.0 5.0 42 -8.8 -5.0 5.0
44 -18.6 -5.0 5.0 44 -12.6 -5.0 5.0
45 -20.7 -5.0 5.0 45 -14.6 -5.0 5.0
46 -22.9 -5.0 5.0 46 -16.7 -5.0 5.0
48 -27.3 -5.0 5.0 48 -21.1 -5.0 5.0
50 -32.1 -5.0 5.0 50 -25.8 -5.0 5.0
52 -37.1 -5.0 5.0 52 -30.8 -5.0 5.0
54 -42.3 -5.0 5.0 54 -36.1 -5.0 5.0
55 -45.0 -5.0 5.0 55 -38.9 -5.0 5.0
56 -47.8 -5.0 5.0 56 -41.8 -5.0 5.0
58 -53.7 -5.0 5.0 58 -47.8 -5.0 5.0
60 -59.8 -5.0 5.0 60 -54.2 -5.0 5.0

RLC-SVX09L-EN 51
Installation - Mechanical

Table 29. Low evaporator refrigerant temperature cutout (LRTC) and low water temperature cutout (LWTC)
methanol and calcium chloride

Methanol Calcium Chloride

Inhibitor Solution Minimum Minimum Inhibitor Solution Minimum Minimum
Percentage Freeze Point Recommended Recommended Percentage Freeze Point Recommended Recommended
(%) (°F) LRTC (°F) LWTC (°F) (%) (°F) LRTC (°F) LWTC (°F)
0 32.0 28.6 35.0 0 32.0 28.6 35.0
2 29.0 25.6 32.0 2 30.3 26.9 33.3
4 26.4 23.0 29.4 4 28.7 25.3 31.7
5 25.1 21.7 28.1 5 27.8 24.4 30.8
6 23.9 20.5 26.9 6 26.9 23.5 29.9
8 21.5 18.1 24.5 8 24.8 21.4 27.8
10 19.1 15.7 22.1 10 22.2 18.8 25.2
12 16.7 13.3 19.7 12 19.2 15.8 22.2
14 14.4 11.0 17.4 14 15.5 12.1 18.5
15 13.1 9.7 16.1 15 13.4 10.0 16.4
16 11.9 8.5 14.9 16 11.1 7.7 14.1
18 9.4 6.0 12.4 18 5.8 2.4 8.8
20 6.8 3.4 9.8 20 -0.4 -3.8 5.0
22 4.1 0.7 7.1 22 -7.7 -5.0 5.0
24 1.2 -2.2 5.0 24 -16.2 -5.0 5.0
25 -0.3 -3.7 5.0 25 -20.9 -5.0 5.0
26 -1.9 -5.0 5.0 26 -26.0 -5.0 5.0
27 -3.6 -5.0 5.0 27 -31.4 -5.0 5.0
28 -5.2 -5.0 5.0 28 -37.2 -5.0 5.0
29 -7.0 -5.0 5.0 29 -43.4 -5.0 5.0
30 -8.8 -5.0 5.0 30 -50.0 -5.0 5.0
32 -12.7 -5.0 5.0
34 -16.9 -5.0 5.0
35 -19.1 -5.0 5.0
36 -21.4 -5.0 5.0
38 -26.3 -5.0 5.0
40 -31.6 -5.0 5.0
42 -37.3 -5.0 5.0
44 -43.5 -5.0 5.0
45 -46.8 -5.0 5.0
46 -50.2 -5.0 5.0
48 -57.4 -5.0 5.0
50 -65.2 -5.0 5.0

52 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Installation - Mechanical

Condenser Water Piping (RTWD Units Only)

Condenser water inlet and outlet types, sizes and locations Note: Plugged tees are installed to provide access for
are given in the Unit Dimensions and Weights. Condenser chemical cleaning of the condenser tubes.
pressure drops are shown in Figure 22, p. 47 thru Condenser piping must be in accordance with all
Figure 25, p. 50. applicable local and national codes.
Condenser Piping Components Condenser Drains and Vents
Condenser piping components and layout vary,
depending on location of connections and water source. NOTICE:
Condenser piping components generally function Waterbox Damage!
identically to those in the evaporator piping system, as Failure to follow these instructions could result in
described in "Evaporator Water Piping" , p. 36. In addition, damage to the waterbox. Do not use Teflon® pipe tape
cooling tower systems should include a manual or or overtighten when installing valves, drains, plugs, and
automatic bypass valve that can alter the water flow rate, vents on cast iron waterboxes.
to maintain condensing pressure. Well water (or city
water) condensing systems should include a pressure When the unit is shipped, the drain plugs are removed
reducing valve and a water regulating valve. from the condenser and placed in a plastic bag in the
control panel, along with the evaporator drain plug. The
Pressure reducing valve should be installed to reduce
condenser drains may be connected to suitable drains to
water pressure entering the condenser. This is required
permit drainage during unit servicing. If they are not, the
only if the water pressure exceeds 150 psig. This is
drain plugs must be installed prior to water pump
necessary to prevent damage to the disc and seat of the
operation.
water regulating valve that can be caused by excessive
pressure drop through the valve and also due to the design The condenser shells can be drained by removing the
of the condenser. Condenser waterside is rated at 150 psi. drain plugs from the bottom of the condenser heads. Also,
remove the vent plugs at the top of the condenser heads
NOTICE: to facilitate complete drainage.
Equipment Damage! Water Treatment
To prevent damage to the condenser or regulating
Using untreated or improperly treated water in these units
valve, the condenser water pressure should not exceed
150 psig. may result in inefficient operation and possible tube
damage. Consult a qualified water treatment specialist to
determine whether treatment is needed. The following
Water Regulating Valve (RTWD Only)
disclamatory label is provided on each RTWD unit:
The Condenser Head Pressure Control Option provides for
a 0-10V (maximum range - a smaller range is adjustable) NOTICE:
output interface to the customer’s condenser water flow Proper Water Treatment!
device. See RLC-PRB021-EN for further details regarding
The use of untreated or improperly treated water could
condenser water temperature control.
result in scaling, erosion, corrosion, algae or slime. It is
The following guidelines must be met in order to ensure recommended that the services of a qualified water
adequate oil circulation throughout the system. treatment specialist be engaged to determine what
water treatment, if any, is required. Trane assumes no
• The RTWD requires a minimum pressure differential of responsibility for equipment failures which result from
25 psid (172.1 kPA) at all load conditions in order to untreated or improperly treated water, or saline or
ensure adequate oil circulation. brackish water.
• The entering condenser water temperature must be
above 55°F (12.8°C), or between 45°F (7.2°C) and 55°F Water Pressure Gauges
(12.8°C) with a 1°F (0.6°C) temperature rise per minute Install field-supplied pressure gauges (with manifolds,
up to 55°F (12.8°C). when practical) on the RTWD units. Locate pressure
• The leaving condenser water temperature must be gauges or taps in a straight run of pipe; avoid placement
17°F (9.4°C) degrees higher than leaving evaporator near elbows, etc. Install gauges at the same elevation.
water temperature within 2 minutes of startup. A 25°F To read manifolded pressure gauges, open one valve and
(13.9°C) temperature differential must be maintained close the other (depending upon the reading desired). This
thereafter. (This differential requirement is lessened by eliminates errors resulting from differently calibrated
0.25°F [0.14°C] for every 1°F [0.6°C] that the leaving gauges installed at unmatched elevations.
condenser water temperature is above 55°F [12.8°C].)
If the above guidelines cannot be met, then some form of
condenser water temperature control must be used.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 53
Installation - Mechanical

Water Pressure Relief Valves

Figure 26. High pressure side relief valves
Install a water pressure relief valve in the condenser and
evaporator leaving chilled water piping. Water vessels
with close coupled shutoff valves have a high potential for
hydrostatic pressure buildup on a water temperature
increase. Refer to applicable codes for relief valve
installation guidelines.

Refrigerant Relief Valve Venting

WARNING
Refrigerant under High Pressure!
Failure to follow instructions below could result in an
explosion which could result in death or serious injury
or equipment damage. System contains oil and
refrigerant under high pressure. Recover refrigerant to
relieve pressure before opening the system. See unit
nameplate for refrigerant type. Do not use non-
approved refrigerants, refrigerant substitutes, or
refrigerant additives. Note: Vent line length must not exceed code
recommendations. If the line length will exceed
NOTICE: code recommendations for the outlet size of the
valve, install a vent line of the next larger pipe size.
Equipment Damage!
Pipe each relief valve on the unit into a common vent line.
To prevent shell damage, install pressure relief Provide access valve located at the low point of the vent
valves in both the evaporator and condenser
water systems. piping, to enable draining of any condensate that may
accumulate in the piping.
If multiple chillers are installed, each unit may have a
NOTICE:
separate venting for its relief valves. If multiple relief
Equipment Damage! valves are vented together, see ASHRAE 15, and/or local
To prevent capacity reduction and relief valve codes for sizing requirements.
damage, do not exceed vent piping code Note: RTWD units can be ordered with “Dual Relief
specifications. Valve” options. Model number digit 16 is a “2”.
Units with this option will have two valves on each
High Pressure Side Relief Valve Venting circuit for a total of four on the condenser. Only two
(RTWD-Condenser, RTUD-Oil Separator) valves would release at the same time - never all
four.
All RTWD units utilize a refrigerant-pressure relief valve for
each circuit which must be vented to the outdoor Low Pressure Side Relief Valve Venting
atmosphere. The valves are located at the top of the (Evaporator)
condenser. Relief valve connections are 5/8” MFL. See
Figure 26. Refer to local codes for relief valve vent line Low-side refrigerant-pressure relief valves are located on
sizing requirements. the top of the evaporator shell, one per circuit. Each must
be vented to the outdoor atmosphere. Relief valve
All RTUD units utilize a refrigerant-pressure relief valve for
connections are 3/4 inch NPTFI.
each circuit which must be vented to the outdoor
atmosphere. The valves are located at the top of the oil Note: RTWD units can be ordered with “Dual Relief
separator. Relief valve connections are 3/8” MFL. Refer to Valve” option. Model number digit 16 is a “2”. Units
local codes for relief valve vent line sizing requirements. with this option will have two valves on each circuit
for a total of four on the evaporator. Only two
High side relief valve discharge setpoints are 300 psig for
valves would release at the same time - never all
RTWD, and 350 psig for RTUD units. Once the relief valve
four.
has opened, it will re-close when pressure is reduced to a
safe level. See Figure 26, p. 54 and Table 30, p. 55. Refer to local
codes for relief valve vent line sizing requirements.

54 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Installation - Mechanical

Figure 27. Evaporator relief valves

Note: Vent line length must not exceed code

recommendations. If the line length will exceed
code recommendations for the outlet size of the
valve, install a vent line of the next larger pipe size.
Low side relief valve discharge setpoints are 200 psig.
Once the relief valve has opened, it will re-close when
pressure is reduced to a safe level.
Pipe each relief valve on the unit into a common vent line.
Provide an access valve located at the low point of the vent
piping, to enable draining of any condensate that may
accumulate in the piping.

Summary or Relief Valves - RTWD, RTUD

Table 30. Relief valve descriptions

Condenser Evaporator Oil Separator

RTWD RTUD
RTWD, RTUD
Units High Pressure High Pressure
Low Pressure Side
Side Side

Relief Setpoint 300 psig 200 psig 350 psig

Quantity
1 per ckt 1 per ckt 1 per ckt
(standard)
Quantity
(Dual Relief RTWD - 2 per ckt
2 per ckt n/a
Valves option - (n/a - RTUD units)
RTWD only)
Relief Rate
25.4 28.9 13.3
(lb/min)
Field
5/8” MFL 3/4” NPTFI 3/8” MFL
Connection Size

RLC-SVX09L-EN 55
Installation - Mechanical

RTUD Installation
The installation of a split system offers a good economic • Discharge line trap is recommended leaving the oil
alternative to satisfy the chilled water demand for cooling separator if the discharge piping runs for more than 10
a building, particularly in the case of new construction. (actual) feet horizontally above the RTUD unit.
The choice of a complete Trane system, including the Condenser Installed Above Compressor Chiller
compressor chiller and the condenser offers the designer,
installer and owner the advantages of an optimized See Figure 29, p. 57.
selection and undivided responsibility for the design, the Restrictions
quality and the operation of the complete system.
• Total distance between components should not
Application examples exceed 200 ft (actual) or 300 ft (equivalent).

No Elevation Difference • Elevation difference greater than 100 ft (actual) will

result in at least a 2% efficiency decrease.
See Figure 28, p. 56.
Condenser Installed Below Compressor Chiller
Restrictions
See Figure 30, p. 57.
• Total distance between components should not
exceed 200 ft (actual) or 300 ft (equivalent). Restrictions
• Elevation rise of the liquid line must not be more than • Total distance between components should not
15 ft above the base of the air-cooled condenser. exceed 200 ft (actual) or 300 ft (equivalent).
• Elevation rise of the liquid line must not be more than
15 ft above the base of the air-cooled condenser.

Figure 28. Condenser installed at same elevation as compressor chiller

56 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Installation - Mechanical

Figure 29. Condenser above the compressor chiller

Inverted Trap
Height equal to
top of Condenser

Liquid Line

Discharge Line

Trap

Figure 30. Condenser below the compressor chiller

Discharge Line

Liquid Line

15 ft
max

Trap

RLC-SVX09L-EN 57
Installation - Mechanical

Remote Air-Cooled Condenser Interconnection Refrigerant Piping

The RTUD compressor chiller is shipped with a full charge
of oil and a nitrogen holding charge. The Levitor II unit is
an air-cooled condenser that is designed for use with the WARNING
RTUD unit. The RTUD unit is designed to be most effective Hazard of Explosion and Deadly Gases!
when used with the Levitor II air-cooled condenser. Other
air-cooled condensers can be used in place of the Levitor Failure to follow all proper refrigerant handling
practices could result in death or serious injury.
II condenser, but the overall performance of the system
Never solder, braze or weld on refrigerant lines or any
may be different from that published in the catalogs. The unit components that are above atmospheric pressure
following section covers the required piping between the or where refrigerant may be present. Always remove
RTUD unit and the appropriate air-cooled condenser. refrigerant by following the guidelines established by
The RTUD unit consists of an evaporator, two helical rotor the EPA Federal Clean Air Act or other state or local
compressors (one per circuit), oil separators, oil coolers, codes as appropriate. After refrigerant removal, use dry
nitrogen to bring system back to atmospheric pressure
liquid line service valves (NOT isolation valves), sight
before opening system for repairs. Mixtures of
glasses, electronic expansion valves and filter. The refrigerants and air under pressure may become
discharge line leaving the oil separator and liquid line combustible in the presence of an ignition source
entering the filters are capped and brazed. The installing leading to an explosion. Excessive heat from soldering,
contractor need only provide the interconnecting piping, brazing or welding with refrigerant vapors present can
including liquid line isolation valves, between the RTUD form highly toxic gases and extremely corrosive acids.
and the air-cooled condenser.
Important: RTUD units are not shipped with factory See Table 31, p. 58 for the Levitor condenser model
installed liquid line isolation valves. Liquid number. Units 150 tons and above will have one
line isolation valves must be field installed. condenser per circuit. The manifold piping for these
condensers is field supplied.
Trane does not approve the use of underground
refrigerant piping. Potential problems include dirt and Table 31. Levitor model numbers
moisture in the lines during assembly, condensation of
RTUD Size Circuit (s) Levitor Model No.
refrigerant in the lines during off-cycle, which creates
liquid slugs and potential damage to parts or 80 Ton Ckt 1 & 2 LAVC23312
controllability issues, and vibration/corrosion damage. 90 Ton Ckt 1 & 2 LAVC24310

For best reliability and performance, the RTUD should be 100 Ton Ckt 1 & 2 LAVC24410
matched with Trane Levitor II. If a non-Levitor II condenser 110 Ton Ckt 1 & 2 LAVC24412
is used, overall performance and reliability of the RTUD 120 Ton Ckt 1 & 2 LAVC25408
may be affected. Depending on the customer's fan control, 130 Ton Ckt 1 & 2 LAVC25410
nuisance trips may occur on the RTUD unit, due to head
150 Ton Ckt 1 LAVC23308
pressure instability.
150 Ton Ckt 2 LAVC23312
If a non-Levitor II condenser is a supplied, it must be
160 Ton Ckt 1 LAVC23312
capable of providing a minimum of 5 F subcooling at the
EXV. The RTUD requires subcooled liquid at the expansion 160 Ton Ckt 2 LAVC23312
valves. Without a minimum of 5 F subcooling, the RTUD 180 Ton Ckt 1 LAVC23312
will not operate as designed. 180 Ton Ckt 2 LAVC24308
Piping should be sized and laid out according to the job 200 Ton Ckt 1 LAVC24308
plans and specifications. This design should be completed 200 Ton Ckt 2 LAVC24308
during system component selection. 220 Ton Ckt 1 LAVC24308
Note: Use Type L refrigerant-grade copper tubing only. 220 Ton Ckt 2 LAVC24410
The refrigerant lines must be isolated to prevent line 250 Ton Ckt 1 LAVC24410
vibration from being transferred to the building. Do not 250 Ton Ckt 2 LAVC24410
secure the lines rigidly to the building at any point.
Important: Relieve nitrogen pressure before removing On units with two separate Trane-supplied condensers
end caps. (150-250 Ton), a field installed tee is required at the
condenser connections to combine the two internal halves
Do not use a saw to remove end caps, as this may allow into a single circuit. See Figure 32, p. 59. In this case, each
copper chips to contaminate the system. Use a tubing separate condenser would be a single circuit. If non-Trane
cutter or heat to remove end caps. condensers with multiple circuits are used, a field installed
tee may be required to provide two individual circuits.

58 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Installation - Mechanical

Important: To prevent excessive pressure drop in tee, necessary to provide that one fan be a variable speed fan
connection for the combined stream should to improve stability and minimal cycling.
not be any smaller than the field run piping.
System Configuration
Figure 31. Condenser manifolding, 80 to 130 ton
The system can be configured in any of the primary
48” min clearance arrangements as shown in Figure 28, p. 56, Figure 29,
Discharge
for airflow p. 57 and Figure 30, p. 57. The configuration and its

Control Panel
associated elevation, along with the total distance
Ckt 1 between the RTUD and the air-cooled condenser, plays a
Liquid critical role in determining the liquid line and discharge
line sizes. This will also affect the field refrigerant and oil
Ckt 2 Local code
charges. Consequently, there are physical limits which
dictates must not be violated if the system is to operate as
control panel
24”min clearance clearance designed. Please note the following restrictions:
for servcie 48” min clearance (36” min)
for airflow 1. The discharge line sizing is different for different
leaving evaporator water temperatures.
Figure 32. Condenser manifolding, 150 to 250 ton 2. The total distance between the RTUD and the air-
cooled condenser must not exceed 200 actual feet or
48” min clearance 300 equivalent feet.
for airflow
3. When the air-cooled condenser is installed at the same
Discharge level or below the compressor-chiller, liquid line risers
must not be more than 15 ft above the base of the
Control Panel

Ckt 1 condenser.
4. Discharge line risers cannot exceed an elevation
Liquid difference greater than 100 actual feet without a
Local code minimum of 2% efficiency decrease.
24”min clearance dictates
48” min clearance
for servcie
for airflow
control panel 5. See Figure 28, Figure 29 and Figure 30. for location of
clearance
(36” min) recommended traps.
6. Circuit #1 on the condenser must be connected to
Control Panel

Circuit # 1 on the RTUD unit.

Ckt 2

NOTICE:
Field piping Equipment Damage!
requires a tee 48” min clearance
for airflow If circuits are crossed, serious equipment damage
may occur.

Condenser by Others Equivalent Line Length

Requirement for Stable fan operation at To determine the appropriate size for field installed liquid
low ambient temperatures and discharge lines, it is first necessary to establish the
equivalent length of pipe for each line, including the added
Each circuit of the RTUD chiller is capable of unloading to
flow resistance of elbows, valves, etc. An initial
approximately 30% of its full load capability at any given
approximation can be made by assuming that the
operating point. To guarantee no fan cycling at the
equivalent length of pipe is 1.5 times the actual pipe
minimum compressor load and an ambient temperature
length.
of 32º, the condenser will require the ability to reduce its
minimum capacity with one fan running to roughly ½ of Note: Table 32, p. 60 states the equivalent length, in feet,
that 30%, which implies at least 6 fans minimum. Some for various non-ferrous valves and fittings. When
amount of slow fan cycling is acceptable depending on the calculating the equivalent length, do not include
application. Operating with fewer fans at low ambient piping of the unit. Only field piping must be
temperatures and minimum loads may cause fast and considered.
prolonged fan cycling and may result in large excursions
in condenser pressure and differential pressures and may
lead to either poor leaving water temperature
performance or nuisance tripping. To avoid this problem
in certain low ambient temperature applications, it may be

RLC-SVX09L-EN 59
Installation - Mechanical

The liquid line risers must not exceed 15 feet from the base
Table 32. Equivalent lengths of non-ferrous valves of the air-cooled condenser. The liquid line does not have
and fittings
to be pitched. Liquid line sizing for these units when
Short Long installed with a Trane Levitor II air-cooled condenser are
Line Size Globe Angle Radius Radius shown in Table 33, p. 60 through Table 44, p. 64. Line
OD (in) Valve (ft) Valve (ft) Elbow (ft) Elbow (ft) sizing for other condensers must be done manually not to
1 1/8 87 29 2.7 1.9 violate the 5°F subcooling requirement at the EXV.
1 3/8 102 33 3.2 2.2
Liquid lines are not typically insulated. However, if the
1 5/8 115 34 3.8 2.6 lines run through an area of high ambient temperature (eg.
2 1/8 141 39 5.2 3.4 boiler room), subcooling may drop below required levels.
2 5/8 159 44 6.5 4.2 In these situations, insulate the liquid lines.
3 1/8 185 53 8 5.1
Use of a liquid line receiver is not recommended because
3 5/8 216 66 10 6.3 it adds to the overall refrigerant volume of the circuit.
4 1/8 248 76 12 7.3
Note: In case of power failure to the expansion valve, the
amount of liquid refrigerant contained in the
Liquid Line Sizing refrigerant system must not exceed the holding
Trane recommends that the liquid line diameter be as capacity of the evaporator. See Table 57, p. 68 for
small as possible, while maintaining acceptable pressure the maximum allowable charge in each circuit.
drop. This is necessary to minimize refrigerant charge. The Note: Height in Table 33 through Table 44 is the raise in
total length between the components must not exceed 200 elevation of the RTUD unit above the condensing
actual feet or 300 equivalent feet. unit.
Table 33. Liquid line sizing RTUD 80 ton
Circuit 1 Line Circuit 2 Line

Total Equivalent Height (ft) Height (ft)

Length (ft) <0 3 6 9 12 15 <0 3 6 9 12 15
25 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
50 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
75 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
100 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
150 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
175 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
200 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
225 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
250 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
275 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
300 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125

Table 34. Liquid line sizing RTUD 90 ton

Circuit 1 Line Circuit 2 Line

Total Equivalent Height (ft) Height (ft)

Length (ft) <0 3 6 9 12 15 <0 3 6 9 12 15
25 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
50 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
75 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
100 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
150 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
175 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375
200 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375
225 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375
250 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
275 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
300 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375

60 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Installation - Mechanical

Table 35. Liquid line sizing RTUD 100 ton

Circuit 1 Line Circuit 2 Line

Total Equivalent Height (ft) Height (ft)

Length (ft) <0 3 6 9 12 15 <0 3 6 9 12 15
25 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
50 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
75 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
100 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
150 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
175 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
200 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375
225 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375
250 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
275 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
300 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375

Table 36. Liquid line sizing RTUD 110 ton

Circuit 1 Line Circuit 2 Line

Total Equivalent Height (ft) Height (ft)

Length (ft) <0 3 6 9 12 15 <0 3 6 9 12 15
25 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
50 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
75 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
100 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
150 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
175 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375
200 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375
225 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
250 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
275 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
300 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375

Table 37. Liquid line sizing RTUD 120 ton

Circuit 1 Line Circuit 2 Line

Total Equivalent Height (ft) Height (ft)

Length (ft) <0 3 6 9 12 15 <0 3 6 9 12 15
25 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
50 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375
75 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375
100 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625
150 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625
175 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625
200 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625
225 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625
250 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625
275 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625
300 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 2.125

RLC-SVX09L-EN 61
Installation - Mechanical

Table 38. Liquid line sizing RTUD 130 ton

Circuit 1 Line Circuit 2 Line

Total Equivalent Height (ft) Height (ft)

Length (ft) <0 3 6 9 12 15 <0 3 6 9 12 15
25 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375
50 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.625
75 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625
100 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 2.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 2.125
125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 2.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 2.125
150 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625 2.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 2.125
175 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 2.125 2.125 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625 2.125
200 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625 2.125 2.125 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625 2.125 2.125
225 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 2.125 2.125 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625 2.125 2.125
250 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 2.125 2.125 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 2.125 2.125
275 1.625 1.625 1.625 2.125 2.125 2.125 1.625 1.625 1.625 2.125 2.125 2.125
300 1.625 1.625 1.625 2.125 2.125 2.125 1.625 1.625 1.625 2.125 2.125 2.125

Table 39. Liquid line sizing RTUD 150 ton

Circuit 1 Line Circuit 2 Line

Total Equivalent Height (ft) Height (ft)

Length (ft) <0 3 6 9 12 15 <0 3 6 9 12 15
25 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
50 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
75 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
100 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125
150 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375
175 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
200 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
225 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
250 1.125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
275 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
300 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375

Table 40. Liquid line sizing RTUD 160 ton

Circuit 1 Line Circuit 2 Line

Total Equivalent Height (ft) Height (ft)

Length (ft) <0 3 6 9 12 15 <0 3 6 9 12 15
25 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
50 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
75 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
100 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
150 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
175 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
200 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
225 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
250 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
275 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
300 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375

62 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Installation - Mechanical

Table 41. Liquid line sizing RTUD 180 ton

Circuit 1 Line Circuit 2 Line

Total Equivalent Height (ft) Height (ft)

Length (ft) <0 3 6 9 12 15 <0 3 6 9 12 15
25 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
50 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
75 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
100 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
150 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
175 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625
200 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625
225 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625
250 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625
275 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625
300 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625

Table 42. Liquid line sizing RTUD 200 ton

Circuit 1 Line Circuit 2 Line

Total Equivalent Height (ft) Height (ft)

Length (ft) <0 3 6 9 12 15 <0 3 6 9 12 15
25 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
50 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
75 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
100 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
150 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
175 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625
200 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625
225 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625
250 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625
275 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625
300 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625

Table 43. Liquid line sizing RTUD 220 ton

Circuit 1 Line Circuit 2 Line

Total Equivalent Height (ft) Height (ft)

Length (ft) <0 3 6 9 12 15 <0 3 6 9 12 15
25 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
50 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
75 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
100 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
150 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
175 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625
200 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625
225 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625
250 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625
275 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625
300 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625

RLC-SVX09L-EN 63
Installation - Mechanical

Table 44. Liquid line sizing RTUD 250 ton

Circuit 1 Line Circuit 2 Line

Total Equivalent Height (ft) Height (ft)

Length (ft) <0 3 6 9 12 15 <0 3 6 9 12 15
25 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
50 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
75 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
100 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
125 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
150 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375
175 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625
200 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.375 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625
225 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.375 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625
250 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625
275 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625
300 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625

Discharge (Hot Gas) Line Sizing

The discharge lines should pitch downward, in the
direction of the hot gas flow, at the rate of 1/2 inch per each
10 feet of horizontal run.
Discharge line size is based on the velocity needed to
obtain sufficient oil return. Basic discharge line sizing is
shown in Table 45, p. 65 throughTable 56, p. 66,
depending on the unit configuration.
Discharge lines are not typically insulated. If insulation is
required, it should be approved for use at temperatures up
to 230°F (max discharge temp).
Note: The proper column for leaving evaporator water
temperature must be used to avoid catastrophic
damage to the unit. Column for 10 °F to 37°F can
only be used on units designed for low
temperature applications. Refer to the design
conditions of the unit to determine the correct
column that must be used.
Note: The discharge line should drop well below the
compressor discharge outlet before beginning its
vertical rise. This prevents possible refrigerant
drainage back to the compressor and oil separator
during the unit STOP cycle. See Figure 28, p. 56,
Figure 29, p. 57 and Figure 30, p. 57 for details.

64 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Installation - Mechanical

Table 45. Discharge (hot gas) line sizing RTUD 80 ton Table 48. Discharge (hot gas) line sizing RTUD 110 ton
Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Circuit 1 Circuit 2
Total Total
Equivalent Leaving Water Temp Leaving Water Temp Equivalent Leaving Water Temp Leaving Water Temp
Length (ft) 38 to 65°F 10 to 37°F 38 to 65°F 10 to 37°F Length (ft) 38 to 65°F 10 to 37°F 38 to 65°F 10 to 37°F
25 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 25 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125
50 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 50 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125
75 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 75 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125
100 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 100 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125
125 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 125 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125
150 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 150 2.625 2.125 2.625 2.125
175 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 175 2.625 2.125 2.625 2.125
200 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 200 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.125
225 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 225 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625
250 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 250 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625
275 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 275 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625
300 2.625 2.125 2.625 2.125 300 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625

Table 46. Discharge (hot gas) line sizing RTUD 90 ton Table 49. Discharge (hot gas) line sizing RTUD 120 ton
Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Circuit 1 Circuit 2
Total Total
Equivalent Leaving Water Temp Leaving Water Temp Equivalent Leaving Water Temp Leaving Water Temp
Length (ft) 38 to 65°F 10 to 37°F 38 to 65°F 10 to 37°F Length (ft) 38 to 65°F 10 to 37°F 38 to 65°F 10 to 37°F
25 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 25 2.625 2.125 2.625 2.125
50 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 50 2.625 2.125 2.625 2.125
75 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 75 2.625 2.125 2.625 2.125
100 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 100 2.625 2.125 2.625 2.125
125 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 125 2.625 2.125 2.625 2.125
150 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 150 2.625 2.125 2.625 2.125
175 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 175 2.625 2.125 2.625 2.625
200 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 200 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625
225 2.625 2.125 2.625 2.125 225 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625
250 2.625 2.125 2.625 2.125 250 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625
275 2.625 2.125 2.625 2.125 275 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625
300 2.625 2.125 2.625 2.125 300 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625

Table 47. Discharge (hot gas) line sizing RTUD 100 ton Table 50. Discharge (hot gas) line sizing RTUD 130 ton
Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Circuit 1 Circuit 2
Total Total
Leaving Water Temp Leaving Water Temp
Equivalent Equivalent Leaving Water Temp Leaving Water Temp
Length (ft) 38 to 65°F 10 to 37°F 38 to 65°F 10 to 37°F Length (ft) 38 to 65°F 10 to 37°F 38 to 65°F 10 to 37°F
25 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 25 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.125
50 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 50 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.125
75 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 75 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.125
100 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 100 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.125
125 2.125 2.125 2.125 2.125 125 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.125
150 2.125 2.125 2.625 2.125 150 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.125
175 2.125 2.125 2.625 2.125 175 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625
200 2.625 2.125 2.625 2.125 200 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625
225 2.625 2.125 2.625 2.625 225 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625
250 2.625 2.125 2.625 2.625 250 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625
275 2.625 2.125 2.625 2.625 275 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625
300 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 300 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625

RLC-SVX09L-EN 65
Installation - Mechanical

Table 51. Discharge (hot gas) line sizing RTUD 150 ton Table 54. Discharge (hot gas) line sizing RTUD 200 ton
Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Circuit 1 Circuit 2
Total Total
Equivalent Leaving Water Temp Leaving Water Temp Equivalent Leaving Water Temp Leaving Water Temp
Length (ft) 38 to 65°F 10 to 37°F 38 to 65°F 10 to 37°F Length (ft) 38 to 65°F 10 to 37°F 38 to 65°F 10 to 37°F
25 2.625 2.125 2.625 2.625 25 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625
50 2.625 2.125 2.625 2.625 50 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625
75 2.625 2.125 2.625 2.625 75 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625
100 2.625 2.125 2.625 2.625 100 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625
125 2.625 2.125 2.625 2.625 125 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625
150 2.625 2.125 2.625 2.625 150 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625
175 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 175 3.125 2.625 3.125 2.625
200 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 200 3.125 2.625 3.125 2.625
225 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 225 3.125 2.625 3.125 2.625
250 2.625 2.625 3.125 2.625 250 3.125 3.125 3.125 2.625
275 2.625 2.625 3.125 2.625 275 3.125 3.125 3.125 3.125
300 2.625 2.625 3.125 2.625 300 3.125 3.125 3.125 3.125

Table 52. Discharge (hot gas) line sizing RTUD 160 ton Table 55. Discharge (hot gas) line sizing RTUD 220 ton
Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Circuit 1 Circuit 2
Total Total
Equivalent Leaving Water Temp Leaving Water Temp Leaving Water Temp Leaving Water Temp
Equivalent
Length (ft) 38 to 65°F 10 to 37°F 38 to 65°F 10 to 37°F Length (ft) 38 to 65°F 10 to 37°F 38 to 65°F 10 to 37°F
25 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 25 2.625 2.625 3.125 3.125
50 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 50 2.625 2.625 3.125 3.125
75 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 75 2.625 2.625 3.125 3.125
100 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 100 2.625 2.625 3.125 3.125
125 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 125 2.625 2.625 3.125 3.125
150 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 150 2.625 2.625 3.125 3.125
175 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 175 3.125 2.625 3.125 3.125
200 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 200 3.125 2.625 3.125 3.125
225 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 225 3.125 2.625 3.125 3.125
250 3.125 2.625 3.125 2.625 250 3.125 3.125 3.125 3.125
275 3.125 2.625 3.125 2.625 275 3.125 3.125 3.125 3.125
300 3.125 2.625 3.125 2.625 300 3.125 3.125 3.625 3.125

Table 53. Discharge (hot gas) line sizing RTUD 180 ton Table 56. Discharge (hot gas) line sizing RTUD 250 ton
Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Circuit 1 Circuit 2
Total Total
Leaving Water Temp Leaving Water Temp
Equivalent Equivalent Leaving Water Temp Leaving Water Temp
Length (ft) 38 to 65°F 10 to 37°F 38 to 65°F 10 to 37°F Length (ft) 38 to 65°F 10 to 37°F 38 to 65°F 10 to 37°F
25 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 25 3.125 3.125 3.125 3.125
50 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 50 3.125 3.125 3.125 3.125
75 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 75 3.125 3.125 3.125 3.125
100 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 100 3.125 3.125 3.125 3.125
125 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 125 3.125 3.125 3.125 3.125
150 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 150 3.125 3.125 3.125 3.125
175 2.625 2.625 3.125 2.625 175 3.125 3.125 3.125 3.125
200 2.625 2.625 3.125 2.625 200 3.125 3.125 3.125 3.125
225 2.625 2.625 3.125 2.625 225 3.125 3.125 3.125 3.125
250 3.125 2.625 3.125 2.625 250 3.125 3.125 3.125 3.125
275 3.125 2.625 3.125 3.125 275 3.125 3.125 3.125 3.125
300 3.125 2.625 3.125 3.125 300 3.625 3.125 3.625 3.125

66 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Installation - Mechanical

Example

Figure 33. Example configuration

2’ 2’ 71’
Inverted Trap
Height equal to
top of Condenser

Liquid Line

15.5’

Discharge Line
20’

5’

Trap

Shown in Figure 33, p. 67 are RTUD 100 ton and Trane ALL DISCHARGE LINE SIZES ARE = 2 1/8”
Levitor II condenser designed for a leaving evaporator
water temperature of 42°F. This example will show how to Liquid Lines
calculate the line sizes for both the liquid and discharge Actual length of liquid lines = 8 + 75 + 20 + 8 = 111 ft.
lines. The discharge line consists of one long radius elbow
Total equivalent length = 1.5 X 111 =166.5 ft.
and 4 short radius elbows. The liquid line also consists of
one long radius elbow and 4 short radius elbows. Approximate liquid line size
Table 35, p. 61 = 1 1/8”
Discharge Line
Equiv. length of one long radius elbow at 1 1/8”
Actual length of lines = 2 + 5 + 71+15.5+5 = 98.5 ft.
Table 32= 1.9
Total equivalent length = 1.5 x 98.5= 147.75 ft.
Equiv. length of 4 short radius elbows at 1 1/8”
Approximate line size for discharge lines
Table 32= 4 x 2.7 ft. =10.8 ft.
Table 47, p. 65 = 2 1/8”
Total equivalent length = 111 + 1.9 + 10.8 =123.7 ft.
Equivalent length of one long radius elbow at 2 1/8”
Table 35
Table 32 = 3.4 ft.
Ckt 1= 1 1/8”
Equivalent length of 4 short radius elbows at 2 1/8”
Ckt 2= 1 1/8”
Table 32 = 4 x 5.2 ft. = 20.8 ft.
ALL LIQUID LINE SIZES ARE = 1 1/8”
Total equivalent length = 98.5+ 3.4 + 20.8 = 122.7 ft.
New line size for discharge lines remains Refrigerant Charge Determination
Table 47 The approximate amount of the refrigerant charge
Ckt 1= 2 1/8” required by the system must be determined by referring to
Table 57 and must be verified by running the system and
Ckt 2= 2 1/8” checking the liquid line sightglasses.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 67
Installation - Mechanical

Table 57. System refrigerant charge - lbs

RTUD Chilled Water Flow Contro
l

Condenser RTUD Max. Unit Charge

NOTICE:
Ton Ckt 1 Ckt 2 Ckt 1 Ckt 2 Ckt 1 Ckt 2
80 40 40 50 50 318 318
Equipment Damage!
90 52 52 49 49 308 308
ALL RTUD unit chilled water pumps MUST be
controlled by the Trane CH530 to avoid catastrophic
100 68 68 47 47 308 308 damage to the evaporator due to freezing
110 68 68 65 65 359 359
120 85 85 64 64 352 352 Oil Charge Determination
130 85 85 64 64 352 352
The RTUD unit is factory charged with the amount of oil
150 76 76 62 62 347 347 required by the system. No additional oil is required for
160 76 76 66 66 396 396 field installed piping.
180 76 101 66 66 396 396
Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor
200 101 101 66 66 391 391
Installation Requirements
220 101 134 63 63 382 382
250 134 134 61 61 373 373 The outdoor air temperature sensor is optional for the
RTWD water cooled units, but is a required sensor for the
Note: The maximum charge can reduce the maximum RTUD compressor chiller units. The sensor is required as
length of the piping. Due to maximum allowable an important input to the condenser fan control algorithm
refrigerant charge not all units can have 200 feet of as well as for the low outdoor air ambient lockout feature.
piping. The temperature sensor probe is shipped separately
inside the control panel.
To determine the approximate charge, first refer to
Table 57 and establish the required charge without the A separate outdoor air sensor probe must be installed at
field-installed piping. Then refer toTable 58, to determine the remote air cooled condenser at a location to sense the
the charge required for the field-installed piping. The coil’s entering air temperature, while avoiding direct
approximate charge is therefore the sum of the values sunlight. It should be located at least 2” from the coil face
from Table 57 and Table 58. and somewhere “in-between” the two refrigerant circuits.
Where the condenser installation is such that the two
Table 58. Field-installed piping charge refrigerant circuit’s condensers are physically separate
Discharge Line
from each other, or one circuit is more likely to see re-
Pipe O.D. (lbs) Liquid Line (lbs) circulated warmer air, an attempt should be made to locate
the probe to see an average temperature of the two
1 1/8 - 41
separate condensers.
1 3/8 - 62
Important: The probe provided must not be substituted
1 5/8 - 88
with another probe, as the probe and the
2 1/8 8 154
electronics are “matched / calibrated” at the
2 5/8 13 - factory for accuracy.
3 1/8 18 -
A twisted pair sheathed cable shall be run and connected
4 1/8 32 - between probe at remote condenser and its LLID module
in chiller control panel. The sensor’s circuit is a class II
Note: The amounts of refrigerant listed in Table 58 are power limited analog circuit and therefore the wire should
based on 100 feet of pipe. Actual requirements will not be run in close proximity to any power or line voltage
be in direct proportion to the actual length of the wiring. The splices at the condenser end, should be made
piping. to be water tight. The wire run should be physically
Note: Table 58 assumes: Liquid Temperature = 105°F; supported at equal intervals with consideration for safety
Saturated Discharge Temperature = 125°F; and reliability/durability with wire ties or similar to meet
Discharge Superheat = 30°F. local codes.

NOTICE: Fan Control for Remote Air Cooled

Condenser
Equipment Damage!
Add initial field refrigerant charge only through the The RTUD CH530 controls provide as an option, the
service valve on the liquid line, not the service valves on flexible and full control of 2-circuit remote air cooled
the evaporator, and insure that water is flowing through condenser fans. In addition to the option for controlling
the evaporator during the charging process. Failure to between 2 to 8 fixed speed fans per circuit (or multiples
do the above could result in equipment damage. thereof), a separate additional option includes the ability

68 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Installation - Mechanical

to control either two speed fans or variable speed fan/drive RTUD Condenser Elevation Setting
combinations in conjunction with other fixed speed fans,
to provide low ambient outdoor air temperature capability. Condenser elevation setting is a require input during
The controls will also provide an option for a simple per startup of an RTUD chiller, and is accessible in TechView™,
circuit interlock output (in lieu of actual fan control) to use on the Unit View Screen. Go to the Unit View/Chiller Tab,
in the scenario in which independent fan head pressure or select Condenser Elevation setting and enter condenser
differential pressure controls (by others) is applied. See elevation in appropriate units. See Figure 34. The shipped
“Fan Control By Others,” p. 115 for more information. It is default of this setting is 0 and it represents the distance of
recommended however, that for the best overall unit the bottom of the condenser, relative to the top of the
performance, the integral fan control option is selected. evaporator. Use a positive value for the condenser above
the evaporator and a negative value for the condenser
The controls support control of a remote, air cooled below the evaporator. An estimate to within +/- 3 feet is
condenser fan deck, from 2 to 8 fans per circuit (1-8 fans for required.
variable speed). It supports options to control the
following types of standard ambient outdoor air Condenser elevation setting allows proper EXV operation.
temperature fan decks: 1) all fans fixed speed, and 2) all Failure to properly set the elevation can result in low
fans two speed. It will also support the following low pressure cutout trips, or low differential pressure trips
ambient outdoor air temperature fan decks 1) one fan per during startup or large load transients, as well as poor EXV
circuit is Two-Speed, (remaining fans fixed speed), and 2) liquid level control during operation.
One fan per circuit is variable speed i.e. variable frequency
drive (VFD), (remaining fans fixed speed). In the variable
fan low ambient outdoor air option the VFD fan and fixed
speed fans are sequenced accordingly to provide
continuous control from 0-100% air flow per circuit. Fan
staging provides the correct combination of fixed speed
fan relay, VFD relay (to enable operation of the VFD), and
speed outputs to provide air flow control commanded by
the fan algorithm running inside the CH530 Main
Processor. The fan deck arrangement is independently
configurable per circuit.
Since the condenser is provided separately from the RTUD
compressor chiller, the RTUD electrical panel design does
not provide for condensing unit’s control power
requirements. The chiller’s control power transformer is
not sized to provide the control power for the additional
fan contactor loads. The CH530 controls, when properly
optioned, will provide for pilot duty rated relays, low
voltage binary inputs, and low voltage analog outputs to
control the remote contactors and inverters provided by
others. The CH530 fan control relays located in the chiller
control panel, are intended to control the fan contactors
that are located in the remote air cooled condenser panel.
The Fan Control Relays are rated for up to 7.2 Amps
resistive, 2.88 Amps pilot duty 1/3 HP, 7.2 FLA at 120 Vac,
and up to 5 Amps general purpose at 240 Vac. All wiring for
the field connections to the condenser, will have screw
terminals for termination in the RTUD control panel with
the exception of the outdoor air temperature sensor
(addressed above). Refer to the wiring diagrams.
Separate fan control algorithms are used for fixed speed
and variable speed systems. For the variable speed fan
deck option, the fan control reverts to fixed speed control
if an inverter drive fault is detected through a binary input
interface with the drive. An informational diagnostic is
also provided to indicate the issue.
For more fan control information, see chapter sections
beginning with “Fan Configurations,” p. 115.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 69
Installation - Mechanical

Figure 34. RTUD Condenser elevation setting

Shipping Spacers For RTUD 150-250 ton units, remove and discard the four
sets of shipping spacers (each including two spacers and
Important: Shipping spacers must be removed as one bolt), located within the oil separator mounting
instructed. Failure to remove spacers could brackets, as shown in Figure , p. 70 before starting unit.
result in excessive noise and vibration Failure to remove the spacers could result in excessive
transmission into the building. noise and vibration transmission into the building.
For RTWD units listed in table below, and all RTUD 80-130 Figure 36. Oil sep spacer removal - RTUD 150-250T
ton units, remove and discard the two shipping spacers
with four bolts, located underneath the oil separator, as
shown in Figure 35, p. 70 before starting unit.
Table 59. RTWD units that require oil sep spacer removal

Size Hz Efficiency
80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140 60 STD
80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130 60 HIGH
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150 50 STD
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120 50 HIGH

Figure 35. Oil separator spacer removal -

RTWD and RTUD 80-130T

70 RLC-SVX09L-EN
Installation - Electrical
General Recommendations Installer-Supplied Components
As you review this manual, keep in mind that: Customer wiring interface connections are shown in the
• All field-installed wiring must conform to National electrical schematics and connection diagrams that are
Electric Code (NEC) guidelines, and any applicable shipped with the unit. The installer must provide the
state and local codes. Be sure to satisfy proper following components if not ordered with the unit:
equipment grounding requirements per NEC. • Power supply wiring (in conduit) for all field-wired
• Compressor motor and unit electrical data (including connections.
voltage utilization range, rated load amps, locked rotor
• All control (interconnecting) wiring (in conduit) for
amps, MCA and MOP) is listed on the chiller
field supplied devices.
nameplate.
• All field-installed wiring must be checked for proper • Fused-disconnect switches or circuit breakers.
terminations, and for possible shorts or grounds. • Power factor correction capacitors. (See RLC-PRB023-
Note: Always refer to wiring diagrams shipped with EN)
chiller or unit submittal for specific electrical
schematic and connection information. Power Supply Wiring

WARNING WARNING
Hazardous Voltage! Hazardous Voltage!
Failure to disconnect power before servicing could Failure to disconnect power before servicing could
result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric
power, including remote disconnects before servicing. power, including remote disconnects before servicing.
Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the
power can not be inadvertently energized. power can not be inadvertently energized.

WARNING WARNING
Proper Field Wiring and Grounding Proper Field Wiring and Grounding
Required! Required!
Failure to follow code could result in death or serious
Failure to follow code could result in death or serious
injury. All field wiring MUST be performed by qualified
injury. All field wiring MUST be performed by qualified
personnel. Improperly installed and grounded field
personnel. Improperly installed and grounded field
wiring poses FIRE and ELECTROCUTION hazards. To
wiring poses FIRE and ELECTROCUTION hazards. To
avoid these hazards, you MUST follow requirements for
avoid these hazards, you MUST follow requirements for
field wiring installation and grounding as described in
field wiring installation and grounding as described in
NEC and your local/state electrical codes.
NEC and your local/state electrical codes.
All power supply wiring must be sized and selected
accordingly by the project engineer in accordance with
NOTICE: NEC Table 310-16.
Use Copper Conductors Only! All wiring must comply with local codes and the National
Failure to use copper conductors could result in Electrical Code. The installing (or electrical) contractor
equipment damage as unit terminals are not designed must provide and install the system interconnecting
to accept other types of conductors. wiring, as well as the power supply wiring. It must be
properly sized and equipped with the appropriate fused
Important: Do not allow conduit to interfere with other
disconnect switches.
components, structural members or
equipment. Control voltage (115V) wiring in The type and installation location(s) of the fused
conduit must be separate from conduit disconnects must comply with all applicable codes.
carrying low voltage (<30V) wiring. To Knock-outs for wiring are located on the upper left side of
prevent control malfunctions, do not run the control panel.The wiring is passed through these
low voltage wiring (<30V) in conduit with conduits and connected to the terminal blocks, optional
conductors carrying more than 30 volts. unit-mounted disconnects, or HACR type breakers. Refer
to Figure 37, p. 72.
To provide proper phasing of 3-phase input, make
connections as shown in field wiring diagrams and as
RLC-SVX09L-EN 71
Installation - Electrical

stated on the WARNING label in the starter panel. For 115 volt field-provided connections (either control or
additional information on proper phasing, refer to “Unit power) are made through knockouts on the right side of
Voltage Phasing.” Proper equipment ground must be the panel (Figure 37). Additional grounds may be required
provided to each ground connection in the panel (one for for each 115 volt power supply to the unit. Green lugs are
each customer-supplied conductor per phase). provided for 115V customer wiring.

Figure 37. Power entrance

High
Incoming Voltage
Power Entrance Entrance
(Upper)

Low
Voltage
Entrance
(lower)

Control Power Supply Chilled Water Pump Control

The unit is equipped with a control power transformer; it An evaporator water pump output relay closes when the
is not necessary to provide additional control power chiller is given a signal to go into the Auto mode of
voltage to the unit. operation from any source. The contact is opened to turn
All units are factory-connected for appropriate labeled off the pump in the event of most machine level
voltages. diagnostics to prevent the build up of pump heat.

Interconnecting Wiring NOTICE:

Evaporator Damage!
Chilled Water Flow (Pump) Interlock All RTUD units (systems with a remote condenser)
REQUIRE chilled water pumps be controlled by the
If paddle option is selected, RTWD/RTUD Series R® chillers Trane CH530 to avoid catastrophic damage to the
require a field-supplied control voltage contact input evaporator due to freezing. It is strongly recommended
through a flow proving switch 5S5 and an auxiliary contact that chilled water pump control also be used on RTWD
5K9 AUX. Connect the proving switch and auxiliary contact to provide proper unit operation.
to 1A15 J3-1 and 1X4-1. Refer to the field wiring for details.
The auxiliary contact can be BAS signal, starter contactor The relay output from board 1A14 is required to operate
auxiliary, or any signal which indicates the pump is the Evaporator Water Pump (EWP) contactor. Contacts
running. A flow switch is still required and cannot be should be compatible with 115/240 Vac control circuit. The
omitted. EWP relay operates in different modes depending on
CH530 or Tracer commands, if available, or service
Condenser Water Flow Interlock pumpdown (See maintenance section). Normally, the
If paddle option is selected, RTWD Series R® chillers EWP relay follows the AUTO mode of the chiller. Whenever
require a field-supplied control voltage contact input the chiller has no diagnostics and is in the AUTO mode,
through a flow proving switch 5S6 and an auxiliary contact regardless of where the auto command is coming from,
5K10 AUX. Connect the proving switch and auxiliary the normally open relay is energized. When the chiller
contact to 1A15 J2-1 and 1X4-1. Refer to the field wiring for exits the AUTO mode, the relay is timed open for an
details. The auxiliary contact can be BAS signal, starter adjustable (using TechView™) 0 to 30 minutes. The non-
contactor auxiliary, or any signal which indicates the pump AUTO modes in which the pump is stopped, include Reset
is running. A flow switch is still required and cannot be (88), Stop (00), External Stop (100), Remote Display Stop
omitted. (600), Stopped by Tracer (300), Low Ambient Run Inhibit
(200), and Ice Building complete (101).

72 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Installation - Electrical

Regardless of whether the chiller is allowed to control the a zero time delay. Exceptions (see Table 60) whereby the
pump on a full-time basis, if the MP calls for a pump to start relay continues to be energized occur with:
and water does not flow, the evaporator may be damaged A Low Chilled Water Temp. diagnostic (non-latching)
catastrophically. It is the responsibility of the installing (unless also accompanied by an Evap Leaving Water
contractor and/or the customer to ensure that a pump will Temperature Sensor Diagnostic)
start when called upon by the chiller controls.
OR
Table 60. Pump relay operation
A starter contactor interrupt failure diagnostic, in which a
Chiller Mode Relay Operation compressor continues to draw current even after
Auto Instant close
commanded to have shutdown
Ice Building Instant close OR
Tracer Override Close A Loss of Evaporator Water Flow diagnostic (non-latching)
Stop Timed Open and the unit is in the AUTO mode, after initially having
Ice Complete Instant Open
proven evaporator water flow.
Diagnostics Instant Open Alarm and Status Relay Outputs
Note: Exceptions are listed below.
(Programmable Relays)
When going from Stop to Auto, the EWP relay is energized A programmable relay concept provides for enunciation of
immediately. If evaporator water flow is not established in certain events or states of the chiller, selected from a list of
4 minutes and 15 sec., the CH530 de-energizes the EWP likely needs, while only using four physical output relays,
relay and generates a non-latching diagnostic. If flow as shown in the field wiring diagram. The four relays are
returns (e.g. someone else is controlling the pump), the provided (generally with a Quad Relay Output LLID) as part
diagnostic is cleared, the EWP is re-energized, and normal of the Alarm Relay Output Option. The relay’s contacts are
control resumed. isolated Form C (SPDT), suitable for use with 120 Vac
circuits drawing up to 2.8 amps inductive, 7.2 amps
If evaporator water flow is lost once it had been resistive, or 1/3 HP and for 240 Vac circuits drawing up to
established, the EWP relay remains energized and a non- 0.5 amp resistive.
latching diagnostic is generated. If flow returns, the
diagnostic is cleared and the chiller returns to normal The list of events/states that can be assigned to the
operation. programmable relays can be found in Table 61. The relay
will be energized when the event/state occurs.
In general, when there is either a non-latching or latching
diagnostic, the EWP relay is turned off as though there was
Table 61. Alarm and status relay output configuration

Description
This output is true whenever there is any active diagnostic that requires a manual reset to clear, that affects either the
Alarm - Latching
Chiller, the Circuit, or any of the Compressors on a circuit. This classification does not include informational diagnostics.
This output is true whenever there is any active diagnostic that could automatically clear, that affects either the Chiller,
Alarm - Auto Reset
the Circuit, or any of the Compressors on a circuit. This classification does not include informational diagnostics.
This output is true whenever there is any diagnostic affecting any component, whether latching or automatically clearing.
Alarm
This classification does not include informational diagnostics
This output is true whenever there is any diagnostic effecting Refrigerant Circuit 1, whether latching or automatically
Alarm Ckt 1
clearing, including diagnostics affecting the entire chiller. This classification does not include informational diagnostics.
This output is true whenever there is any diagnostic affecting Refrigerant Circuit 2 whether latching or automatically
Alarm Ckt 2
clearing, including diagnostics effecting the entire chiller. This classification does not include informational diagnostics.
Chiller Limit Mode (with This output is true whenever the chiller has been running in one of the Unloading types of limit modes (Condenser,
a 20 minute filter) Evaporator, Current Limit or Phase Imbalance Limit) continuously for the last 20 minutes.
This output is true whenever any compressors are running (or commanded to be running) on Refrigerant Circuit 1, and
Circuit 1 Running
false when no compressors are commanded to be running on that circuit.
This output is true whenever any compressors are running (or commanded to be running) on Refrigerant Circuit 2, and
Circuit 2 Running
false when no compressors are commanded to be running on that circuit.
This output is true whenever any compressors are running (or commanded to be running) on the chiller and false when
Chiller Running
no compressors are commanded to be running on the chiller.
This output is true whenever the chiller has reached maximum capacity or had reached its maximum capacity and since
Maximum Capacity
that time has not fallen below 70% average current relative to the rated AHRI current for the chiller. The output is false
(software 18.0 or later)
when the chiller falls below 70% average current and, since that time, had not reestablished maximum capacity.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 73
Installation - Electrical

Relay Assignments Using TechView™ diagnostic. This condition requires manual reset at the
chiller switch on the front of the control panel.
CH530 Service Tool (TechView™) is used to install the
Connect low voltage leads to terminal strip locations on
Alarm and Status Relay Option package and assign any of
1A5, J2-3 and 4. Refer to the field diagrams that are
the above list of events or status to each of the four relays
shipped with the unit.
provided with the option. The relays to be programmed
are referred to by the relay’s terminal numbers on the LLID Silver or gold-plated contacts are recommended. These
board 1A13. customer-furnished contacts must be compatible with 24
Vdc, 12 mA resistive load.
The default assignments for the four available relays of the
RTWD/RTUD Alarm and Status Package Option are: External Auto/Stop
Table 62. Default assignments If the unit requires the external Auto/Stop function, the
installer must provide leads from the remote contacts
Relay 5K23 to the proper terminals on board 1A5 J2-1 and 2.
Relay 1 Terminals J2 -12,11,10: Alarm
The chiller will run normally when the contacts are closed.
Relay 2 Terminals J2 - 9,8,7: Chiller Running When either contact opens, the compressor(s), if
Maximum Capacity operating, will go to the RUN:UNLOAD operating mode
Relay 3 Terminals J2-6,5,4:
(software 18.0 or later)
and cycle off. Unit operation will be inhibited. Closure of
Relay 4 Terminals J2-3,2,1: Chiller Limit the contacts will permit the unit to return to normal
operation.
If any of the Alarm/Status relays are used, provide
electrical power, 115 Vac with fused-disconnect to the Field-supplied contacts for all low voltage connections
panel and wire through the appropriate relays/terminals must be compatible with dry circuit 24 Vdc for a 12 mA
on 1A13. Provide wiring (switched hot, neutral, and resistive load. Refer to the field diagrams that are shipped
ground connections) to the remote annunciation devices. with the unit.
Do not use power from the chiller’s control panel External Circuit Lockout –
transformer to power these remote devices. Refer to the
field diagrams which are shipped with the unit.
Circuit #1 and Circuit #2
CH530 provides auxiliary control of a customer specified
Low Voltage Wiring or installed contact closure, for individual operation of
either Circuit #1 or #2. If the contact is closed, the
respective refrigerant circuit will not operate. In the
WARNING schematic, 5K21 is shown as controlling circuit 1 and 5K22
Proper Field Wiring and Grounding is controlling circuit 2.
Required! Upon contact opening, the refrigerant circuit will run
Failure to follow code could result in death or serious normally. This feature is used to restrict total chiller
injury. All field wiring MUST be performed by qualified operation, e.g. during emergency generator operations.
personnel. Improperly installed and grounded field Connections to board 1A6 are shown in the field diagrams
wiring poses FIRE and ELECTROCUTION hazards. To that are shipped with the unit.
avoid these hazards, you MUST follow requirements for
field wiring installation and grounding as described in These customer-supplied contact closures must be
NEC and your local/state electrical codes. compatible with 24 Vdc, 12 mA resistive load. Silver or
gold plated contacts are recommended.

Ice Building Option

The remote devices described below require low voltage
wiring. All wiring to and from these remote input devices CH530 provides auxiliary control for a customer specified/
to the Control Panel must be made with shielded, twisted installed contact closure for ice building if so configured
pair conductors. Be sure to ground the shielding only at and enabled. This output is known as the Ice Building
the control panel. Status Relay. The normally open contact will be closed
when ice building is in progress and open when ice
Note: To prevent control malfunctions, do not run low
building has been normally terminated either through Ice
voltage wiring (<30 V) in conduit with conductors
Termination setpoint being reached or removal of the Ice
carrying more than 30 volts.
Building command. This output is for use with the ice
Emergency Stop storage system equipment or controls (provided by
others) to signal the system changes required as the chiller
CH530 provides auxiliary control for a customer specified/
mode changes from “ice building” to “ice complete”.
installed latching trip out. When this customer-furnished
When contact 5K20 is provided, the chiller will run
remote contact 5K24 is provided, the chiller will run
normally when the contact is open.
normally when the contact is closed. When the contact
opens, the unit will trip on a manually resettable

74 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Installation - Electrical

CH530 will accept either an isolated contact closure DynaView™ or through digital communication with Tracer
(External Ice Building command) or a Remote (Comm3). See Figure 38, p. 76 for wiring diagrams.
Communicated input (Tracer) to initiate and command the The chilled water setpoint may be changed from a remote
Ice Building mode. location by sending either a 2-10 Vdc or 4-20 mA signal to
CH530 also provides a “Front Panel Ice Termination the 1A7, J2-5 and 6. The widest range of temperatures
Setpoint” through TechView™, adjustable from 20 to 31°F available for the 2-10 Vdc and 4-20 mA signals each
(-6.7 to -0.5°C) in at least 1°F (1°C) increments. correspond to:
When in the Ice Building mode, and the evaporator • ECWS of 10 to 65°F (-12.22 to 18.4°C)
entering water temperature drops below the ice • EHWS of 68 to 140°F (20 - 60°C).
termination setpoint, the chiller terminates the Ice
Building mode and changes to the Ice Building Complete The external chilled water setpoint (ECWS) and external
Mode. hot water setpoint (EHWS) minimum and maximum
values are configurable. See Table 63 for default values.
NOTICE: Table 63. Default minimum and maximum values
Evaporator Damage! Default Temperature
Freeze inhibitor must be adequate for the leaving water External Water Setpoint Minimum Maximum
temperature. Failure to do so may result in damage to
Chilled (ECWS) 34°F (1.1°C) 65°F (18.4°C)
system components.
Hot (EHWS) 86°F (30°C) 122°F (50°C)
TechView™ must also be used to enable or disable Ice
Machine Control. This setting does not prevent the Tracer The equations in Table 64 apply if using default minimum
from commanding Ice Building mode. and maximum values, as shown in above.
Upon contact closure, the CH530 will initiate an ice Table 64. EWS equations - default minimum and
building mode, in which the unit runs fully loaded at all maximum values(a)
times. Ice building shall be terminated either by opening
Chilled Water
the contact or based on the entering evaporator water Setpoint Voltage Signal Current Signal
temperature. CH530 will not permit the ice building mode
As generated Vdc= mA=
to be reentered until the unit has been switched out of ice from external 0.1455*(ECWS) 0.2909*(ECWS)
building mode (open 5K20 contacts) and then switched source +0.5454 +1.0909
back into ice building mode (close 5K20 contacts.) As processed by ECWS= ECWS=
In ice building, all limits (freeze avoidance, evaporator, CH530 6.875*(Vdc)-3.75 3.4375*(mA)-3.75
condenser, current) will be ignored. All safeties will be
enforced. Hot Water
Setpoint Voltage Signal Current Signal
If, while in ice building mode, the unit gets down to the
freeze stat setting (water or refrigerant), the unit will shut As generated Vdc= mA=
from external 0.2222*(EHWS) 0.4444*(EHWS)
down on a manually resettable diagnostic, just as in source -17.1092 -34.2184
normal operation.
As processed by EHWS= EHWS=
Connect leads from 5K20 to the proper terminals of board CH530 4.5*(Vdc)+77 2.25*(mA)+77
1A10. Refer to the field diagrams which are shipped with (a) Temperatures are in units of °F.
the unit.
If minimum and maximum values have been changed
Silver or gold-plated contacts are recommended. These
from default values in Table 63, use the following
customer furnished contacts must be compatible with 24
equations:
Vdc, 12 mA resistive load.
Table 65. EWS equations - any minimum and maximum
External Chilled or Hot Water Setpoint values(a)
(ECWS/EHWS) Option
For Voltage
The CH530 provides inputs that accept either 4-20 mA or 2- EWS = Min + (Max - Min)*(Vdc - 2)/8
Input Signal
10 Vdc signals to set the external water setpoint (EWS).
For Current
EWS = Min + (Max - Min)*(mA - 4)/16
• When the unit is in cooling mode, the EWS will Input Signal
correspond to the chilled water setpoint (ECWS). (a) Temperatures are in units of °F.
• When the unit is in heating mode, the EWS will
correspond to the hot water setpoint (EHWS). If the ECWS/EHWS input develops an open or short, the
LLID will report either a very high or very low value back to
This is not a reset function. The input defines the set point. the main processor. This will generate an informational
This input is primarily used with generic BAS (building diagnostic and the unit will default to using the Front Panel
automation systems). The water setpoint set via the (DynaView™) Chilled/Hot Water Setpoint.
RLC-SVX09L-EN 75
Installation - Electrical

TechView™ Service Tool is used to set the input signal type

from the factory default of 2-10 Vdc to that of 4-20 mA. Figure 38. Wiring examples for ECLS and ECWS/EHWS
TechView™ is also used to install or remove the External
Chilled Water Setpoint option as well as a means to enable
and disable ECWS.

External Current Limit Setpoint (ECLS) Option

Similar to the above, the CH530 also provides for an
optional External Current Limit Setpoint that will accept
either a 2-10 Vdc (default) or a 4-20 mA signal. The Current
Limit Setting can also be set via the DynaView™ or
through digital communication with Tracer (Comm 3). The
arbitration of the various sources of current limit is
described in the flow charts at the end of this section. The
External Current Limit Setpoint may be changed from a
remote location by hooking up the analog input signal to
the board 1A7, J2-2 and 3. Refer to the following paragraph
on Analog Input Signal Wiring Details. The following
equations apply for ECLS:

Voltage Signal Current Signal

As generated from
Vdc+0.133*(%)-6.0 mA=0.266*(%)-12.0
external source
As processed by UCM %=7.5*(Vdc)+45.0 %=3.75*(mA)+45.0
Chilled Water Reset (CWR)
If the ECLS input develops an open or short, the LLID will
report either a very high or very low value back to the man CH530 resets the chilled water temperature set point
processor. This will generate an informational diagnostic based on either return water temperature, or outdoor air
and the unit will default to using the Front Panel temperature. Return Reset is standard, Outdoor Reset is
(DynaView™) Current Limit Setpoint. optional.
The TechView™ Service Tool must be used to set the input The following shall be selectable:
signal type from the factory default of 2-10 Vdc to that of • One of three Reset Types: None, Return Water
4-20 mA current. TechView™ must be also be used to Temperature Reset, Outdoor Air Temperature Reset, or
install or remove the External Current Limit Setpoint Constant Return Water Temperature Reset.
Option for field installation, or can be used to enable or • Reset Ratio Set Points.
disable the feature (if installed). • For outdoor air temperature reset there shall be both
ECLS and ECWS Analog Input Signal Wiring Details: positive and negative reset ratio's.
• Start Reset Set Points.
Both the ECWS and ECLS can be connected and setup as
either a 2-10 Vdc (factory default), 4-20 mA, or resistance • Maximum Reset Set Points.
input (also a form of 4-20mA) as indicated below. The equations for each type of reset are as follows:
Depending on the type to be used, the TechView™ Service Return
Tool must be used to configure the LLID and the MP for the
CWS' = CWS + RATIO (START RESET - (TWE - TWL))
proper input type that is being used. This is accomplished
by a setting change on the Custom Tab of the and CWS' > or = CWS
Configuration View within TechView™. and CWS' - CWS < or = Maximum Reset
The J2-3 and J2-6 terminal is chassis grounded and Outdoor
terminal J2-1 and J2-4 can be used to source 12 Vdc. The
ECLS uses terminals J2-2 and J2-3. ECWS uses terminals CWS' = CWS + RATIO * (START RESET - TOD)
J2-5 and J2-6. Both inputs are only compatible with and CWS' > or = CWS
high-side current sources. and CWS' - CWS < or = Maximum Reset
where
CWS' is the new chilled water set point or the “reset CWS”
CWS is the active chilled water set point before any reset
has occurred, e.g. normally Front Panel, Tracer, or ECWS
RESET RATIO is a user adjustable gain
START RESET is a user adjustable reference

76 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Installation - Electrical

TOD is the outdoor temperature be located at least 2” from the coil face and somewhere
TWE is entering evap. water temperature “in-between” the two refrigerant circuits. Where the
condenser installation is such that the two refrigerant
TWL is leaving evap. water temperature circuit’s condensers are physically separate from each
MAXIMUM RESET is a user adjustable limit providing the other, or one circuit is more likely to see re-circulated
maximum amount of reset. For all types of reset, CWS' - warmer air, an attempt should be made to locate the probe
CWS < or = Maximum Reset. to see an average temperature of the two separate
condensers.
Reset Start Reset Max Reset Increment Factory
Important: The probe provided must not be substituted
Reset Ratio Range Range Default
Type Range °F (°C) °F (°C) IP SI Value
with another probe, as the probe and the
electronics are “matched / calibrated” at the
10 to 4 - 30 0 - 20
Return 1% 1% 50% factory for accuracy.
120% (2.2 - 16.7) (0.0 - 11.)
0 - 20 A twisted pair sheathed cable shall be run and connected
80 to 50 - 130
Outdoor (0.0 - 11.1) 1% 1% 10% between the probe at the remote condenser and its LLID
-80% (10 - 54.4)
module in the chiller control panel. The sensor’s circuit is
a class II power limited analog circuit and therefore the
In addition to Return and Outdoor Reset, the MP provides
wire should not be run in close proximity to any power or
a menu item for the operator to select a Constant Return
line voltage wiring. The splices at the condenser end,
Reset. Constant Return Reset will reset the leaving water
should be made to be water tight. The wire run should be
temperature set point so as to provide a constant entering
physically supported at equal intervals with consideration
water temperature. The Constant Return Reset equation is
for safety and reliability/durability with wire ties or similar
the same as the Return Reset equation except on selection
to meet local codes.
of Constant Return Reset, the MP will automatically set
Ratio, Start Reset, and Maximum Reset to the following. Remote Air Cooled Condenser
RATIO = 100%
If using a Levitor II remote air cooled condenser, refer to
START RESET = Design Delta Temp. wiring diagram provided from Krack located in the control
MAXIMUM RESET = Design Delta Temp. panel. If you have additional questions, please contact
Pueblo Technical Service.
The equation for Constant Return is then as follows:
CWS' = CWS + 100% (Design Delta Temp. - (TWE - TWL)) Fan Control for the Remote Air Cooled
Condenser
and CWS' > or = CWS
The CH530 Controls for the RTUD compressor chiller
and CWS' - CWS < or = Maximum Reset
provide as an option, the flexible and full control of a 2-
When any type of CWR is enabled, the MP will step the circuit remote air cooled condenser fans. In addition to the
Active CWS toward the desired CWS' (based on the above option for controlling between 2 to 8 fixed speed fans per
equations and setup parameters) at a rate of 1 degree F circuit (or multiples thereof), a separate additional option
every 5 minutes until the Active CWS equals the desired includes the ability to control either two speed fans or
CWS'. This applies when the chiller is running. variable speed fan/drive combinations in conjunction with
When the chiller is not running, CWS is reset immediately other fixed speed fans, to provide low ambient outdoor air
(within one minute) for Return Reset and at a rate of 1 temperature capability. The controls will also provide an
degree F every 5 minutes for Outdoor Reset. The chiller option for a simple per circuit interlock output (in lieu of
will start at the Differential to Start value above a fully reset actual fan control) to use in the scenario in which
CWS or CWS' for both Return and Outdoor Reset. independent fan head pressure or differential pressure
controls (by others) is applied. It is recommended
Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor however, that for the best overall unit performance, the
Installation Requirements integral fan control option is selected.
The outdoor air temperature sensor is optional for the The controls support control of a remote, air cooled
RTWD water cooled units, but is a required sensor for the condenser fan deck, from 2 to 8 fans per circuit (1-8 fans for
RTUD compressor chiller units. The sensor is required as variable speed). It supports options to control the
an important input to the condenser fan control algorithm following types of standard ambient outdoor air
as well as for the low outdoor air ambient lockout feature. temperature fan decks: 1) all fans fixed speed, and 2) all
The temperature sensor probe is shipped separately fans two speed. It will also support the following low
inside the control panel. ambient outdoor air temperature fan decks 1) one fan per
circuit is Two-Speed, (remaining fans fixed speed), and 2)
It is necessary for the chiller installer to locate and install
One fan per circuit is variable speed i.e. variable frequency
the separate outdoor air sensor probe at the remote air
drive (VFD), (remaining fans fixed speed). In the variable
cooled condenser at a location to sense the coil’s entering
fan low ambient outdoor air option the VFD fan and fixed
air temperature, while avoiding direct sunlight. It should
speed fans are sequenced accordingly to provide

RLC-SVX09L-EN 77
Installation - Electrical

continuous control from 0-100% air flow per circuit. Fan

staging provides the correct combination of fixed speed WARNING
fan relay, VFD relay (to enable operation of the VFD), and
speed outputs to provide air flow control commanded by Proper Field Wiring and Grounding
the fan algorithm running inside the CH530 Main Required!
Processor. The fan deck arrangement is independently Failure to follow code could result in death or serious
configurable per circuit. injury. All field wiring MUST be performed by qualified
Since the condenser is provided separately from the RTUD personnel. Improperly installed and grounded field
wiring poses FIRE and ELECTROCUTION hazards. To
compressor chiller, the RTUD electrical panel design does
avoid these hazards, you MUST follow requirements for
not provide for condensing unit’s control power field wiring installation and grounding as described in
requirements. The chiller’s control power transformer is NEC and your local/state electrical codes.
not sized to provide the control power for the additional
fan contactor loads. The CH530 controls, when properly Field wiring for the communication link must meet the
optioned, will provide for pilot duty rated relays, low following requirements:
voltage binary inputs, and low voltage analog outputs to
• All wiring must be in accordance with the NEC and
control the remote contactors and inverters provided by
local codes.
others. The CH530 fan control relays located in the chiller
control panel, are intended to control the fan contactors • Communication link wiring must be shielded, twisted
that are located in the remote air cooled condenser panel. pair wiring (Belden 8760 or equivalent). See the table
The Fan Control Relays are rated for up to 7.2 Amps below for wire size selection:
resistive, 2.88 Amps pilot duty 1/3 HP, 7.2 FLA at 120 Vac,
Table 66. Wire size
and up to 5 Amps general purpose at 240 Vac. All wiring for
the field connections to the condenser, will have screw Wire Size Max Length — Communication Wire
terminals for termination in the RTUD control panel with 14 AWG (2.5 mm2) 5,000 ft (1525 m)
the exception of the outdoor air temperature sensor
16 AWG (1.5 mm2) 2,000 ft (610 m)
(addressed above). Refer to the wiring diagrams.
18 AWG (1.0 mm2) 1,000 ft (305 m)
Separate fan control algorithms are used for fixed speed
and variable speed systems. For the variable speed fan • The communication link cannot pass between
deck option, the fan control reverts to fixed speed control buildings.
if an inverter drive fault is detected through a binary input
• All units on the communication link can be connected
interface with the drive. An informational diagnostic is
in a “daisy chain” configuration.
also provided to indicate the issue.
Reference “Controls Interface” section for fan control LonTalk® Communications Interface for
setting information. Chillers (LCI-C)
CH530 provides an optional LonTalk® Communication
Communications Interface Interface (LCI-C) between the chiller and a Building
Automation System (BAS). An LCI-C LLID shall be used to
Optional Tracer® Communications provide "gateway" functionality between a LonTalk
Interface compatible device and the Chiller. The inputs (outputs
This option allows the Tracer® CH530 controller to include both mandatory and optional network variables as
exchange information (e.g. operating setpoints and Auto/ established by the LONMARK® Functional Chiller Profile
Standby commands) with a higher-level control device, 8040.
such as a Tracer® Summit or a multiple-machine Note: For more information see ACC-SVN25*-EN.
controller. A shielded, twisted pair connection establishes
the bi-directional communications link between the CH530 BACnet® Communications Interface for
and the building automation system. Chillers (BCI-C)
Note: To prevent control malfunctions, do not run low The optional BACnet® Communication Interface for
voltage wiring (<30 V) in conduit with conductors Chillers (BCI-C) is comprised of a Tracer® UC400 controller
carrying more than 30 volts. with interface software. It is a non-programmable
communications module that allows the RTWD or RTUD
unit to communicate on a BACnet communications
network.
Note: For more information see BAS-SVP05*-EN.

78 RLC-SVX09L-EN
Operating Principles
This section contains an overview of the operation of
Series R® chillers equipped with microcomputer-based WARNING
control systems. It describes the overall operating
principles. Refrigerant under High Pressure!
Note: To ensure proper diagnosis and repair, contact a
RTWD Only
qualified service organization if a problem should Failure to follow instructions below could result in an
occur. explosion which could result in death or serious injury
or equipment damage. System contains oil and
refrigerant under high pressure. Recover refrigerant to
General relieve pressure before opening the system. See unit
nameplate for refrigerant type. Do not use non-
RTWD approved refrigerants, refrigerant substitutes, or
refrigerant additives.
The Model RTWD units are dual-compressor, dual circuit,
water-cooled liquid chillers. These units are equipped with
unit-mounted starter/control panels. The basic WARNING
components of an RTWD unit are: Hazardous Voltage!
• Unit-mounted panel containing starter and Tracer Failure to disconnect power before servicing could
CH530 controller and Input/Output LLIDS result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric
• Helical-rotary compressors power, including remote disconnects before servicing.
Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the
• Evaporator power can not be inadvertently energized.
• Condenser
• Electronic expansion valves
• Water-cooled condenser with integral subcooler
• Oil supply system
• Oil cooler (application dependent)
• Related interconnecting piping.

RTUD
The Model RTUD units are dual compressor, dual circuit
compressor chillers. These units are equipped with unit
mounted starter/control panel.The basic components of
an RTUD unit are:
• Unit-mounted panel containing starter and tracer
CH530 controller and Input/Output LLIDs
• Helical-rotary compressors
• Evaporator
• Electronic expansion valves
• Oil supply system
• Oil cooler
• Related interconnecting piping
Components of a typical unit are identified in Figure 39
and Figure 40, p. 80.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 79
Operating Principles

Figure 39. RTWD/RTUD components (front view)

Starter Panel Control Panel

Oil Separator
Circuit 1
Compressor B

Condenser Circuit 2
Condenser Circuit 1 (RTWD only)
(RTWD only)

Suction Service Valve

Evaporator ASME Suction Service Valve
Nameplate
Evaporator Evaporator
Circuit 1 Circuit 2

Figure 40. RTWD/RTUD components (back view)

Circuit 2 Circuit 1
Compressor
Junction Box Oil Separator
ASME Nameplate
Discharge
Service Valve

Refrigerant
Condenser
Filter
(RTWD only)

Condenser Liquid Level

ASME Sensor
Base rail
for forklifting Nameplate
(optional) (RTWD Only) Oil Cooler
Gas Pump (optional on RTWD)
(behind frame)

80 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Operating Principles

Refrigeration (Cooling) Cycle Figure 41. Pressure enthalpy curve

Overview
The refrigeration cycle of the Series R chiller is Liquid
conceptually similar to that of other Trane chiller products.
It makes use of a shell-and-tube evaporator design with 3
4 2
refrigerant evaporating on the shell side and water flowing

Pressure
inside tubes having enhanced surfaces.
The compressor is a twin-rotor helical rotary type. It uses
a suction gas-cooled motor that operates at lower motor
temperatures under continuous full and part load 1
5
operating conditions. An oil management system
provides an almost oil-free refrigerant to the shells to
maximize heat transfer performance, while providing
lubrication and rotor sealing to the compressor. The
lubrication system ensures long compressor life and
contributes to quiet operation. Enthalpy

For RTWD units, condensing is accomplished in a shell- Evaporation of refrigerant occurs in the evaporator. A
and-tube heat exchanger where refrigerant is condensed metered amount of refrigerant liquid enters a distribution
on the shell side and water flows internally in the tubes. system in the evaporator shell and is then distributed to
For RTUD units, condensing is accomplished in a remote the tubes in the evaporator tube bundle. The refrigerant
air-cooled condenser unit. The refrigerant flows through absorbs heat and vaporizes as it cools the water flowing
the tubes in the condenser. Air flows over the coils in the through the evaporator tubes. Refrigerant vapor leaves
condenser, removing the heat and condensing the the evaporator as saturated vapor (State Pt. 1).
refrigerant. The refrigerant vapor generated in the evaporator flows to
Refrigerant is metered through the flow system using an the suction end of the compressor where it enters the
electronic expansion valve, that maximizes chiller motor compartment of the suction-gas-cooled motor. The
efficiency at part load. refrigerant flows across the motor, providing the
necessary cooling, then enters the compression chamber.
A unit-mounted starter and control panel is provided on
Refrigerant is compressed in the compressor to discharge
every chiller. Microprocessor-based unit control modules
pressure conditions. Simultaneously, lubricant is injected
(Tracer CH530) provide for accurate chilled water control
into the compressor for two purposes: (1) to lubricate the
as well as monitoring, protection and adaptive limit
rolling element bearings, and (2) to seal the very small
functions. The “adaptive” nature of the controls
clearances between the compressor’s twin rotors.
intelligently prevents the chiller from operating outside of
Immediately following the compression process the
its limits, or compensates for unusual operating
lubricant and refrigerant are effectively divided using an
conditions, while keeping the chiller running rather than
oil separator. The oil-free refrigerant vapor enters the
simply tripping due to a safety concern. When problems
condenser at State Pt. 2. The lubrication and oil
do occur, diagnostic messages assist the operator in
management issues are discussed in more detail in the
troubleshooting.
compressor description and oil management sections that
Cycle Description follow.
For RTWD units, a discharge baffle within the condenser
The refrigeration cycle for the RTWD/RTUD chiller can be
shell distributes the compressed refrigerant vapor evenly
described using the pressure-enthalpy diagram shown in
across the condenser tube bundle. Cooling tower water,
Figure 41, p. 81. Key State Points are indicated on the
circulating through the condenser tubes, absorbs heat
figure and are referenced in the discussion following.
from this refrigerant and condenses it.
For RTUD units, air flows across the condenser coils,
absorbing heat from the refrigerant and condenses it.
As the refrigerant enters the bottom of the condenser
(State Pt. 3), it enters an integral subcooler where it is
subcooled before traveling to the electronic expansion
valve (State Pt. 4). The pressure drop created by the
expansion process vaporizes a portion of the liquid
refrigerant. The resulting mixture of liquid and gaseous
refrigerant then enters the Evaporator Distribution system
(State Pt. 5). The flash gas from the expansion process is

RLC-SVX09L-EN 81
Operating Principles

internally routed to compressor suction, and while the

liquid refrigerant is distributed over the tube bundle in the
evaporator.
The RTWD/RTUD chiller maximizes the evaporator heat
transfer performance while minimizing refrigerant charge
requirements. This is accomplished by metering the liquid
refrigerant flow to the evaporator’s distribution system
using the electronic expansion valve. A relatively low
liquid level is maintained in the evaporator shell, which
contains a bit of surplus refrigerant liquid and
accumulated lubricant. A liquid level measurement device
monitors this level and provides feedback information to
the CH530 unit controller, which commands the electronic
expansion valve to reposition when necessary. If the level
rises, the expansion valve is closed slightly, and if the level
is dropping, the valve is opened slightly such that a steady
level is maintained.

Compressor
A two-pole, hermetic, induction motor (3600 rpm at 60 hz,
3000 rpm at 50hz) directly drives the compressor rotors.
The motor is cooled by suction refrigerant gas from the
evaporator, entering the end of the motor housing through
the suction line.

Oil Management
The unit is configured with an oil management system that
ensures proper oil circulation throughout the unit. The key
components of the system include an oil separator, oil
filter, oil sump and oil sump heater. An optional oil cooler
is installed when the unit is used for high condensing
temperature or low evaporator temperature conditions.

82 RLC-SVX09L-EN
Controls Interface
CH530 Communications Multiple screens are available and text is presented in
multiple languages as factory-ordered or can be easily
Overview downloaded from www.trane.com.
The DynaView™ enclosure design is weatherproof and
The Trane CH530 control system that runs the chiller
made of durable plastic for use as a device on the outside
consists of several elements:
of the unit.
• The main processor collects data, status, and
The display on DynaView™ is a 1/4 VGA display with a
diagnostic information and communicates commands
resistive touch screen and an LED backlight. The display
to the starter module and the LLID (for Low Level
area is approximately 4 inches wide by 3 inches high
Intelligent Device) bus. The main processor has an
(102mm x 60mm).
integral display (DynaView™) with a built in serial port.
• Low level intelligent device (LLID) bus. The main Key Functions
processor communicates to each input and output In this touch screen application, key functions are
device (e.g. temperature and pressure sensors, low determined completely by software and change
voltage binary inputs, analog input/output) all depending upon the subject matter currently being
connected to a four-wire bus, rather than the displayed. The basic touch screen functions are outlined
conventional control architecture of signal wires for below.
each device.
• The communication interface to a building automation
Radio Buttons
system (BAS). Radio buttons show one menu choice among two or more
• A service tool to provide all service/maintenance alternatives, all visible. (It is the AUTO button in.) The radio
capabilities. button model mimics the buttons used on old-fashioned
radios to select stations. When one is pressed, the one that
Main processor and service tool (TechView™) software is was previously pressed “pops out” and the new station is
downloadable from www.trane.com. The process is selected. In the DynaView™ model the possible selections
discussed later in this section under TechView™ Interface. are each associated with a button. The selected button is
DynaView™ provides bus management. It has the task of darkened, presented in reverse video to indicate it is the
restarting the link, or filling in for what it sees as “missing” selected choice. The full range of possible choices as well
devices when normal communications has been as the current choice is always in view.
degraded. Use of TechView™ may be required.
Spin Value Buttons
The CH530 uses the IPC3 protocol based on RS485 signal
technology and communicating at 19.2 Kbaud to allow 3 Spin values are used to allow a variable setpoint to be
rounds of data per second on a 64-device network. A changed, such as leaving water setpoint. The value
typical RTWD/RTUD chiller will have around 40 devices, increases or decreases by touching the increment (+) or
depending upon its configuration. decrement (-) arrows.

Most diagnostics are handled by the DynaView™. If a Action Buttons

temperature or pressure is reported out of range by a LLID, Action buttons appear temporarily and provide the user
the DynaView™ processes this information and calls out with a choice such as Enter or Cancel.
the diagnostic. The individual LLIDs are not responsible
for any diagnostic functions. Hot Links
Note: It is imperative that the CH530 Service Tool Hot links are used to navigate from one view to another
(TechView™) be used to facilitate the replacement view.
of any LLID or reconfigure any chiller component.
TechView™ is discussed later in this section. File Folder Tabs
Note: For definition of terms, see Service File folder tabs are used to select a screen of data. Just like
Document section of Techview™, or selection tabs in a file folder, these serve to title the folder/screen
icon button next to setpoint title. selected, as well as provide navigation to other screens. In
DynaView™, the tabs are in one row across the top of the
display. The folder tabs are separated from the rest of the
Controls Interface display by a horizontal line. Vertical lines separate the tabs
from each other. The folder that is selected has no
DynaView™ horizontal line under its tab, thereby making it look like a
Each chiller is equipped with a DynaView™ interface. The part of the current folder (as would an open folder in a file
DynaView™ has the capability to display information to cabinet). The user selects a screen of information by
the operator including the ability to adjust settings. touching the appropriate tab.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 83
Controls Interface

Display Screens The ALARMS button appears only when an alarm is

present, and blinks (by alternating between normal and
Basic Screen Format reverse video) to draw attention to a diagnostic condition.
The basic screen format appears as: Pressing the ALARMS button takes you to the
Tab Navigator
corresponding tab for additional information.
File Folder Tabs

Auto, Stop/Immediate Stop

Page Page
Scroll Scroll The Auto and Stop keys will be presented as radio buttons
(Up) (Down)
within the persistent key display area. The selected key
will be black.
Line The chiller will stop when the Stop key is touched, entering
Scroll
the Run Unload mode. An informational screen will be
Contract displayed for 5 seconds indicating that a second
Contrast Control
Control Darker
depression of an “Immediate Stop” key during this time
Lighter period will result in an immediate stop. Pressing the
“Immediate Stop” key while the immediate stop screen is
displayed, will cause the unit to stop immediately,
Radio Buttons
skipping normal shutdown.
The file folder tabs across the top of the screen are used to
select the various display screens.
Scroll arrows are added if more file tabs (choices) are
available. When the tabs are at the left most position, the
left navigator will not show and only navigation to the right
will be possible. Likewise when the right most screen is
selected, only left navigation will be possible.
The main body of the screen is used for description text,
data, setpoints, or keys (touch sensitive areas). The Chiller
Mode is displayed here.
The double up arrows cause a page-by-page scroll either
up or down. The single arrow causes a line by line scroll to
occur. At the end of the page, the appropriate scroll bar will
disappear.
A double arrow pointing to the right indicates more
information is available about the specific item on that NOTICE:
same line. Pressing it will bring you to a subscreen that will
present the information or allow changes to settings. Equipment Damage!
The bottom of the screen (Fixed Display) is present in all Do NOT enable/disable the chiller by removing water
screens and contains the following functions. The left flow or equipment damage can occur
circular area is used to reduce the contrast/viewing angle
of the display. The right circular area is used to increase Touching the Auto key will arm the chiller for active cooling
the contrast/viewing angle of the display. The contrast if no diagnostic is present. As in UCP2, a separate action
may require re-adjustment at ambient temperatures must be taken to clear active diagnostics.
significantly different from those present at last The AUTO and STOP, take precedence over the ENTER and
adjustment. CANCEL keys. (While a setting is being changed, AUTO
The other functions are critical to machine operation. The and STOP keys are recognized even if ENTER or CANCEL
AUTO and STOP keys are used to enable or disable the has not been pressed.
chiller. The key selected is in black (reverse video). The Diagnostic Annunciation
chiller will stop when the STOP key is touched and after
completing the Shutting Down mode. When an active diagnostic is present, an Alarms key will be
added to the persistent display area. This key will serve
Touching the AUTO key will enable the chiller for active two purposes. The first purpose will be to alert the
cooling if no diagnostic is present. (A separate action must operator that a diagnostic exists. The second purpose is to
be taken to clear active diagnostics.) provide navigation to a diagnostic display screen.
The AUTO and STOP keys, take precedence over the Enter
and Cancel keys. (While a setting is being changed, AUTO
and STOP keys are recognized even if Enter or Cancel has
not been pressed.)

84 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Controls Interface

Figure 42. Diagnostic screen

Note: A complete listing of diagnostics and codes is

included in the Diagnostic Section. The Main screen shall be the default screen. After an idle
time of 30 minutes the CH530 shall display the Main screen
Manual Override Exists
with the first data fields.
An indicator to present the presence of a manual override
The remaining items (listed in the following table) will be
will share space with the Alarms enunciator key. While a
viewed by selecting the up/down arrow icons.
manual override exists, the space used for the Alarms key
will be occupied by a “Manual” icon, that will display solid Table 67. Main screen data fields table
inverse color similar to the appearance of the Alarms
enunciator. An Alarm will take precedence of the Manual, Description Units Resolution
until the reset of active alarms, at which point the Manual Chiller Mode (>> submodes) enumeration
indicator would re-appear if such an override exists. Circuit 1 Mode (>> submodes) enumeration
If the Manual indicator is pressed, the Manual Control Circuit 2 Mode (>> submodes) enumeration
Settings screen will be displayed. Evap Ent (Lvg Water Temp F/C 0.1
Cond Ent (Lvg Water Temp F/C 0.1
Active Chilled Water Setpoint
F/C 0.1
(>>source)
Active Hot Water Setpoint (>>source) F/C 0.1
Average Line Current %RLA 1
Active Current Limit Setpoint
F/C 0.1
(>>source)
Active Ice Termination Setpoint
F/C 0.1
(>>front panel setpoint)
Outdoor Air Temperature F/C 0.1
Software Type enumeration RTWD/UD
Software Version X.XX

Chiller Operating Mode

Main Screen The machine-operating mode indicates the operational
The Main screen is a “dashboard” of the chiller. High level status of the chiller. A subscreen with additional mode
status information is presented so that a user can quickly summary information will be provided by selection of an
understand the mode of operation of the chiller. additional information icon (>>). The operating mode line
will remain stationary while the remaining status items
The Chiller Operating Mode will present a top level scroll with the up/down arrow keys.
indication of the chiller mode (i.e. Auto, Running, Inhibit,
Run Inhibit, etc.). The “additional info” icon will present a
subscreen that lists in further detail the subsystem modes.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 85
Controls Interface

Table 68. Chiller mode

Chiller Modes Description

Top Level Mode Further information is provided by the submode
Sub-modes
Stopped The chiller is not running either circuit, and cannot run without intervention.
Stopped Sub-modes
Chiller is stopped by DynaView™ Stop button command- cannot be remotely
Local Stop
overridden.
Chiller is stopped by the DynaView™ Immediate Stop (by pressing Stop button
then Immediate Stop buttons in succession) - previous shutdown was manually
Immediate Stop
commanded to shutdown immediately without a run-unload or pumpdown cycle
- cannot be remotely overridden.
The entire chiller is stopped by circuit diagnostics or lockouts that may
No Circuits Available
automatically clear.
Diagnostic Shutdown - Manual Reset The chiller is stopped by a diagnostic that requires manual intervention to reset.
Only possible when Condenser Head Pressure Control option is enabled and the
Cond Pmp Strt Dly (Head Pres Ctrl) min:sec condenser pump is being manually commanded to run. This wait may be
necessary due to the Head Pressure control device’s stroke time.
The chiller is currently being inhibited from starting (running), but may be
Run Inhibit
allowed to start if the inhibiting or diagnostic condition is cleared.
Run Inhibit Sub-modes
The entire chiller is stopped by circuit diagnostics or lockouts that may
No Circuits Available
automatically clear.
The chiller is inhibited from running as the Ice Building process has been normally
terminated on the evaporator entering temperature. The chiller will not start
Ice Building Is Complete
unless the ice building command (hardwired input or Building Automation
System command) is removed or cycled.
The chiller is inhibited from running for a brief period of time if it is commanded
from active ice building mode into normal cooling mode via the ice building
hardwired input or Tracer. This allows time for the external system load to
Ice to Normal Transition “switchover” from an ice bank to the chilled water loop, and provides for a
controlled pull down of the loop's warmer temperature. This mode is not seen if
the ice making is automatically terminated on return brine temperature per the
mode below.
Start is Inhibited by BAS (Building Automation System) Chiller is stopped by Tracer or other BAS system.
The chiller is inhibited from starting (and running) by the “external stop”
Start is Inhibited by External Source
hardwired input.
Diagnostic Shutdown - Auto Reset The entire chiller is stopped by a diagnostic that may automatically clear.
Waiting for BAS Communications (to Establish Operating The chiller is inhibited because of lack of communication with the BAS. This is only
Status)* valid 15 minutes after power up.
The chiller is inhibited from starting (and running) by an outdoor air ambient
Start is Inhibited by Low Ambient Temp temperature lower than a specified temperature - per user adjustable settings
and can be disabled.
The chiller is inhibited from starting due to the Low Condenser Temperature Start
Start is Inhibited by Low Condenser Temperature
Inhibit function.
The chiller is inhibited from starting based on the local time of day scheduling
Start is Inhibited by Local Schedule
(option).
The chiller is not currently running but can be expected to start at any moment
Auto
given that the proper conditions and interlocks are satisfied.
Auto Sub-modes
The unit will wait up to 20 minutes in this mode for water flow to be established
Waiting For Evap Water Flow
per the flow switch hardwired input
The chiller will wait indefinitely in this mode, for a leaving water temperature
Waiting for Need to Cool
higher than the Chilled Water Setpoint plus some control dead-band.
The chiller will wait indefinitely in this mode, for a leaving water temperature
Waiting for Need to Heat
lower than the Hot Water Setpoint plus some control dead-band.
Power Up Delay Inhibit: min:sec On Power Up, the chiller will wait for the Power Up Delay Timer to expire.
The chiller is not currently running and there is a call for cooling but the lead
Waiting to Start
circuit start is delayed by certain interlocks or proofs.
Waiting to Start Sub-modes

86 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Controls Interface

Table 68. Chiller mode (continued)

Chiller Modes Description

Top Level Mode Further information is provided by the submode
Sub-modes
The chiller will wait up to 4 minutes in this mode for condenser water flow to be
Waiting For Condenser Water Flow
established per the flow switch hardwired input.
The chiller will wait up to 30 minutes (user adjustable) in this mode for to allow
Cond Water Pump PreRun Time min:sec
the condenser water loop to equalize in temperature
Only possible when Condenser Head Pressure Control option is enabled, this wait
Cond Pmp Strt Dly (Head Pres Ctrl) min:sec
may be necessary due to the Head Pressure control device's stroke time.
Only possible when Condenser Head Pressure Control option is enabled, this wait
Cprsr Strt Delay (Head Pres Ctrl) min:sec
may be necessary due to the Head Pressure control device's stroke time
Running At least one circuit on the chiller is currently running.
Running Sub-modes
Maximum Capacity The chiller is operating at its maximum capacity.
The control is limiting the chiller loading due to capacity based softloading
Capacity Control Softloading
setpoints.
The chiller is running, and loading of individual compressors may be limited by
a gradual filter of the chiller’s softloading current limit setpoint. The starting
Current Control Softloading current limit and the settling time of this filter is user adjustable as part of the
current control softload feature. The mode will be displayed as long as the
Current Control Softloading limit is ramping or “settling”.
At least one circuit on the chiller is currently running, but the operation of any
of the circuits on the chiller are being actively limited by the controls chiller level
Running - Limit limit. Other sub modes that apply to the Chiller Running top level modes may also
be displayed here. Refer to the list of circuit limit modes for circuit limits that will
cause display of this Chiller Level Running Limit mode.
The chiller is still running but shutdown is imminent. The chiller is going through
Shutting Down
a compressor run-unload of the lag circuit/compressor.
Shutting Down Sub-modes
The Evaporator water pump is continuing to run past the shutdown of the
Evaporator Water Pump Off Delay: min:sec
compressors, executing the pump off delay timer.
The Condenser water pump is continuing to run past the shutdown of the
Cond Water Pump Off Delay: min:sec
compressors, executing the pump off delay timer.
Misc. These sub modes may be displayed in most of the top level chiller modes
Misc. Sub-modes
Manual Evap Water Pump Override The Evaporator water pump relay is on due to a manual command.
Diagnostic Evap Water Pump Override The Evaporator water pump relay is on due to a diagnostic.
Diagnostic Cond Water Pump Override The Condenser water pump relay is on due to a diagnostic.
The local time of day scheduler (option) is operational and could automatically
Local Schedule Active change modes or setpoints as scheduled. Must be enabled in Configuration menu
to be functional.
Manual Condenser Water Pump Override The condenser water pump relay is on due to a manual command.
Manual Compressor Control Signal Chiller capacity control is being controlled by DynaView™ or TechView™.
Hot Water Control
These modes are mutually exclusive and they indicate that the chiller is
Chilled Water Control controlling to the active hot water setpoint, the active chilled water setpoint, or
the active ice termination setpoint respectively.
Ice Building

RLC-SVX09L-EN 87
Controls Interface

Table 69. Circuit modes

Circuit Modes Description

Top Level Mode Further information is provided by the submode
Sub-modes
Stopped The given circuit is not running and cannot run without intervention.
Stopped Sub-modes
Diagnostic Shutdown - Manual Reset The circuit has been shutdown on a latching diagnostic.
The circuit is manually locked out by the circuit lockout setting - the nonvolatile
Front Panel Circuit Lockout
lockout setting is accessible through either the DynaView™ or TechView™.
External Circuit Lockout The respective circuit is locked out by the external circuit lockout binary input.
The given circuit is currently being inhibited from starting (and running), but may
Run Inhibit
be allowed to start if the inhibiting or diagnostic condition is cleared.
Run Inhibit Sub-modes
Diagnostic Shutdown - Auto Reset The circuit has been shutdown on a diagnostic that may clear automatically.
Low Oil Flow Cool Down Time min:sec See oil flow protection spec
The compressor (and therefore, its circuit) is currently unable to start due to its
Restart Inhibit min:sec restart inhibit timer. A given compressor is not allowed to start until 5 minutes (adj)
has expired since its last start, once a number of “free starts” have been used up.
The given circuit is not currently running but can be expected to start at any
Auto
moment given that the proper conditions and interlocks are satisfied.
Auto Sub-mode
This submode is displayed when the EXV is performing a calibration. A calibration
Calibrating EXV is only performed when the chiller is not running and never more frequently than
once every 24 hours
Waiting to Start The chiller is going through the necessary steps to allow the lead circuit to start.
Waiting to Start Sub-modes
The compressor (and thus its circuit) will wait up to 2 minutes in this mode for oil
Start Inhibited Waiting For Oil
level to appear in the oil tank.
The Chiller will wait for the time it takes the EXV to get to its commanded pre-
Waiting For EXV Preposition position prior to starting the compressor. This is typically a relatively short delay and
no countdown timer is necessary (less than 15 seconds)
Running The compressor on the given circuit is currently running.
Running Sub-modes
The circuit is experiencing low system differential pressure and its compressor is
Establishing Min Cap - Low Diff Pressure being force loaded, regardless of Chilled Water Temperature Control, to develop
pressure sooner.
The circuit is running with high discharge temperatures and its compressor is being
Establishing Min Cap - High Disch Temp force loaded to its step load point, without regard to the leaving water temperature
control, to prevent tripping on high compressor discharge temperature.
Liquid level control of the Electronic Expansion Valve has temporarily been
suspended. The EXV is being modulated to control for a minimum differential
pressure. This control implies low liquid levels and higher approach temperatures,
EXV Controlling Differential Pressure
but only as is necessary to provide minimum oil flow for the compressor until the
condenser water loop can warm up to approximately 50F. (Future mode display -
display of mode not implemented in Phase 1 or 2 although present in algorithms.)
Liquid level control of the Electronic Expansion Valve has temporarily been
suspended. The EXV is being modulated to control for a minimum evaporator
pressure that is based on the pressure of the Low Refrigerant Temperature Cutout.
This control will tend to increase the liquid level above the setpoint or to open the
EXV Controlling for Low Evaporator Pressure
valve more quickly than liquid level control can, in order to avoid an LRTC trip. It
is most often invoked transiently to help open the EXV in the event of rapidly falling
liquid level and rapidly declining evaporator pressures. (Future Mode display -
display of mode not implemented in Phase 1 or 2 although present in algorithms.)
The circuit, and compressor are currently running, but the operation of the chiller/
Running - Limited compressor is being actively limited by the controls. * See the section below
regarding criteria for annunciation of limit modes

88 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Controls Interface

Table 69. Circuit modes (continued)

Circuit Modes Description

Top Level Mode Further information is provided by the submode
Sub-modes
Running-Limited Sub-modes
The compressor is running and its capacity is being limited by high currents. The
current limit setting is 120% RLA (to avoid overcurrent trips) or lower as set by the
Current Limit
compressor's “share” of the active current limit (demand limit) setting for the entire
chiller.*
The circuit is experiencing condenser pressures at or near the condenser limit
High Condenser Pressure Limit setting. Compressors on the circuit will be unloaded to prevent exceeding the
limits.*
The circuit is experiencing saturated evaporator temperatures at or near the Low
Low Evaporator Rfgt Temperature Limit Refrigerant Temperature Cutout setting. Compressors on the circuit will be
unloaded to prevent tripping. *
This mode will occur if the leaving evaporator water temperature exceeds 75ºF (for
SW version 6.30 and earlier) or 90ºF (for software 7.01 and later) at the point at
which the step load for the respective circuit would be desired. This is often the case
in a high water temperature pull-down. While in this mode, no compressor on the
Hot Start Limit circuit will be allowed to load past its minimum load capacity step, but it will not
inhibit other compressors from staging on. This mode is necessary to prevent
nuisance trips due to Compressor Overcurrent or High Pressure Cutout. Reasonable
pull-down rates can still be expected despite this limit, since the compressor's
capacity even at partial load is much greater at high suction temperatures.
Shutting Down The circuit is preparing to de-energize the compressor.
Preparing Shutdown Sub-mode
The circuit is in the process of shutting down by performing an operational
pumpdown just prior to stopping the last running compressor. The EXV is
Operational Pumpdown
commanded closed. Pumpdown will terminate when both the liquid level and the
evap pressure are low (below specific criteria) or after a specific time has expired.
The compressor is in its run unload time. The number of seconds remaining in run
Compressor Unloading: min:sec unload is shown in the submode. The run unload time must expire before the
compressor will shut down.
Misc These sub modes may be displayed in most of the top level circuit modes
Misc. Sub-modes
Service Pumpdown The circuit is currently performing a service pumpdown.
If there is accumulated Restart Inhibit Time, it must expire before a compressor is
Restart Time Inhibit: min:sec
allowed to start.

Active Chilled Water Setpoint

The active chilled water setpoint is the setpoint that is
currently in use. It results from the logical hierarchy of
setpoint arbitration by the main processor. It will be
displayed to 0.1 degrees Fahrenheit or Celsius.
Touching the double arrow to the left of the Active Chilled
Water Setpoint will take the user to the active chilled water
setpoint arbitration sub-screen.

Active Chilled Water Subscreen

The active chilled water setpoint is that setpoint to which
the unit is currently controlling. It is the result of arbitration
between the front panel, BAS, schedule, external, and
auxiliary setpoints (schedule and auxiliary not shown in
the following diagram), which in turn may be subjected to
a form of chilled water reset.
The chilled water reset status area in the right most column
will display one of the following messages
• Return
• Constant Return

RLC-SVX09L-EN 89
Controls Interface

• Outdoor Settings Sub-Screens - Table of Text, Data,

• Disabled Ranges, etc.
The left column text “Front Panel”, “BAS” or “Schedule”, Below is the table of text, resolution, field size, enumerated
“External”, “Auxiliary”, “Chilled Water Reset”, and “Active selections, and data for Settings subscreens.
Chilled Water Setpoint” will always be present regardless
of installation or enabling those optional items. In the Table 70. Chiller
second column “-----” will be shown if that option is Not Resolution or
Installed, otherwise the current setpoint from that source (Enumerations),
will be shown. Description Default Units

Setpoints that are adjustable from the DynaView™ (Front Front Panel Cool/Heat
(Cool, Heat), Cool Enum
Command
Panel Chilled Water Setpoint, Auxiliary Chilled Water
Setpoint) will provide navigation to their respective Front Panel Chilled Water
+ or - XXX.X Temperature
Setpt:
setpoint change screen via a double-arrow to the right of
the setpoint source text. The setpoint change screen will Front Panel Hot Water
+ or - XXX.X Temperature
Setpt
look identical to the one provided in the Chiller Setpoints
screen. The “Back” button on the setpoint change screen Front Panel Current Limit
XXX %RLA
Setpt:
provides navigation back to the setpoint arbitration
Front Panel Ice Build Cmd On/Auto Enum
screen.
Front Panel Ice
The “Back” button on the setpoint arbitration screen XXX.X Temperature
Termination Setpoint
provides navigation back to the chiller screen.
(BAS/Ext/FP, Ext/Front
Setpoint Source: Panel, Front Panel), Enum
Other Active Setpoints BAS/Ext/FP
The Active Current Limit Setpoint will behave the same Delta
Differential to Start XX.X
was as the Active Chilled Water Setpoint, except that its Temperature
units are in percent and there is an Ice Building source in Delta
Differential to Stop XX.X
place of the Auxiliary source. Front Panel Current Limit Temperature
Setpoint will provide navigation to its setpoint change Leaving Water Temp
XX.X Temperature
screen. Cutout
Low Refrigerant Temp
XX.X Temperature
Settings Screen Cutout
(Bal Starts/Hrs, Fixed),
The Settings screen provides a user the ability to adjust Staging Sequence Enum
Bal Starts/Hrs
settings necessary to support daily tasks. The layout
Condenser Pump Prestart
provides a list of sub-menus, organized by typical XX, 0 Minutes
Time
subsystem. This organization allows each subscreen to be
shorter in length which should improve the user's
navigation. Table 71. Feature settings

A sample Settings screen is a list of the subsystems as Resolution or

shown below. (Enumerations),
Description Default Units
(Enable, Disable),
Cooling Low Ambient Lockout Enum
Enable
Cooling Low Ambient Lockout Subscreen (see below)
(Enable, Disable),
Cooling Low Ambient Lockout Enum
Enable
Cooling Low Amb Lockout Setpt XXX.X Temp
(Enable, Disable),
Ice Building: Enum
Disable
(Enable, Disable),
Ext Chilled/Hot Water Setpt Enum
Disable
(Enable, Disable),
Ext Current Limit Setpoint Enum
Disable
(Const Return,
Chilled Water Reset Outdoor, Return, Enum
Disable), Disable

90 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Controls Interface

Table 71. Feature settings (continued) Local Time of Day Schedule Screen
Resolution or To access the optional Local Time of Day Schedule Screen
(Enumerations), it must be configured in TechView™. This option will then
Description Default Units be shown under the Feature Settings screen.
Chilled Water Reset Subscreens (see below) This screen shows the overall feature enable/disable
(Const Return, setting, plus a listing of all 10 events, including their event
Chilled Water Reset Outdoor, Return, Enum time and active days of the week.
Disable), Disable
Return Reset Ratio XXX %
Return Start Ratio XXX.X Temp
Return Maximum Reset XXX.X Temp
Outdoor Reset Ratio XXX %
Outdoor Start Reset XXX.X Temp
Outdoor Maximum Reset XXX.X Temp
(English, Selection 2,
LCI-C Diag Language Selection 3) English Enum
(0)
LCI-C Diag Encoding (Text, Code) Text Enum

Table 72. System manual control settings

Resolution or
(Enumerations),
Description Default Units Monitor Value Local Settings Event Screen
1) Water Flow status This screen displays the details for a particular event,
Evap Water
(Auto, On), Auto Enum 2) Override Time
Pump including the active days, event time, and the Local
Remaining
Schedule arbitrated setpoints. Selecting a given item will
1) Water Flow status
Cond Water allow the user to modify it.
(Auto, On), Auto Enum 2) Override Time
Pump
Remaining
Head Pressure 1) Override status -
(Auto, On), Auto Enum
Control Auto/Manual
Staging
1) Override status -
(Stepping (Auto, Manual) Auto Enum
Auto/Manual
Control
Capacity
1) Override status -
Modulation (Auto, Manual) Auto Enum
Auto/Manual
Control
1) Resettable 1) Resettable Energy
Clear Energy
Energy consumption Enum consumption
Consumption
totalization (kWh) totalization (kWh)

Table 73. Circuit manual control settings

Resolution or
(Enumerations),
Description Default Units Monitor Value
1) Override status: Not
Compressor (Continue, Not Available/Continue/
Enum
Pumpdown Available) Starting/Pumpdown
2) Suction Pressure
(Not Locked Out,
Front Panel
Locked Out), Not Enum
Ckt Lockout
Locked Out
Expansion
(Auto, Manual) Enum
Valve Control

RLC-SVX09L-EN 91
Controls Interface

Event Time Screen

Event Enable/Disable Screen

Event Arbitrated Settings Screens
For analog setpoints, the screen is slightly different than
the standard screen, because there are two additional
buttons - “Enable” and “Disable”. Selecting “Used” will
make the setting valid and allow the user to change the
value. Selecting “Not Used” will make the setting invalid,
and will not allow the user to change the value.

Event Active Days Screen

This screen is unusual because it does not use radio
buttons, which only allow one active selection at a time.
These buttons are more like “selection buttons” or check
boxes. The user can select any combination of days, or
none at all.

92 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Controls Interface

Display Settings Screen are displayed as spin buttons. The lower half of the screen
is reserved for help screens.

All setpoint subscreens will execute the equivalent of a

Table 74. Display settings Cancel key if any display activities cause the subscreen to
be left before a new setpoint is entered. E.g. if the Alarms
Resolution or (Enumerations),
key is pressed before a new setpoint is entered, the new
Description Default Units
setpoint will be cancelled. The same applies to any time-
(“mmm dd, yyyy”, “dd-mmm-yyyy”),
Date Format Enum outs.
“mmm dd, yyyy
Date3 Pressing the Auto or Stop keys will not cause a cancel
since the setpoint subscreen is not left on this action.
Time Format (12-hour, 24-hour), 12-hour Enum
Time of Day3 Enumerated Settings Subscreen
Keypad (Display The enumerated setpoint subscreen has no cancel or enter
(Enable, Disable), Disable Enum
Lockout2
key. Once a radio key is depressed the item is immediately
Display Units (SI, English), SI Enum
set to the new enumeration value.
Pressure Units (Absolute, Gauge), Gauge Enum
(English, Selection 2, Selection 3),
Language4 Enum
English1
Notes:
1. Language choices are dependent on what the Service Tool has setup
in the Main Processor. Get Radio Button names from Main Processor
setups. Language selections will include English and qty 2 alternate as
loaded by TechView™.
2. Enables a DynaView™ Lockout screen. All other screens timeout in 30
minutes to this screen. The Lockout Screen will have 0-9 keypad to
permit the user to re-enter the other screens with a fixed password
(159).
3. The Date and Time setup screen formats deviate slightly from the
standard screens defined above. See the alternate screen layouts
below.
4. Language shall always be the last setting listed on the Control
Settings menu (which will also always be the last item listed on the
Settings menu list). This will allow a user to easily find language
selection if looking at an unrecognizable language.

Upon selecting a Settings list all setpoints available to

change along with their current value will appear. The
Mode Override Subscreens
operator selects a setpoint to change by touching either The Mode Override subscreen has no cancel or enter key.
the verbal description or setpoint value. Doing this causes Once a radio key is depressed that new value is
the screen to switch to either the Analog Settings immediately assumed.
Subscreen or the Enumerated Settings Subscreen.

Analog Setting Subscreens

Analog Settings Subscreen displays the current value of
the chosen setpoint in the upper ½ of the display. It is
displayed in a changeable format consistent with its type.
Binary setpoints are considered to be simple two state
enumerations and will use radio buttons. Analog setpoints

RLC-SVX09L-EN 93
Controls Interface

Mode Override for Enumerated Settings is shown below:

Date/Time Subscreen
The setpoint screen for setting up the CH530 date is shown
below: The user must select Day, Month, or Year and then
use the up/down arrows to adjust.

The setpoint screen for setting up the CH530 time with a 12

hour format is shown below: The user must select Hour or
Minute and then use the up/down arrows to adjust.
Adjusting hours will also adjust am/pm.

94 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Controls Interface

Lockout Screen
The DynaView™ Display and Touch Screen Lock screen is
shown. This screen is used if the Display and Touch Screen Table 75. Report name: system evaporator
Lock feature is Enabled. Thirty minutes after the last key Description Resolution Units
stroke this screen will be displayed and the Display and
Evap Entering Water Temp: + or - XXX.X Temperature
Touch Screen will be locked out until “159 Enter” is
Evap Leaving Water Temp: + or - XXX.X Temperature
entered.
Evap Water Flow Switch Status: Flow, No Flow Enumeration
Until the proper password is entered there will be no
access to the screens including all reports, all setpoints, Figure 43. Report name: circuit evaporator
and Auto/Stop/Alarms/Interlocks. The password “159” is
not programmable from either DynaView™ or Description Resolution Units
TechView™. Evap Entering Water
+/- XXX.X Temperature
Temperature
Evap Leaving Water Temperature +/- XXX.X Temperature
Evap Sat Rfgt Temp +/- XXX.X Temperature
Suction Pressure XXX.X Pressure
Evap Approach Temp: +/- XXX.X Temperature
Evap Water Flow Switch Status (Flow, No Flow) Enum
Expansion Valve Position XXX.X %
Expansion Valve Position Steps XXXX Steps
Evaporator Liquid Level XX.X Height

Table 76. Report name: system condenser

Description Resolution Units

Cond Entering Water Temp +/- XXX.X Temperature
Cond Leaving Water Temp +/- XXX.X Temperature
If the Display and Touch Screen Lock feature is Disabled, a
Cond Water Flow Switch Status (Flow, No Flow) Enum
similar screen including “Enter 159 to Unlock” will show if
the MP temperature is approximately less than 32°F (0°C) Outdoor Air Temperature +/- XXX.X Temperature
and it has been 30 minutes after the last key stroke. Cond Head Pressure Ctrl XXX %

Reports Table 77. Report name: circuit condenser

The Reports tab will allow a user to select from a list of
Description Resolution Units
possible reports headings (i.e. Custom, ASHRAE Chiller
Cond Entering Water Temp +/- XXX.X Temperature
Log, Refrigerant, etc.) Each report will generate a list of
status items as defined in the tables that follow: Cond Leaving Water Temp +/- XXX.X Temperature
Condenser Air Flow XXX %
Cond Inverter Speed XXX %
Outdoor Air Temperature +/- XXX.X Temperature
Cond Water Flow Switch Status (Flow, No Flow) Enum
Cond Sat Rfgt Temp +/- XXX.X Temperature
Cond Rfgt Pressure XXX.X Pressure
Differential Pressure XXX.X Pressure
Cond Approach Temp +/- XXX.X Temperature

Table 78. Report name: system compressor

Description Resolution Units

Average Line Current XXX %RLA
Unit Volts XXX Volts
Unit Running Time XXXX:XX hr:min
Power Demand kW
Power Demand Time Period min
Energy Consump - Resettable kWh

RLC-SVX09L-EN 95
Controls Interface

Table 78. Report name: system compressor (continued) Power Up and Self Tests
Description Resolution Units
Power-Up DynaView™
Time of Last Reset time-date
Energy Consump - NonReset kWh On Power-Up DynaView™ will progress through three
screens:
Table 79. Report name: circuit compressor First Screen, Application Status, Boot Software P/N, Self
Description Resolution Units
Test and Application Time Stamp.
Oil Pressure XXX.X Pressure This screen will display for 3-10 seconds. This screen will
give the status of the Application software, the Boot
Compressor Rfgt Dschg Temp +/- XXX.X Temperature
Software P/N, display Self Test results and display the
Cond Sat Rfgt Temp +/- XXX.X Temperature
Application Part Number. The contrast will also be
Average Line Current XXX %RLA adjustable from this screen. The message “Selftest
%RLA L1 L2 L3 XXX.X %RLA Passed” may be replaced with “Err2: RAM Error” or “Err3:
Amps L1 L2 L3 XXX.X Amps CRC Failure”
Phase Voltages XXX Vac
Power Consumption XXX kW
Load Power Factor X.XXX
Compressor Starts XXXX Integer
Compressor Running Time XXXX:XX hr:min

Table 80. Report name: system ASHRAE chiller log

Description Resolution Units

XX:XX mmm
Current Time/Date: Date/Time
dd, yyyy
Chiller Mode: Enum
Active Chilled Water Setpoint: XXX.X Temperature
Active Hot Water Setpoint: XXX.X Temperature
Evap Entering Water Temp: XXX.X Temperature
Evap Leaving Water Temp: XXX.X Temperature Display Formats
Evap Water Flow Switch Status: Enum Temperature settings can be expressed in F or C,
Outdoor Air Temperature: XXX.X Temperature depending on Display Units settings.
Pressure settings can be expressed in psia, psig, kPaa (kPa
Table 81. Report name: circuit ASHRAE chiller log
absolute), or kPag (kPa gauge) depending on Display Units
Description Resolution Units settings.
Circuit Mode: Enum Dashes (“-----”) appearing in a temperature or pressure
Evap Sat Rfgt Temp XXX.X Temperature report, indicates that the value is invalid or not applicable.
Suction Pressure XXX.X Pressure Languages
Evap Approach Temp XXX.X Temperature
The languages for DynaView™ will reside in the main
Cond Sat Rfgt Temp: XXX.X Temperature processor. The main processor will hold three languages,
Cond Rfgt Pressure XXX.X Pressure English, and two alternate languages. The service tool
Cond Approach Temp XXX.X Temperature (TechView™) will load the main processor with user
Compressor Starts XXXX Integer selected languages from a list of available translations.
Compressor Running Time XX:XX Hours:Minutes

96 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Controls Interface

TechView™ 3. A download link will be sent to the e-mail address

provided. Before you click the link please note:
• Sent link may only be used one time.
• Internet options must be set correctly to allow
download. To verify correct setting:
– Open Internet Explorer Browser
– Click Tools
– Select Internet Options
– Select Security tab
– Click on Internet zone
– Click Custom Level button
– Scroll to Downloads section
– Verify/Enable “Automatic prompting for file
downloads”
– Click OK
– Click YES on warning window
– Click Apply, then OK
Note: If this setting is incorrect, you may or may
TechView™ is the PC (laptop) based tool used for servicing
not receive an error message during
Tracer® CH530. Technicians that make any chiller control
download attempt.
modification or service any diagnostic with CH530 must
use a laptop running the software application 4. Click the download link in the e-mail message.
“TechView™.” TechView™ is a Trane application • If the download window does not open
developed to minimize chiller downtime and aid the immediately, please look for a yellow highlighted
technicians understanding of chiller operation and service message bar/line near the top of your browser. It
requirements. may contain a message such as “To help protect
Important: Performing any Tracer CH530 service your security, Internet Explorer blocked this site
functions should be done only by a properly from downloading files to your computer. Click here
trained service technician. Please contact for options.” Click on message line to see options.
your local Trane service agency for • When dialog box appears, click Save and navigate
assistance with any service requirements. to the CH530 folder created in Step 1. Click OK.
TechView™ software is available via Trane.com. • If you do not complete the download successfully,
you will have to request another download link
http://www.trane.com/COMMERCIAL/DesignAnalysis/
(Step 2).
TechView.aspx?i=1435
5. Navigate to the CH530 folder created in Step 1. Double-
This download site provides a user the TechView
click the installation (.exe) file. The License Agreement
installation software and CH530 main processor software
dialog box appears.
that must be loaded onto your PC in order to service a
CH530 main processor. The TechView service tool is used 6. Click I Agree after reviewing License Agreement. The
to load software into the Tracer CH530 main processor. Choose Components dialog box appears. All
components are selected by default. (These are the
TechView™ Software Download, Installation actual MP versions for all units.) Deselect any
This information can also be found at http:// components you do not want.
www.trane.com/COMMERCIAL/DesignAnalysis/ Note: Deselecting components reduces the size of the
TechView.aspx?i=1435. installed application.
1. Create a folder called “CH530” on your (C:\CH530) on 7. Click Install. A progress meter dialog box appears. An
your hard drive. This \CH530 folder is the standard information file appears when installation is complete.
recommended location for the installation file. Storing
Note: Techview™ requires a current version of JAVA.
the installation file in this location helps you remember
If you do not have the current release, TechView
where it is stored and makes it easier for technical
installation will be interrupted, and you will be
support personnel to assist you.
provided with information for required JAVA
2. Click the link for the latest version on the TechView software download. Once you have completed
Software Download page. Enter your name, e-mail the JAVA installation, return to Step 5 to restart
address and other required information. Click Submit. installation.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 97
Controls Interface

Minimum PC requirements to install and TechView™ is also used to perform any CH530 service or
operate TechView maintenance function. Servicing a CH530 main processor
includes:
• Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional or Windows
Vista Business operating system • Updating main processor software

• Internet Explorer 6.0 and higher • Monitoring chiller operation

• USB 2.0 or higher • Viewing and resetting chiller diagnostics

• Pentium II, III, or higher processor • Low Level Intelligent Device (LLID) replacement and
binding
• 128MB RAM minimum
• Main processor replacement and configuration
• 1024 x 768 resolution modifications
• CD-ROM (optional for copying TechView install to CD) • Setpoint modifications
• 56K modem (optional for internet connection) • Service overrides
• 9-pin RS-232 serial connection (optional for
connection to DynaView™)
Unit View
Note: TechView was designed and validated for this Unit view is a summary for the system organized by chiller
specific laptop configuration. Any variation from subsystem. This provides an overall view of chiller
this configuration may have different results. operating parameters and gives you an “at-a-glance”
Therefore, support for TechView is limited to only assessment of chiller operation.
those laptops configured as described above. The Status tab displays important operating information
Trane will not support TechView on laptops for the unit and allows you to change several key operating
configured differently. There is no support for parameters. The panel is divided into four or more sub-
laptops running Intel Celeron, AMD, Cytrix or panels (depending on the number of circuits in the unit).
processors other than Pentium. The Chiller Operating Mode tab displays the unit, circuit
Optional Software and compressor top level operating modes. Upon
successful Local Connect, Tech View will display UNIT
• Microsoft Office with Access VIEW. RTWD and RTUD Unit Views are shown below.

Figure 44. Unit view (RTWD)

98 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Controls Interface

Figure 45. Unit view (RTUD)

The Unit View displays the system, control point name, Condenser Elevation Configuration - RTUD
value and unit of measure. It reflects active setpoints and Installations
allows you to make changes.
Condenser elevation setting is a required input during
Unit View also displays, in real time, all non-setpoint data startup of RTUD units. Go to the Unit View/Chiller Tab,
organized by tabs. As data changes on the chiller, it is select Condenser Elevation setting and enter condenser
automatically updated in the Unit View. elevation in appropriate units. Reference Figure , p. 99.
Circuit/Compressor Lockout) The shipped default of this setting is 0 and it represents the
distance of the bottom of the condenser, relative to the top
In order to lockout a circuit the user must go to the Unit of the evaporator. Use a positive value for the condenser
View/Circuit 1 (or Circuit 2) Tab and then select the Front above the evaporator and a negative value for the
Panel Lockout for Circuit 1 and/or Circuit 2. The user can condenser below the evaporator. An estimate to within +
select Not Locked Out or Locked Out. /- 3 feet is required.
Figure 46. Unit view - RTUD condenser elevation

RLC-SVX09L-EN 99
Controls Interface

Table 82. Unit view tabs - detail

Tab System Control Point Name Status Unit Min Max Default

Chiller
Chiller Front Panel Cool/heat Command Setting
Chiller Front Panel Chilled Water Setpoint Setpoint deg F (C) 10 (-12.22) 65 (18.33) 45 (7.22)
deg F (C)
Chiller Front Panel Hot Water Setpoint Setpoint 80 (26.66) 140 (60) 90 (32.22)

Chiller Front Panel Current Limit Setpoint Setpoint %RLA 60 120 120
Chiller Setpoint Source Setting
Chiller Active Chilled Water Setpoint Status °F (°C)
Chiller Chilled Water Softload Target Status °F (°C)
Chiller Active Hot Water Setpoint Status °F (°C)
Chiller Hot Water Softload Target Status °F (°C)
Chiller Active Current Limit Setpoint Status % RLA
Chiller Current Limit SoftLoad Target Status % RLA
Chiller Outdoor Air Temperature Status °F (°C)
Chiller Evaporator Leaving Water Temperature Status °F (°C)
Chiller Evaporator Entering Water Temperature Status °F (°C)
Chiller Evaporator Water Flow Switch Status Status
Chiller Condenser Leaving Water Temperature Status °F (°C)
Chiller Condenser Entering Water Temperature Status °F (°C)
Chiller Condenser Water Flow Switch Status Status
Chiller Condenser Elevation Setting ft -26.25 98.43 0
Chiller Manual Override Exists Status
Chiller Front Panel Ice Building Command Setting
Chiller Front Panel Ice Termination Setpoint Setting °F (°C) 20 32 27
Chiller Chiller Power Demand Status
Chiller Chiller Power Demand Time Period Setting min 1 60 15
Chiller Energy Consumption - Resettable Status
Chiller Starter Energy Consumption Last Reset Status
Chiller Energy Consumption - NonResettable Status
Circuit 1
Circuit 1 Front Panel Circuit Lockout Setting Not locked out
Circuit 1 External Circuit Lockout Status Status Not locked out
Circuit 1 Evaporator Refrigerant Pressure Status psi gauge
Circuit 1 Evaporator Saturated Refrigerant Temperature Status °F (°C)
Circuit 1 Evaporator Approach Temperature Status °F (°C)
Circuit 1 Evaporator Refrigerant Liquid Level Status in (mm)
Circuit 1 Evaporator Refrigerant Liquid Level Error Status in (mm)
Circuit 1 EXV Percent Open Status %
Circuit 1 EXV Position Steps Status steps
Circuit 1 Differential Refrigerant Pressure Status psid
Circuit 1 Condenser Refrigerant Pressure Status psi gauge
Circuit 1 Condenser Saturated Refrigerant Temperature Status °F (°C)
Circuit 1 Compressor Refrigerant Discharge Temperature Status °F (°C)
Circuit 1 Condenser Approach Temperature Status °F (°C)
Circuit 1 Compressor Refrigerant Discharge Superheat Status °F (°C)
Circuit 1 Compressor 1A Oil Pressure Status psi gauge
Circuit 1 Compressor 1A Average Line Current Status % RLA

100 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Controls Interface

Table 82. Unit view tabs - detail (continued)

Tab System Control Point Name Status Unit Min Max Default
Circuit 1 Compressor 1A Line 1 Current Status % RLA
Circuit 1 Compressor 1A Line 2 Current Status % RLA
Circuit 1 Compressor 1A Line 3 Current Status % RLA
Circuit 1 Starter 1A Voltage Vab Status volts
Circuit 1 Starter 1A Voltage Vbc Status volts
Circuit 1 Starter 1A Voltage Vca Status volts
Circuit 1 Compressor 1A Power Consumption Status kW
Circuit 1 Compressor 1A Power Factor Status
Circuit 1 Modulation Unload Steady Command Status
% of fan
Circuit 1 Condenser Air Flow Status
deck
% of inverter
Circuit 1 Condenser Inverter Speed Status
full speed
Diff Temp °F
Circuit 1 Average Condenser Approach Temperature Status
(°C)
Circuit 1 Re-initialize Average Condenser Approach Temperature Setting
% of System
Circuit 1 Compressor 1A Average Oil Pressure Drop Status
DP
Circuit 1 Re-initialize Compressor 1A Average Oil Pressure Drop Setting
Circuit 1 Compressor 1A Oil Filter Life Remaining Status %
Circuit 1 Re-initialize Compressor 1A Oil Filter Life Remaining Setting
Circuit 1 Time Remaining Until Oil Analysis Recommended Status Hrs
Circuit 1 Re-initialize Oil Time Remaining Setting
Circuit 2
Circuit 2 Front Panel Circuit Lockout Setting
Circuit 2 External Circuit Lockout Status Status
Circuit 2 Evaporator Refrigerant Pressure Status psi gauge
Circuit 2 Evaporator Saturated Refrigerant Temperature Status °F (°C)
Circuit 2 Evaporator Approach Temperature Status °F (°C)
Circuit 2 Evaporator Refrigerant Liquid Level Status in (mm)
Circuit 2 Evaporator Refrigerant Liquid Level Error Status in (mm)
Circuit 2 EXV Percent Open Status %
Circuit 2 EXV Position Steps Status steps
Circuit 2 Differential Refrigerant Pressure Status psid
Circuit 2 Condenser Refrigerant Pressure Status psi gauge
Circuit 2 Condenser Saturated Refrigerant Temperature Status °F (°C)
Circuit 2 Compressor refrigerant Discharge Temperature Status °F (°C)
Circuit 2 Condenser Approach Temperature Status °F (°C)
Circuit 2 Compressor Refrigerant Discharge Superheat Status °F (°C)
Circuit 2 Compressor 2A Oil Pressure Status psi gauge
Circuit 2 Compressor 2A Average Line Current Status % RLA
Circuit 2 Compressor 2A Line 1 Current Status % RLA
Circuit 2 Compressor 2A Line 2 Current Status % RLA
Circuit 2 Compressor 2A Line 3 Current Status % RLA
Circuit 2 Starter 2A Voltage Vab Status volts
Circuit 2 Starter 2A Voltage Vbc Status volts
Circuit 2 Starter 2A Voltage Vca Status volts
Circuit 2 Compressor 2A Power Consumption Status kW
Circuit 2 Compressor 2A Power Factor Status

RLC-SVX09L-EN 101
Controls Interface

Table 82. Unit view tabs - detail (continued)

Tab System Control Point Name Status Unit Min Max Default
Circuit 2 Modulation Unload Steady Command Status
% of fan
Circuit 2 Condenser Air Flow Status
deck
% of inverter
Circuit 2 Condenser Inverter Speed Status
full speed
Diff Temp °F
Circuit 2 Average Condenser Approach Temperature Status
(°C)
Circuit 2 Re-initialize Average Condenser Approach Temperature Setting
% of System
Circuit 2 Compressor 2A Average Oil Pressure Drop Status
DP
Circuit 2 Re-initialize Compressor 2A Average Oil Pressure Drop Setting
Circuit 2 Compressor 2A Oil Filter Life Remaining Status %
Circuit 2 Re-initialize Compressor 2A Oil Filter Life Remaining Setting
Circuit 2 Time Remaining Until Oil Analysis Recommended Status Hrs
Circuit 2 Re-initialize Oil Time Remaining Setting
Override & Lockouts
Circuit 1 Restart Inhibit Time - Compressor 1A Status mins:secs
Circuit 1 Restart Inhibit Time - Compressor 2A Status mins:secs
Manual
Clear Restart Inhibit Setting
Overrides
Manual
Evaporator Water Pump Override Setting Auto
Overrides
Chiller Evaporator Water Pump Override Time Remaining Status mins:secs
Manual
Condenser Water Pump Override Setting Auto
Overrides
Chiller Condenser Water Pump override Time Remaining Status mins:secs
Circuit 1 EXV Control override Setting
Circuit 1 Manual EXV Position Command Setting % 0 100
Circuit 1 Evaporator Refrigerant Liquid Level Status in (mm)
Circuit 1 EXV Percent Open Status %
Circuit 1 EXV Position Steps Status steps
Circuit 1 Evaporator Approach Temperature Status °F (°C)
Circuit 1 Differential Refrigerant Pressure Status psid
Circuit 2 EXV Control Override Setting Auto
Circuit 2 Manual EXV Position Command Setting % 0 100
Circuit 2 Evaporator Refrigerant Liquid Level Status in (mm)
Circuit 2 EXV Percent Open Status %
Circuit 2 EXV Position Steps Status steps
Circuit 2 Evaporator Approach Temperature Status °F (°C)
Circuit 2 Differential Refrigerant Pressure Status psid
Manual
Compressor 1A Pumpdown Command Setting
Overrides
Manual
Compressor 1A Pumpdown Status Status °F (°C)
Overrides
Manual
Compressor 2A Pumpdown Command Setting
Overrides
Manual
Compressor 2A Pumpdown Status Status °F (°C)
Overrides
Circuit 1 Evaporator Refrigerant Pressure Status psi gauge
Circuit 2 Evaporator Refrigerant Pressure Status psi gauge
Chiller Keypad Lockout Setting Normal
Chiller CHRV Head Pressure Control Override Setting Auto

102 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Controls Interface

Table 82. Unit view tabs - detail (continued)

Tab System Control Point Name Status Unit Min Max Default
Manual
Manual Staging (Stepping Control Setting
Overrides
Chiller Manual Staging (Stepping Control Command Status
Manual
Manual Capacity (Modulation Control Setting %
Overrides
Chiller Manual Capacity Modulation Control Command Status % -100 100
Circuit 1 Compressor 1A Load Step Status
Circuit 1 Compressor 1A% Duty Cycle Sent Status %
Circuit 1 Compressor 1A Average Line Current Status % RLA
Circuit 2 Compressor 2A Load Step Status
Circuit 2 Compressor 2A% Duty Cycle Sent Status %
Circuit 2 Compressor 2A Average Line Current Status % RLA
Chiller Evaporator Leaving Water Temperature Status °F (°C)
Chiller Evaporator Entering Water Temperature Status °F (°C)
Chiller “Service Recommended” Messages Setting

Feature Settings
Chiller Cooling Low Ambient Lockout Setting Disable
Chiller Cooling Low Ambient Lockout Temperature Setpoint °F (°C) -9.94 (-23.3) 70 (21.11) 54.86 (12.7)
Chiller Differential to Start Setpoint °F (°C) 0.5 (.278) 10 (5.55) 2 (1.1)
Chiller Differential to Stop Setpoint °F (°C) 0.5 (.278) 10 (5.55) 2 (1.1)
Chiller Staging Sequence Setting Staging Seq
Chiller Power-Up Start Delay Setting sec 0 600 0
Chiller Local Stop Delay Setting sec 0 30 0
Chiller Capacity Control Softload Time Setting sec 0 7200 900
Chiller Current Limit Control Softload Time Setting sec 0 7200 600
Chiller Current Limit Softload Start Point Setting % 20 100 40
Chiller Variable Evaporator Water Flow Compensation Setting Disable
Chiller Evaporator Pump Off Delay Setting minutes 0 30 1
Chiller Condenser Pump Off Delay Setting minutes 0 30 1
Chiller Condenser Water Pump Pre-Run Tim Setting minutes 0 30 0
Chiller Low Evaporator Leaving Water Temperature Cutout Setting °F (°C) 5 (-15) 36 (2.22) 36 (2.22)
Chiller Low Refrigerant Temperature Cutout Setting °F (°C) -5 (-20.55) 36 (2.22) 28.6 (-1.89)
Chiller High Evaporator Water Temperature Cutout Setting °F (°C) 80 (26.67) 150 (65.56) 105 (40.55)
Chiller Local Atmospheric Pressure Setting psia 68.9 110.3 101.35
Chiller Ice Building Feature Setting Enable
Chiller External Chilled (Hot Water Setpoint Enable Setting Enable
Chiller External Current Limit Setpoint Enable Setting Enable
Chiller Under (Over Voltage Protection Enable Setting Enable
Chiller LCI-C Diagnostic Language Setting English
Chiller LCI-C diagnostic Encoding Setting Text
Chiller Head Relief Relay Filter Time Setting sec 0 1200 600
Chiller Limit Relay Filter Time Setting sec 0 1200 600
Chiller Maximum Capacity Relay Filter Time Setting sec 0 1200 600

Gains
Chiller Cooling Design Delta Temperature (Waterside) Setting °F (°C) 3.6 (2) 32.4 (18) 10 (5.55)
Chiller Heating Design Delta Temperature (Waterside) Setting °F (°C) 3.6 (2) 32.4 (18) 10 (5.55)
Chiller Condenser Pressure Limit Setpoint Setting % 80 120 90
Chiller Carryover Maximum Capacity Limit Setpoint Setpoint % 50 500 500

RLC-SVX09L-EN 103
Controls Interface

Table 82. Unit view tabs - detail (continued)

Tab System Control Point Name Status Unit Min Max Default
Chiller Carryover Maximum Capacity Limit Kp Setting 0.03 2.0 .2
Chiller Carryover Maximum Capacity Limit Ti Setting sec 0.1 500 3
Chiller Carryover Maximum Capacity Limit - Input Type Setting

Condenser Head Pressure Control

Chiller Head Pressure Control Override Setting Auto
Chiller Off State Output Command Setting volts 0 10 2
Chiller Output Voltage at Desired Minimum Flow Setting volts 0 10 2
Chiller Desired Minimum Flow Setting % 0 100 20
Chiller Output Voltage at Desired Maximum Flow Setting volts 0 10 10
Chiller Actuator Stroke Time Setting sec 1 1000 30
Chiller Damping Coefficient Setting 0.1 1.8 0.5
Chiller Condenser Water Pump Pre-Run Time Setting minutes 0 30 0
Chiller Condenser Water Pump Pre-Run Time Remaining Status mins:secs
Chiller Head Pressure Control Output Status %
Chiller Time Till Actuator at Position Status mins:secs
Chiller Time to Safe Start of Cond Wtr Pump Status mins:secs
Starts & Hours
Chiller Chiller Running Time Status hrs:mins
Circuit 1 Compressor 1A Running Time Status hrs:mins
Circuit 1 Compressor 1A Starts Status
Circuit 1 Revise Compressor 1A Run Time Setting hrs:mins
Circuit 1 Revise Compressor 1A Starts Setting starts 0 4294967295
Circuit 2 Compressor 2A Running Time Status hrs:mins
Circuit 2 Compressor 2A Starts Status
Circuit 2 Revise Compressor 2A Run Time Setting hrs:mins
Circuit 2 Revise Compressor 2A Starts Setting starts 0 4294967295
Date Recorder
Chiller Data Recorder Enable/Disable Setpoint
Chiller Data Recorder Change Delta Setpoint 0 1.0 0.2
Chiller Data Recorder Sample Period Setpoint Sec 1 3600 2
Delta Temp
Chiller Data Recorder Temperature Change Delta Setpoint 0 2.8 0.6
(°C)
Delta Press
Chiller Data Recorder Pressure Change Delta Setpoint 0 34.5 13.8
(kPa)
Chiller Data Recorder Percent Change Delta Setpoint % 0 5 1
Chiller Data Recorder Count Change Delta Setpoint 0 120 30
Chilled Water Reset
Chiller Chilled Water Reset Type Setpoint Disable
Chiller Return Water Reset Ratio Setpoint % 10 120 50
Chiller Return Water Start Reset Setpoint °F (°C) 36 (2.22) 62 (16.67) 42 (5.56)
Chiller Return Water Maximum Reset Setpoint °F (°C) 32 (0) 52 (11.11) 37 (2.78)
Chiller Outdoor Air Reset Ratio Setpoint % -80 80 10
Chiller Outdoor Air Start Reset Setpoint °F (°C) 50 (10) 130 (54.44) 90 (32.22)
Chiller Outdoor Air Maximum Reset Setpoint °F (°C) 32 (0) 52 (11.11) 37 (2.78)
Chiller Actual Degrees of Chilled Water Reset Status °F (°C)
Chiller I/O States
Chiller Evaporator Water Pump Command Status
Chiller Condenser Water Pump Command Status
Chiller Ice Building Active Status

104 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Controls Interface

Table 82. Unit view tabs - detail (continued)

Tab System Control Point Name Status Unit Min Max Default
Circuit 1 I/O States
Circuit 1 Compressor 1A Load Step Status
Circuit 1 Oil Return Pump Drain Status
Circuit 1 Oil Return Pump Drain Status
Circuit 1 Optical Oil Sensor Input Status
Circuit 2 I/O States
Circuit 2 Compressor 2A Load Step Status
Circuit 2 Oil Return Pump Drain Status
Circuit 2 Oil Return Pump Drain Status
Circuit 2 Optical Oil Sensor Input Status

The items that can be modified show up in white. The

items that cannot be modified show up in gray.
Figure 47. Fields in white

To change the setpoint, enter a new value for the setpoint

into the text field.
Figure 48. Change setpoint

If the entered value is outside the given range, the

background turns red.
Figure 49. Change out of range

RLC-SVX09L-EN 105
Controls Interface

If the value entered is not valid, an error message will

display and the change will not occur.
Figure 50. Setpoint change failed

Status View
Status View displays, in real time, all non-setpoint data
organized by subsystem tabs. As data changes on the
chiller, it is automatically updated in Status View.
Figure 51. Status view

Table 83. Status view tab - detail (continued)

Table 83. Status view tab - detail
Tab Control Point Name Units
Tab Control Point Name Units
Sub Level Mode 5
Chille
Sub Level Mode 6
r
Unit Running Powered Indicator
Front Panel Auto Stop Command
MMR
Local Atmospheric Pressure psia
MAR
Application Software Revision
IFW
Keypad Lockout
Chiller Running Time hrs:mins
Local Stop Delay sec
Active Chiller Auto/Stop Command
Top Level Mode
Setpoint Source Manual Override Exists
Sub Level Mode 1
Power-Up Start Delay sec
Sub Level Mode 2
Outdoor Air Temperature °F (°C)
Sub Level Mode 3
Cooling Low Ambient Lockout
Sub Level Mode 4

106 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Controls Interface

Table 83. Status view tab - detail (continued) Table 83. Status view tab - detail (continued)

Tab Control Point Name Units Tab Control Point Name Units
Cooling Low Ambient Lockout Temperature °F (°C) Hot Water Setpoint SoftLoad Target °F (°C)
Chiller Mode at Time of Last Diagnostic °F (°C) Need to Run Cooling
Chiller Sub Mode 1 at Time of Last Diagnostic Need to Run Heating
Chiller Sub Mode 2 at Time of Last Diagnostic Chilled Water Reset Type
Chiller Sub Mode 3at Time of Last Diagnostic
Return Water Reset Ratio %
Chiller Sub Mode 4 at Time of Last Diagnostic
Return Water Start Reset °F (°C)
Chiller Sub Mode 5 at Time of Last Diagnostic
Return Water Maximum Reset °F (°C)
Chiller Sub Mode 6 at Time of Last Diagnostic
Outdoor Air Reset Ratio %
Front Panel Current Limit Setpoint %
Outdoor Air Start Reset °F (°C)
Active Current Limit Setpoint %
Outdoor Air Maximum Reset °F (°C)
Active Current Limit Setpoint Source
Current Limit SoftLoad Target % Desired Degrees of Reset °F (°C)

Average Percent RLA % RLA Actual Degrees of Chilled Water Reset °F (°C)

Low Evaporator Leaving Water Circulating Pump

Temperature Cutout °F (°C) Evaporator Water Flow Switch Status
Evaporator Entering Water Temperature °F (°C) Evaporator Pump Off Delay mins:secs
Evaporator Leaving Water Temperature °F (°C) External Auto Stop
Front Panel Cool/Heat Command
Emergency Stop
Staging Sequence
Head Relief Relay Filter Time sec
Cooling Design Delta Temperature
External Chilled Water Setpoint °F (°C)
(Waterside) °F (°C)
Ext Hot Water Setpoint
Heating Design Delta Temperature
(Waterside) °F (°C) External Chilled/Hot Water Setpoint Enable
Differential to Start °F (°C) External Current Limit Setpoint
Differential to Stop °F (°C) External Current Limit Setpoint Enable
Start to Start Delay Time Maximum Capacity Relay Filter Time sec
Capacity Control Debug State Limit Relay filter Time sec
Active Hot Water Command External Hot Water Command
Capacity Control Source High Evaporator Water Temperature Cutout °F (°C)
Manual Staging/Stepping Control
Condenser Entering Water Temperature °F (°C)
Command
Condenser Leaving Water Temperature °F (°C)
Manual Capacity Modulation Control
Command % Condenser Pump Off Delay minutes

Variable Evaporator Water Flow Compensation Condenser Water Flow Switch Status

Variable Flow Filtered Result Front Panel ice Building Command

Current Limit Control Softload Time sec Front Panel Ice Termination Setpoint °F (°C)

Current Limit Softload Start Point % Ice Building Feature

Front Panel Chilled Water Setpoint °F (°C) Active Ice Building Command

Front Panel Hot Water Setpoint °F (°C) Active Ice Termination Setpoint °F (°C)

Capacity Control Softload Time sec Active Ice Termination Setpoint Source

Arbitrated Chilled Water Setpoint °F (°C) Ice Building Current Limit Setpoint %

Active Chilled Water Setpoint Source External Ice Building Input

Active Chilled Water Setpoint °F (°C) Need to run ice

Chilled Water Setpoint SoftLoad Target °F (°C) Condenser Elevation

Arbitrated Hot Water Setpoint °F (°C) Starter Energy Consumption Last Reset

Active Hot Water Setpoint Source Chiller Power Demand kW

Active Hot Water Setpoint °F (°C) Chiller Power Demand Time Period minutes

RLC-SVX09L-EN 107
Controls Interface

Table 83. Status view tab - detail (continued) Table 83. Status view tab - detail (continued)

Tab Control Point Name Units Tab Control Point Name Units
Under/Over Voltage Protection Enable Compressor 1A Starts

CWRV Output Voltage at Desired Maximum Flow volts Compressor 1A Running Time

CWRV 'Off State' Output Command volts Compressor Running Indicator hrs:mins

CWRV Desired Minimum Flow % Compressor 1A Load Step

CWRV Actuator Stroke Time sec Compressor Refrigerant Discharge Temperature °F (°C)

CWRV Damping Coefficient Compressor 1A Oil Pressure psi gauge

CWRV Head Pressure control Output % Compressor 1A Line 1 Current % RLA

CWRV Time Till Actuator at Position mins:secs Compressor 1A Line 2 Current % RLA

CWRV Time to Safe Start of Cond Wtr Pump mins:secs Compressor 1A Line 3 Current % RLA

CWRV Percent Status % Line 1 Current Amps amps

Circuit 1 Line 2 Current Amps amps
EXV Position Steps steps Line 3 Current Amps amps
EXV Percent Open % Starter 1A Voltage Vab volts
Front Panel Circuit Lockout Compressor 1A Average Line Current % RLA
Evaporator Refrigerant Liquid Level in (mm) Maximum Line Current %
Mode Compressor 1A Power Consumption kW
Sub Level Mode 1 Compressor 1A Power Factor
Sub Level Mode 2 Circuit 2
Sub Level Mode 3 EXV Command (%) %

Sub Level Mode 4 EXV Position Steps steps

Sub Level Mode 5 EXV Percent Open %

Sub Level Mode 6 Front Panel Circuit Lockout

Condenser Refrigerant Pressure psi gauge Evaporator Refrigerant Liquid Level in

Condenser Saturated Refrigerant Temperature °F (°C) Mode

Evaporator Refrigerant Pressure psi gauge Sub Level Mode 1

Evaporator Saturated Refrigerant Temperature °F (°C) Sub Level Mode 2

Circuit Running Powered Indicator Sub Level Mode 3

Circuit Manual Reset Indicator (CMR) Sub Level Mode 4

Circuit Auto Reset Indicator (CAR) Sub Level Mode 5

Circuit Informational Warning Indicator (IFW) Sub Level Mode 6

Circuit Limit Min Command Condenser Refrigerant Pressure psi gauge

Differential Refrigerant Pressure psid Condenser Saturated Refrigerant Temperature °F (°C)

Compressor 1A Service Pumpdown Status Evaporator Refrigerant Pressure psi gauge

Evaporator Approach Temperature °F (°C) Evaporator Saturated Refrigerant Temperature °F (°C)

Condenser Approach Temperature °F (°C) Circuit Running Powered Indicator

Compressor Refrigerant Discharge Superheat °F (°C) Circuit Manual Reset Indicator (CMR)

Top Level Mode at Last Diagnostic Circuit Auto Reset Indicator (CAR)

Submode 1 at Last Diagnostic Circuit Informational Warning Indicator (IFW)

Submode 2 at Last Diagnostic Circuit Limit Min Command

Submode 3 at Last Diagnostic Differential Refrigerant Pressure psid

Submode 4 at Last Diagnostic Compressor 1A Service Pumpdown Status

Submode 5 at Last Diagnostic Evaporator Approach Temperature °F (°C)

Condenser Approach Temperature °F (°C)
Submode 6 at Last Diagnostic
Compressor Refrigerant Discharge Superheat °F (°C)
Compressor Lockout
Top Level Mode at Last Diagnostic

108 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Controls Interface

Table 83. Status view tab - detail (continued) Table 83. Status view tab - detail (continued)

Tab Control Point Name Units Tab Control Point Name Units
Submode 1 at Last Diagnostic Compressor 2A Power Factor
Submode 2 at Last Diagnostic Manual Overrides
Submode 3 at Last Diagnostic Manual Staging/Stepping Control
Submode 4 at Last Diagnostic Manual Capacity Modulation Control
Submode 5 at Last Diagnostic Evaporator Water Pump Override
Submode 6at Last Diagnostic Condenser Water Pump Override
Compressor Lockout Compressor 1A service Pumpdown Status
Compressor 2A Starts Compressor 1A Pumpdown Command
Compressor 2A Running Time hrs:mins
Compressor Running Indicator
Diagnostics View
Compressor 2A Load Step This window lists the active and inactive (history)
Compressor Refrigerant Discharge Temperature °F (°C) diagnostics. There can be up to 60 diagnostics, both active
and historic. For example, if there were 5 active
Compressor 2A Oil Pressure psi gauge
diagnostics, the possible number of historic diagnostics
Compressor 2A Line 1 Current % RLA
would be 55. You can also reset active diagnostics here,
Compressor 2A Line 2 Current % RLA (i.e., transfer active diagnostics to history and allow the
Compressor 2A Line 3 Current % RLA chiller to regenerate any active diagnostics).
Line 1 Current Amps amps Resetting the active diagnostics may cause the chiller to
Line 2 Current Amps amps resume operation.
Line 3 Current Amps amps The Active and History diagnostics have separate tabs. A
Compressor 2A Average Line Current % RLA button to reset the active diagnostics displays when either
Maximum Line Current % tab is selected.

Figure 52. Diagnostic view

RLC-SVX09L-EN 109
Controls Interface

Configuration View
This view is under the CH530 tab. It displays the active
configuration and allows you to make changes to the unit
configuration.
Figure 53. Configuration view - CH530 tab

Configuration View allows you to define the chiller's Table 84. Configuration view items - detail (continued)
components, ratings, and configuration settings. These
Tab Item Description
are all values that determine the required installed
devices, and how the chiller application is run in the main 90
processor. For example, a user may set an option to be 100
installed with Configuration View, which will require 110
devices to be bound using Binding View. And when the 120
main processor runs the chiller application, the
130
appropriate steps are taken to monitor required inputs and
control necessary outputs. 140
150
Any changes made in the Configuration View, on any of the
tabs, will modify the chiller configuration when you click 160
on the Load Configuration button (located at the base of 170
the window). The Load Configuration button uploads the 180
new configuration settings into the main processor. 190
Selecting the Undo All button will undo any configuration 200
setting changes made during the present TechView 220
connection and since the last time the Load Configuration
250
button was selected.
Unit Type (UNTY) Standard
Table 84. Configuration view items - detail High

Tab Item Description Premium

Standard Condenser Leaving
Model Unit Application (UAAP)
Water Temperature
Model Type (MODL) RTWD
High Temperature
RTUD Condenser Leaving Water
Temperature
RTWD/CH530 Configuration
1 Water-Water Heat Pump
Control Sequence
CH530 Standard Ambient (Air-
Cooled Condenser)
Chiller Design Sequence
Factory Assigned High Ambient (Air-Cooled
(DSEQ)
Condenser)
Nominal Tons (NTON) 60
No Fan Controls (Water
70 Cooled)
80

110 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Controls Interface

Table 84. Configuration view items - detail (continued) Table 84. Configuration view items - detail (continued)

Tab Item Description Tab Item Description

Fan Control by Others 100 Amps
Integral Fan Controls 150 Amps
Evaporator Type (EVLT) Standard 200 Amps
Process 275 Amps
Ice 400 Amps
High Pressure Cutout 500 Amps
Reference (gauge)
700 Amps
Unit Line Voltage 200V
1000 Amps
230V
Starter Type (SRTY) Wye-Delta Closed Transition
380V
Across the Line
400V
Contactor Integrity Test Enable
460V
Disable
575V
Compressor 1A Frame Size K1
Line Frequency (HRTZ) 50Hz
K2
60Hz
L1
Manufacturing Location
Curitiba, Brazil L2
(DCLT)
M1
Pueblo, USA
M2
Charmes, France
N1
Taicang, China
N2
Line Voltage Sensing
Not Installed
(WUVO) Compressor 2A Frame Size K1
Installed K2
Power Meter (PWRM) Not Installed L1
Installed L2
Water Flow Proving -Factory 115 Vac Paddle Type Flow M1
Installed (FLOW) Switch
M2
Factory Installed Low
N1
Voltage Thermal Type Flow
Switch N2
Starter Phase Reversal Protection Enable
Compressor 1A Rated Load Disable
Range = 1 - 999
Amps
Current Unbalance Trip Point 15 to 90
Compressor 2A Rated Load
Range = 1 - 999 Current Unbalance Grace
Amps 30 to 255
Point
Compressor 1A Current
37.5 Amps Starter Panel Forced
Transformer Meter Scale Not Installed
Ventilation (SPFV)
50 Amps
Installed
75 Amps
Options
100 Amps
Outdoor Air Temperature
150 Amps Not Installed
(OATS)
200 Amps Installed
275 Amps Ice Building Option (ICEB) Not Installed
400 Amps Installed
500 Amps Installed With Hardware
700 Amps Installed Without Hardware
1000 Amps ECWS/EHWS and External
Current Limit Setpoint 4-20mA, 2-10Vdc
Compressor 2A Current
37.5 Amps (SETP)
Transformer Meter Scale
Not Installed
50 Amps
Motor Current Analog Output
75 Amps Not Installed
(CAOA)

RLC-SVX09L-EN 111
Controls Interface

Table 84. Configuration view items - detail (continued) Table 84. Configuration view items - detail (continued)

Tab Item Description Tab Item Description

Installed Max Capacity
Programmable Status Relays Compressor Running
Not Installed
(STAT)
Alarm
Installed
Latching Alarm
Generic Monitoring Package None
Non-Latching Alarm
Installed
Alarm Circuit 1
Refrigerant Pressure Output
Not Installed Alarm Circuit 2
Type (RPOT)
Circuit 1 Running
Installed
Circuit 2 Running
Condenser Pressure in
%HPC Head Pressure Relief
Request
Differential Pressure
Warning
Condenser Water Regulating
Valve Output Programmable Status Relay
None
3 (J2-4,5,6)
Condenser Leaving Hot
None
Water Temp Control (HWTC) Chiller Limit Mode
Hot Water Temperature Max Capacity
Control
Compressor Running
BAS Communication/Local
Alarm
Time of Day Schedule Not Installed
(COMM) Latching Alarm
Lontalk® Non-Latching Alarm
Local Time of Day Scheduling Alarm Circuit 1
BACnet® Interface Alarm Circuit 2
Options Set Up Circuit 1 Running
ECWS Minimum Circuit 2 Running
-12.22 to 9.9°C
Temperature
Head Pressure Relief
ECWS Maximum Request
10 to 18.4°C
Temperature
Warning
EHWS Minimum
20 - 60°C Programmable Status Relay
Temperature None
4 (J2-1,2,3)
EHWS Maximum
20 - 60°C Chiller Limit Mode
Temperature
ECLS Minimum %RLA 60 Max Capacity

ECLS Maximum %RLA 120 Compressor Running

Programmable Status Relay Alarm

None
1 (J2-10,11,12) Latching Alarm
Chiller Limit Mode Non-Latching Alarm
Max Capacity Alarm Circuit 1
Compressor Running Alarm Circuit 2
Alarm Circuit 1 Running
Latching Alarm Circuit 2 Running
Non-Latching Alarm Head Pressure Relief
Alarm Circuit 1 Request

Alarm Circuit 2 Warning

Low Ambient Fan Control
Circuit 1 Running None
Type
Circuit 2 Running
Variable Speed Fan with
Head Pressure Relief Analog Interface
Request
Two Speed Fan
Warning
Fan Deck Arrangement
Programmable Status Relay
None Fan Deck Arrangement
2 (J2-7,8,9) 1 Fan (1H00)
Circuit 1 (FDA1)
Chiller Limit Mode
2 Fans (1H10)

112 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Controls Interface

Table 84. Configuration view items - detail (continued) Table 84. Configuration view items - detail (continued)

Tab Item Description Tab Item Description

3 Fans (1H11) 6 Fans-type 2 (1212)
3 Fans-type 2 (1H20) 7 Fans-type 2 (1123)
4 Fans (1H12) 8 Fans-type 2 (1124)
5 Fans (1H13) Generic Monitoring
5 Fans-type 2 (1112) Monitoring Temperature
0-8
Sensors
6 Fans (2H22)
Monitoring Pressure
6 Fans-type 2 (1212) 0-8
Transducers
7 Fans-type 2 (1123)
Monitoring Dual Current
0-4
8 Fans-type 2 (1124) Loop Input Modules
Fan Deck Arrangement Monitoring Dual Low Voltage
1 Fan (1H00) 0-4
Circuit 1 (FDA2) Binary Input Modules
2 Fans (1H10) Monitoring Dual High Voltage
0-4
Binary Input Modules
3 Fans (1H11)
3 Fans-type 2 (1H20) A couple of additional tabs in Configuration View allow
4 Fans (1H12) you to change other unit configuration options using the
5 Fans (1H13) Options tab and the Options Setup Tab. The features that
5 Fans-type 2 (1112) are installed on the Options Tab will control what is
displayed on the Options Setup Tab.
6 Fans (2H22)

Figure 54. Configuration view - options tab

RLC-SVX09L-EN 113
Controls Interface

Software View You can also add up to two available languages. Loading
an alternate language file allows the DynaView™ to
Software view allows you to verify the version of chiller
display its text in the selected alternate language. English
software currently running on the DynaView™ and
will always be available.
download a new version of chiller software.
Figure 55. Software view

Binding View and categories. Binding View allows you to add, remove,
modify, verify, and reassign devices and options in order
Binding View allows you to assess the status of the
to match the configuration requirements.Whenever a
network and all the devices connected as a whole, or the
device is installed, it must be correctly configured to
status of individual devices by using status icons and
communicate and to function as intended. This process is
function buttons.
called binding. Some features of Binding View are
Binding View is essentially a table depicting what devices intended to serve a second purpose; that is diagnosing
and options are actually discovered on the network bus problems with communication among the devices
(and their communication status) versus what is required .
to support the configuration defined by the feature codes
Figure 56. Binding view

Replacing or Adding Devices discover that it has been removed. An unbound device
stops communicating and allows a new device to be
If a device is communicating but incorrectly configured, it
bound in its place.
might not be necessary to replace it. If the problem with
the device is related to communication, attempt to rebind It is good practice to turn the power off while detaching
it, and if the device becomes correctly configured, it will and attaching devices to the CH530 network. Be sure to
then communicate properly. keep power on the service tool computer. After power is
restored to the CH530 network, the reconnect function in
If a device that needs to be replaced is still communicating,
Binding View restores communication with the network. If
it should be unbound. Otherwise, it will be necessary to
the service tool computer is turned off, you must restart
rebuild the CH530 network image for Binding View to
TechView and Binding View.

114 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Controls Interface

If a device is not communicating, the binding function Fan Configurations

displays a window to request manual selection of the
device to be bound. Previously-selected devices are The configurations discussed below are accessible using
deselected when the function starts. When manual TechView Service Tool – View - Configurations, and only
selection is confirmed, exactly one device must be applicable for Unit Type (MODL) configuration = RTUD.
selected; if it is the correct type, it is bound. If the desired Conversely, the following configuration items are not
device cannot be selected or if multiple devices are visible if Unit Type (MODL) is set to = RTWD.
accidentally selected, you can close the manual selection
window by clicking on No and repeat the bind function.
Figure 57. Fan configurations - RTUD

A/C Fan Controls

This configuration item is used to define the RTUD fan
control type including alternate operation as a water
cooled instead of an air cooled condenser.
Figure 58. A/C fan controls - RTUD

No Fan Controls (Water Cooled) Fan Control By Others

If this setting is set to “No Fan Controls (Water Cooled)”, the If this setting is set to “Fan Control By Others”, the first two
unit shall be controlled exactly the same as an RTWD unit, relays on the “Fan Control Interlock” quad relay output
that is, that the control logic and sequences will assume board relays will function as interlock contacts for use as
that there is a water cooled condenser and condenser in input to an external pressure or temperature based fan
water pump control, condenser water flow proving, and controller on a per circuit basis. Concurrent with the
circuits start delay times associated with condenser water circuit’s EXV pre-position as part of the start sequence of
pump pre-run times shall be employed. The DynaView™ a given circuit, the respective “fan control interlock” relay
(and TechView™) shall display the condenser water for that circuit will energize and close the NO contacts.
temperatures and condenser approach temperatures as The respective relay shall be de-energized to return to its
defined (although generally a RTUD unit will not ship with normal state, once the circuit/compressor has stopped.
condenser water temperature sensors installed and Note that this means the relay shall stay energized until the
bound) – for proper unit operation as a remote water compressor state is proven to be off.
cooled condenser, the condenser water temperature LLIDs
will have to be field installed and bound.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 115
Controls Interface

Integral Fan Controls (variable speed fan outputs and monitor VFD fault inputs)
to control the differential pressure per the chiller’s
If this setting is set to “Integral Fan Controls,” the fan
requirements.
controls are integral to the CH530 main processor and
(depending on the selection for the other fan control Low Ambient Fan Control Type
configurations - i.e. Fan Deck Arrangement Circuit 1
(FDA1), Fan Deck Arrangement Circuit 2 (FDA2), Low Note: Present if A/C Fan Control (ACFC) = Integral Fan
Ambient Fan Control Type (LAFC)) shall control the Control (INT)
appropriate relays (and connected fans) and other outputs
Figure 59. Low ambient fan control type

If this setting is set to “None”, fan control shall be per the command interface, and reverts to a special fixed-speed
full speed fixed speed fan tables with each circuit applying fan control mode.
the Fan Deck Arrangement configuration selected below. In normal operation (no inverter diagnostics), the inverter
If this setting is “Two Speed Fan” (TSPD), fan control shall is not commanded to zero-speed unless all other fans are
provide for the first fan to be a two speed fan and control commanded off. During normal operation, a minimum
and the first two relays of the quad relay shall be used for inverter speed command is enforced to prevent counter-
low and high speed control of that fan. The Two–speed fan rotation of the inverter driven fan. Counter-rotation can
operation, assumes the use of fans and contactors reduce fan deck capacity and negatively affect reliability of
designed for Wye (low speed) and Delta (high speed) inverters and its fans.
motor connections and the ratio of the low to high speed
cfm is approximately 80%. For Two-Speed fan Variable Speed Analog Fans
configurations, low to high and high to low speed Each independently controlled variable speed fan has
transitions are subject to a 5 second delay with neither the three I/O points:
low speed nor the high speed contacts being energized.
• A fan deck relay controls the inverter run/stop
The low speed contact generally refers to relay 1 and the
command state. (Inverter power is continuously
high speed contact generally refers to relay 2.
applied and not controlled by a contactor.)
Note: When selecting two speed fan control for the low
• A 0-10 Volt analog output commands the variable
ambient option, only the Fan Deck Arrangements
frequency drive’s speed.
with an “H” in the 2nd position of the fan grouping
definition are supported. Output Voltage [V] = Desired VFD Speed [%] /10, with a
minimum Desired VFD Speed of 7% (0.7V).
If this setting is “Variable Speed Fan with Analog
Interface” VARA, the fan control shall operate fixed speed To send a reset command, 0% (0.0V) is sent.
fans as well as a single inverter driven fan, and the controls • A binary input senses inverter faults.
include the enabling and speed command signals to this
The Fan Inverter Fault LLID binary input expects to see and
variable speed inverter. The inverter shall have an analog
open-circuit (i.e open dry contact) on its respective input
interface and fault feedback and be similar to the Danfoss
terminals when the inverter is de-energized or when an
TR1 2800 series inverter.
inverter fault is present.
For variable speed fan decks, the first relay controls the
The Fan Inverter Fault LLID binary input expects to see a
variable frequency drive, through an enable/disable input
closed circuit (i.e. closed dry contact) when the inverter is
of the inverter. The Variable speed fan option supports an
energized and no faults are active.
inverter fault input to monitor the fault state of the inverter.
An inverter fault or other inverter-related diagnostic The inverter fault diagnostic is not activated until 5
causes the fan control to de-energize the inverter relay, seconds after the inverter Run/Stop command relay is
command a zero percent speed via the analog speed energized.
116 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Controls Interface

Fan Deck Arrangement Circuit 1

Note: Present if A/C Fan Control (ACFC) = Integral Fan
Control (INT)
Figure 60. Fan deck arrangement

This setting defines the wiring of the four fan relays comfort cooling application. Lets assume the condenser
outputs of the Fan Control Relay LLID for the respective has 5 fixed speed fans per circuit, and no variable speed
circuit (circuit 2 setting is shown above). It indicates the fan fans or two speed fans, since operation below 32F outdoor
grouping in terms of how many fans each particular relay air ambient temperature is not required.
is expected to control. The numbers in parentheses refer The RTUD chiller should come factory configured as an
to the number of fans controlled by each of the 4 relays in RTUD chiller, but the fan configurations will generally need
order (lowest terminal number designators first). “H” to be set in the field per the condenser selected and
means reserved for high speed of 2 speed fan, if applicable installed with the chiller. Using TechView™ PC based
- if no two-speed fan selected in LAFC, then “H” implies no service tool running on a laptop PC or similar, power up
fans wired to this relay. the controls on the chiller and connect to the PC using an
RS232 cable (connection on the bottom of the CH530
Fan Deck Arrangement Circuit 2
Adaptive Control).
Note: Present if A/C Fan Control (ACFC) = Integral
A/C Fan Controls (ACFC)
This setting is the same as above, except for circuit 2. Each
circuit may have different fan arrangements, but both Launch TechView™ and press the “Local Connection”
must use an identical type of low ambient fan control if button in the bottom left hand corner. When the
applicable. connection is completed – proceed to the configurations
view.
Example for Fan Configurations
An air cooled condensing unit is selected that properly
matches the capacity of the RTUD unit intended for a
Figure 61. Service tool - view configuration

RLC-SVX09L-EN 117
Controls Interface

Select tab “CH530” and the “A/C Fan Controls” item from
the list, then select “Integral Fan Controls”.
Figure 62. Service tool configuration - integral fan control selection

Then proceed to the Tab “Options Setup” and the item Low supported fan deck arrangements. In the drop down we
Ambient Control Type in that list; select “None” for that can see that there are two unique arrangements that
item. Then proceed to the Fan Deck Arrangement Tab and support 5 fans total. The first one is designated as “1H13”
click on the Fan Deck Arrangement Circuit 1 item. By and the 2nd is “1112”.
clicking In the drop down box, you will see a number of
Figure 63. Service tool configuration - fan deck arrangement

The character in the 4 digit descriptor define the number of control one fan, and the last relay should control 2 fans
fans that are intended to be wired to each of the 4 relays on (1X11 terminals 7 & 8)
the respective circuit’s quad fan control relay LLID. The Repeat the same selection for circuit 2 by click on the Fan
first of the two possible 5 fan arrangements uses sequence Deck Arrangement Circuit 2 item. In the drop down box,
1 H 1 3. This sequence implies there should be 1 fan wired you will see a number of supported fan deck
to relay 1 (terminals J2-1,3 of module 1A25 – Circuit 1 Fan arrangements. Select the appropriate fan deck
Control module, which are internally wired to the 1X11 arrangement for circuit 2. The selection of the
terminals 1 & 2). Then next digit in the sequence H, is only arrangement would then define the wiring for module
for use with the High speed of a 2 speed fan configuration 1A26 – Circuit 2 Fan Control Module and it associated field
and since “none” was selected for low ambient options, wiring terminals 1X11 terminals 9 &10, 11 & 12, 13 &14, and
this means it is not to be used and nothing should be wired 15 & 16).
to the 2nd relay (terminals J2-4,6 1X11 terminals 3 & 4).
Likewise, the 3rd and 4th digits imply the number of fans Note: The fan deck arrangement does not necessarily
that are to be wired to the 3rd and 4th relays, (the relays have to be the same as Circuit 1, but usually the
being internally wired to the terminal strip 1X11 terminals circuits have the same number of fans and
5 & 6 and 7 & 8 respectively.) therefore the same arrangement selection is
appropriate.
The second alternative wiring for a fixed speed 5 fan deck
is the 1112 selection. In this scheme, the first 3 relays As a last important step, the configurations need to be
(terminals 1X11 1&2, 3&4, 5&6), should all be wired to downloaded to the CH530 DynaView™/Main Processor.
This is accomplished by clicking on the “Load

118 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Controls Interface

Configurations” button at the bottom of the configurations

screen.
Figure 64. Load configurations

Allow a short time for the configuration to be set and both

the CH530 DynaView™ and TechView™ to reboot. If new
LLIDs and hardware binding for them is required as a
result of the configuration just downloaded, TechView will
immediately launch the “Binding View” that provides for
a list of the required LLIDs and their communication
status. Install and bind all new LLIDs as required. Most
often, however, the proper LLIDs will already be present
and bound if the options were appropriately ordered with
the chiller.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 119
Pre-Start
Upon completion of installation, complete the Model
RTWD or RTUD Installation Completion Check Sheet and
Request for Trane Service checklist in chapter “Log and
Check Sheets,” p. 157.
Important: Start-up must be performed by Trane or an
agent of Trane specifically authorized to
perform start-up and warranty of Trane
products. Contractor shall provide Trane (or
an agent of Trane specifically authorized to
perform start-up) with notice of the
scheduled start-up at least two weeks prior
to the scheduled start-up.

120 RLC-SVX09L-EN
Start-Up and Shutdown
Unit Start-up refrigerant charges are shown in the General Data
tables.
Important: A clear sight glass alone does not mean that
NOTICE: the system is properly charged. Also check
system subcooling, liquid level control and
Equipment Damage! unit operating pressures.
Failure to follow instructions could result in equipment
damage. If chiller is limited by any limiting conditions, contact local
Trane service organization for more information.
Ensure that the oil separator and compressor heaters
have been operating for a minimum of 24 hours before
starting.
Seasonal Unit Shutdown
1. Perform normal unit stop sequence using <Stop> key.
If the pre-start checkout, has been completed, the unit is
ready to start. Note: Do not open starter disconnect switch. It must
remain closed to provide power from control
1. Press the STOP key on the CH530.
power transformer to the oil heaters.
2. As necessary, adjust the setpoint values in the CH530
2. Verify chilled water and condenser water pumps are
menus using TechView™.
off. If desired, open disconnect switches to pumps.
3. Close the fused-disconnect switch for the chilled water
3. Drain condenser piping and cooling tower, if desired.
pump. Energize the pump(s) to start water circulation.
4. Remove drain and vent plugs from condenser headers
4. Check the service valves on the discharge line, suction
to drain the condenser.
line, oil line and liquid line for each circuit. These valves
must be open (backseated) before starting the 5. Verify that the oil heaters are working.
compressors. 6. Perform maintenance shown below.

NOTICE: Seasonal Unit Start-Up Procedure

Compressor Damage!
Catastrophic damage to the compressor will occur if the
oil line shut off valve or the isolation valves are left NOTICE:
closed on unit start-up. Equipment Damage!
5. Press the AUTO key. If the chiller control calls for Failure to follow instructions could result in equipment
damage.
cooling and all safety interlocks are closed, the unit will
start. The compressor(s) will load and unload in Ensure that the oil separator and compressor heaters
response to the leaving chilled water temperature. have been operating for a minimum of 24 hours before
starting.
6. Verify that the chilled water pump runs for at least one
minute after the chiller is commanded to stop (for
normal chilled water systems). NOTICE:
Note: Once the system has been operating for Compressor Damage!
approximately 30 minutes and has become Catastrophic damage to the compressor will occur if the
stabilized, complete the remaining start-up oil line shut off valve or the isolation valves are left
procedures, as follows: closed on unit start-up.
7. Check the evaporator refrigerant pressure and the
condenser refrigerant pressure under Refrigerant 1. Close all valves and re-install the drain plugs in the
Report on the CH530 TechView™. The pressures are evaporator and condenser heads.
referenced to sea level (14.6960 psia). 2. Service the auxiliary equipment according to the start-
8. Check the EXV sight glasses after sufficient time has up/maintenance instructions provided by the
elapsed to stabilize the chiller. The refrigerant flow past respective equipment manufacturers.
the sight glasses should be clear. Bubbles in the 3. Vent and fill the cooling tower, if used, as well as the
refrigerant indicate either low refrigerant charge or condenser and piping. At this point, all air must be
excessive pressure drop in the liquid line or a stuck removed from the system (including each pass). Close
open expansion valve. A restriction in the line can the vents in the evaporator chilled water circuits.
sometimes be identified by a noticeable temperature
4. Open all the valves in evaporator chilled water circuits.
differential between the two sides of the restriction.
Frost will often form on the line at this point. Proper

RLC-SVX09L-EN 121
Start-Up and Shutdown

5. If the evaporator was previously drained, vent and fill removed from the system (including each pass), install
the evaporator and chilled water circuit. When all air is the vent plugs in the evaporator water boxes.
6. Verify condenser coils are clean.

Sequence of Operation
Power Up
The Power up chart shows the respective DynaView 'Stopped' Software state independent of the last mode. If
screens during a power up of the main processor. This the last mode before power down was 'Auto', the
process takes from 30 to 50 seconds depending on the transition from 'Stopped' to 'Starting' occurs, but it is not
number of installed Options. On all power ups, the apparent to the user.
software model will always transition through the
Figure 65. Power up

Power Up to Starting
The Power up to starting diagram shows the timing from
a power up event to energizing the compressor. The NOTICE:
shortest allowable time would be under the following
conditions: Compressor Damage!
1. No motor restart inhibit If both suction and discharge pressures are low but sub-
cooling is normal, a problem other than refrigerant
2. Evaporator Water flowing shortage exists. Do not add refrigerant, as this may
3. Condenser Water flowing (RTWD only) result in overcharging the circuit.

4. Power up Start Delay setpoint set to 0 minutes Use only refrigerants specified on the unit nameplate
(HFC 134a) and Trane OIL00048. Failure to do so may
5. Adjustable Stop to Start Timer set to 5 seconds cause compressor damage and improper unit
6. Need to cool operation.
The above conditions would allow for a minimum power
up to starting compressor time of 95 seconds. NOTICE:
Equipment Damage!
Failure to follow instructions could result in equipment
damage.
Ensure that the oil separator and compressor heaters
have been operating for a minimum of 24 hours before
starting.

122 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Start-Up and Shutdown

Figure 66. RTWD power up to starting

RLC-SVX09L-EN 123
Start-Up and Shutdown

Stopped to Starting
The stopped to starting diagram shows the timing from a 3. Power up Start Delay Timer has expired
stopped mode to energizing the compressor. The shortest 4. Adjustable Stop to Start Timer has expired
allowable time would be under the following conditions:
5. Need to cool
1. No motor restart inhibit
The above conditions would allow the compressor to start
2. Evaporator and Condenser Water flowing in 60 seconds.

Figure 67. RTWD stopped to starting

124 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Start-Up and Shutdown

Figure 68. RTUD power up to starting

RLC-SVX09L-EN 125
Start-Up and Shutdown

Figure 69. RTUD stopped to starting

126 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Start-Up and Shutdown

Normal Shutdown to Stopped

The Normal Shutdown diagram shows the Transition from Dashed lines on the top attempt to show the final mode if
Running through a Normal (friendly) Shutdown. The you enter the stop via various inputs.

Figure 70. RTWD normal shutdown

RLC-SVX09L-EN 127
Start-Up and Shutdown

Figure 71. RTUD normal shutdown

128 RLC-SVX09L-EN
Maintenance
Overview Monthly Maintenance and Checks
This section describes preventative maintenance • Review operator log.
procedures and intervals. Use a periodic maintenance • Clean all water strainers in both the chilled and
program to ensure optimal performance and efficiency of condensing water piping systems.
the Series R units.
• Measure and log the subcooling and superheat.
An important aspect of the chiller maintenance program is
• See “Refrigerant and Oil Charge Management,” p. 130.
the regular completion of operator logs. See “Log and
If chiller measurements vary significantly from values
Check Sheets,” p. 157 for an example. When filled out
listed in Table 85 and Table 86, problems may exist
properly the completed logs can be reviewed to identify
with refrigerant and oil charge levels. Contact local
any developing trends in the chiller's operating conditions.
Trane service.

Maintenance Annual Maintenance

Shut down the chiller once each year to check the
following:
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage! WARNING
Failure to disconnect power before servicing could
result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric
Hazardous Voltage!
power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Failure to disconnect power before servicing could
Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all electric
power can not be inadvertently energized. power, including remote disconnects before servicing.
Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the
power can not be inadvertently energized.
WARNING
• Perform all weekly and monthly maintenance
Live Electrical Components!
procedures.
Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when
exposed to live electrical components could result in • Have a qualified laboratory perform an oil analysis to
death or serious injury. When necessary to work with determine system moisture content and acid level.
live electrical components, have a qualified licensed Note: Due to the hygroscopic properties of the POE oil, all
electrician or other individual who has been properly oil must be stored in metal containers. The oil will
trained in handling live electrical components perform
absorb water if stored in a plastic container.
these tasks.
• Contact Trane service organization to leak check the
Weekly Maintenance and Checks chiller, to inspect safety controls, and inspect electrical
components for deficiencies.
After the unit has operated for approximately 30 minutes
and the system has stabilized, check the operating • Inspect all piping components for leakage and/or
conditions and complete the procedures below: damage. Clean out any inline strainers.

• Log the chiller. • Clean and repaint any areas that show signs of
corrosion.
• Check evaporator and condenser pressures with
gauges and compare to the reading on the CH530. • Inspect vent piping of all relief valves for presence of
Pressure readings should fall within the specified refrigerant to detect improperly sealed relief valves.
ranges listed in Table 85 and Table 86. If chiller Contact Trane service if unusual conditions are
measurements vary significantly from values listed, observed.
problems may exist with refrigerant and oil charge • Inspect the condenser tubes for fouling. Clean if
levels. Contact local Trane service. necessary. See “Cleaning the Condenser (RTWD
Note: For RTWD units, optimum condenser pressure is Only),” p. 130.
dependent on condenser water temperature, and • Check to make sure that the crank case heater is
should equal the saturation pressure of the working.
refrigerant at a temperature 2 to 5F above that of
leaving condenser water at full load.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 129
Maintenance

Scheduling Other Maintenance Heat Exchanger Service

• Use a nondestructive tube test to inspect the
condenser and evaporator tubes at 3-year intervals. Cleaning the Condenser (RTWD Only)
Note: It may be desirable to perform tube tests on these
components at more frequent intervals, depending NOTICE:
upon chiller application. This is especially true of
critical process equipment.
Proper Water Treatment!
The use of untreated or improperly treated water could
• Depending on chiller duty, contact a qualified service result in scaling, erosion, corrosion, algae or slime. It is
organization to determine when to conduct a complete recommended that the services of a qualified water
examination of the unit to determine the condition of treatment specialist be engaged to determine what
the compressor and internal components. water treatment, if any, is required. Trane assumes no
responsibility for equipment failures which result from
Refrigerant and Oil Charge untreated or improperly treated water, or saline or
brackish water.
Management
Condenser tube fouling is suspect when the “approach”
Proper oil and refrigerant charge is essential for proper temperature (i.e., the difference between the refrigerant
unit operation, unit performance, and environmental condensing temperature and the leaving condenser water
protection. Only trained and licensed service personnel temperature) is higher than predicted.
should service the chiller. Standard water applications will operate with less than a
Table 85and Table 86 list baseline measurements for units 10oF approach. If the approach exceeds 10oF cleaning the
running at AHRI standard operating conditions. If chiller condenser tubes is recommended.
measurements vary significantly from values listed below, Note: Glycol in the water system may as much as double
problems may exist with refrigerant and oil charge levels. the standard approach.
Contact Trane service.
If the annual condenser tube inspection indicates that the
Note: AHRI conditions are: condenser water: 85°F and 3 tubes are fouled, two cleaning methods can be used to rid
GPM per ton and evaporator water: 54-44°F. the tubes of contaminants.
Table 85. RTWD operating conditions at full load(a) • Mechanical tube cleaning method is used to remove
sludge and loose material from smooth-bore
Description Condition
condenser tubes. See “Mechanical Cleaning
Evaporator pressure 30-45 psig Procedure,” p. 131.
Condensing pressure 75-125 psig
• Chemical cleaning procedures are used to remove
Discharge superheat 10-15°F scale deposits. See “Chemical Cleaning Procedure,”
Subcooling 5-10°F p. 133
(a) All conditions stated above are based on the unit running fully loaded
at AHRI conditions. If full load conditions cannot be met, contact Trane
service.

Table 86. RTWD operating conditions at minimum

load(a)
Description Condition
Evaporator approach *less than 7°F (non-glycol applications)
Condensing approach *less than 7°F
Subcooling 2-3°F
EXV percent open 10-20% open
* 1.0oF for new unit.
(a) Conditions at minimum must be: entering condenser water: 85F and
entering evaporator water: 55F

Note: RTUD operating conditions are the physical

configuration of the installation.

130 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Maintenance

Mechanical Cleaning Procedure

Table 87. RTWD condenser waterbox weights

Lifting
Model Size Hz Effic Waterbox Weight - kg (lbs) Connection
80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140 60 STD Supply, Return
80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130 60 HIGH Supply, Return
RTWD 29 (64) M12x1.75
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 160 50 STD Supply, Return
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120 50 HIGH Supply, Return
150, 160, 180, 200, 220, 250 60 HIGH Supply
150, 160, 180, 200 60 PREM Supply
RTWD 38 (84) M12x1.75
130, 140, 160, 180, 200, 220, 250 50 HIGH Supply
160, 180, 200 50 PREM Supply
150, 160, 180, 200, 220, 250 60 HIGH Return
150, 160, 180, 200 60 PREM Return
RTWD 42 (93) M12x1.75
130, 140, 160, 180, 200, 220, 250 50 HIGH Return
160, 180, 200 50 PREM Return

Table 88. Waterbox removal procedure — method 1

WARNING
Condenser
Heavy Objects! Size Hz Effic Waterbox
Failure to properly lift waterbox/cover could result in Supply,
death or serious injury. Each of the individual cables 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140 60 STD
Return
(chains or slings) used to lift the waterbox/cover must
Supply,
be capable of supporting the entire weight of the 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130 60 HIGH
Return
waterbox/cover. The cables (chains or slings) must be
Supply,
rated for overhead lifting applications with an 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150 50 STD
Return
acceptable working load limit.
Supply,
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120 50 HIGH
Return
WARNING 150, 160, 180, 200, 220, 250 60 HIGH Supply

Heavy Objects! 150, 160, 180, 200 60 PREM Supply

Failure to properly lift waterbox could result in death or 130, 140, 160, 180, 200, 220, 250 50 HIGH Supply
serious injury. The proper use and ratings for eyebolts 160, 180, 200 50 PREM Supply
can be found in ANSI/ASME standard B18.15.
Maximum load rating for eyebolts are based on a 1. Select the proper lift connection device from Table 91.
straight vertical lift in a gradually increasing manner. The rated lifting capacity of the selected lift connection
Angular lifts will significantly lower maximum loads device must meet or exceed the published weight of
and should be avoided whenever possible. Loads the waterbox. See Table 87, p. 131 for waterbox
should always be applied to eyebolts in the plane of the
weights.
eye, not at some angle to this plane.
2. Ensure the lift connection device has the correct
Review mechanical room limitations and determine the connection for the waterbox. Example: thread type
safest method or methods of rigging and lifting the (course/fine, English/metric). Bolt diameter (English/
waterboxes. metric).
Units with Standard Condenser Waterboxes. 3. Properly connect the lift connection device to the
waterbox. See Figure 72. Ensure lift connection device
Select the proper waterbox removal procedure method as is securely fastened.
shown below.
Waterbox Removal Procedure - Method 1
This selection applies to the units and condenser side
waterboxes shown in Table 88.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 131
Maintenance

4. Remove the two bolts with drill point mark. Install the
Figure 72. Water box lifting long bolts into these two holes until threads are fully
Cables, Chains or Slings engaged, and hand tight. The long bolts are located on
the two thread holes just above the waterbox, as
shown in Figure 73.
Figure 73. Waterbox removal - remove bolts
long bolt

Connection Device
drill point m ark

Waterbox

Label

4. Install hoist ring on to the lifting connection on the 5. Remove the remaining bolts. Slide the waterbox out
waterbox. Torque to 28 ft-lbs (37 Nm). about 30 mm through two long bolts. Install the Safety
5. Disconnect water pipes, if connected. Hoist ring (D ring) connection device into the tap drill
hole located on waterbox right side (face to waterbox
6. Remove waterbox bolts. convex). See Figure 74.
7. Lift the waterbox away from the shell.
Figure 74. Waterbox removal -
Waterbox Removal Procedure – Method 2 slide out, install safety hoist ring
This selection applies to the units and condenser side
waterboxes shown in Table 89.

Table 89. Waterbox removal procedure — method 2

Condenser
Size Hz Effic Waterbox
150, 160, 180, 200, 220, 250 60 HIGH Return
150, 160, 180, 200 60 PREM Return
130, 140, 160, 180, 200, 220, 250 50 HIGH Return
160, 180, 200 50 PREM Return

6. Remove the left long bolt while supporting waterbox

CAUTION
from outside of waterbox. Swing the waterbox
Risk of Injury! outboard. Put lifting chain on Safety Hoist ring and
To prevent injury, do not place hands or fingers remove the remaining long bolt. See Figure 75.
between waterbox and condenser tubesheet.

1. Select the proper lift connection device from Table 91,

p. 133. The rated lifting capacity of the selected lift
connection device must meet or exceed the published
weight of the waterbox. See Table 87, p. 131 for
waterbox weights.
2. Ensure the lift connection device has the correct
connection for the waterbox.
Example: Thread type (course/fine, English/metric),
Bolt diameter (English/metric).
3. Disconnect water pipes, if connected.

132 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Maintenance

Parts Ordering Information.

Figure 75. Waterbox removal -
swing out, install lifting chain Table 91. Lifting hardware

Part
Unit Product Number
RTWD/RTUD Safety Hoist Ring RNG01886
All units M12x1.75

Obtain the required parts from local Trane Parts Center.

Chemical Cleaning Procedure

Scale deposits are best removed by chemical means.
Consult a qualified water treatment specialist (i.e., one that
knows the local water supply chemical/mineral content)
for a recommended cleaning solution suitable for the job.
(A standard condenser water circuit is composed solely of
7. Lift the waterbox away from the shell. copper, cast iron and steel.) Improper chemical cleaning
can damage tube walls.
WARNING All of the materials used in the external circulation system,
Overhead Hazard! the quantity of the solution, the duration of the cleaning
period, and any required safety precautions should be
Never stand below or in close proximately to heavy
approved by the company furnishing the materials or
objects while they are suspended from, or being lifted
by, a lifting device. Failure to follow these instructions performing the cleaning.
could result in death or serious injuries. Note: Chemical tube cleaning should always be followed
by mechanical tube cleaning.
Condenser Tube Cleaning - Mechanical
1. Store waterbox/cover in a safe and secure location and
position.
Important: Do not leave waterbox/cover
suspended from lifting device.
2. Work a round nylon or brass bristled brush (attached to
a rod) in and out of each of the condenser water tubes
to loosen the sludge.
3. Thoroughly flush the condenser water tubes with clean
water.
Note: To clean internally enhanced tubes, use a bi-
directional brush or consult a qualified service.
Reassembly. Once service is complete, the waterbox/
cover should be reinstalled following all previous
procedures in reverse.
• Use new o-rings or gaskets on all joints after
thoroughly cleaning each joint. Contact local Trane
parts center for information.
• Torque waterbox/cover bolts.
Note: Torque bolts in a star pattern. See Table 90 for
torque values.
Table 90. Torque values — ft-lbs (Nm)

Evaporator Condenser (RTWD only)

65 (88) 65 (88)

RLC-SVX09L-EN 133
Maintenance

Cleaning the Evaporator

Since the evaporator is typically part of a closed circuit, it same cleaning methods described for the condenser
does not accumulate appreciable amounts of scale or tubes.
sludge. However, if cleaning is deemed necessary, use the See Table 92, p. 134 for evaporator waterbox weights.

Table 92. RTWD/RTUD evaporator waterbox weights

Model Size Hz Effic Waterbox Weight - kg (lbs) Lifting Connection

80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140 60 STD Supply, Return
80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130 60 HIGH Supply, Return
RTWD
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150 50 STD Supply, Return 20.4 (45) M12x1.75
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120 50 HIGH Supply, Return
RTUD 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130 60 HIGH Supply, Return
150, 160, 180, 200, 220, 250 60 HIGH Supply
150, 160, 180, 200 60 PREM Supply
RTWD
130, 140, 160, 180, 200, 220, 250 50 HIGH Supply 33.6 (74) M12x1.75
160, 180, 200 50 PREM Supply
RTUD 150, 160, 180, 200, 220, 250 60 HIGH Supply
150, 160, 180, 200, 220, 250 60 HIGH Return
150, 160, 180, 200 60 PREM Return
RTWD
130, 140, 160, 180, 200, 220, 250 50 HIGH Return 29.9 (66) M12x1.75
160, 180, 200 50 PREM Return
RTUD 150, 160, 180, 200, 220, 250 60 HIGH Return

RTUD Air Cooled Condenser Applications Lubrication System

High Condenser Pressure Limit and
Compressor Oil
High Pressure Cutout Diagnostics
If a circuit experiences significant time in the High
Condenser Pressure Limit mode, or if it experiences High NOTICE:
Pressure Cutout trip diagnostics, the air cooled condenser Equipment Damage!
may be the root cause and should be inspected.
To prevent oil sump heater burnout, open the unit
The condenser coils should be checked for air flow main power disconnect switch before removing
restrictions and cleanliness, as well as the possibility of oil from the compressor.
recirculated air, in which the air entering the coil is
significantly higher temperature than the ambient outdoor Trane Polyolester Oil is the approved oil for the RTWD/
air temperature (5 ºF or more). RTUD units. Polyolester oil is extremely hygroscopic
All of the fans should also be validated to be operational meaning it readily attracts moisture. The oil can not be
with the proper fan blade rotation direction. Dirty, or stored in plastic containers due to the hygroscopic
fouled coils, or otherwise limited or restricted air flow properties. As with mineral oil, if water is in the system it
through the coils, can significantly degrade the efficiency will react with the oil to form acids. Use Table 93 to
of the chiller as well as result in unnecessary limits and determine the acceptability of the oil.
nuisance trips. See the condenser manufacturers’
Table 93. POE oil properties
maintenance and cleaning procedures.
Description Acceptable Levels
Moisture content less than 300 ppm
Acid Level less than 0.5 TAN (mg KOH/g)
Note: Mineral oil used in the RTHA and RTHB units has different acceptable
levels (< 50 ppm of moisture and < 0.05 mg KOH/g)

Note: Use an oil transfer pump to change the oil

regardless of chiller pressure.

134 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Maintenance

Oil Sump Level Check 5. The level should be between 4 inch and 9.5 inch from
the bottom of the oil sump.
Running the chiller at minimum load is the best for the
Note: If oil levels are not between 4 inch and 9.5 inch,
quickest return of oil to the separator and sump. The
contact Trane service.
machine still needs to sit for approximately 30 minutes
before the level is taken. At minimum load, the discharge 6. After the level is determined, close the service valves
superheat should be highest. The more heat in the oil as it and remove the hose/sightglass assembly.
lays in the sump, the more refrigerant will boil off in the
sump and leave more concentrated oil.
The oil level in the oil sump can be measured to give an
indication of the system oil charge. Follow the procedures
below to measure the level.
1. Run the unit fully unloaded for approximately 20
minutes.
2. Cycle the compressor off line.

NOTICE:
Equipment Damage!
Never operate the compressor with the sight glass
service valves opened. Severe oil loss will occur. Close
the valves after checking the oil level. The sump is
above the condenser and it is possible to drain the oil.

Figure 76. Determining oil level in the sump

Oil Separator
Service Valve

4-9.5”
Oil Sump
Service Valve

3. Attach a 3/8 inch or 1/2 inch hose with a sightglass in

the middle to the oil sump service valve (1/4 inch flare)
and the oil separator service valve (1/4 inch flare).
Note: Using high pressure rated clear hose with
appropriate fittings can help speed up the process.
4. After the unit is off line for 30 minutes, move the
sightglass along the side of the oil sump.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 135
Diagnostics
Diagnostic Name and Source: Name of Diagnostic and necessary, those modes or periods that it is specifically
its source. Note that this is the exact text used in the User “not active” in as an exception to the active modes. The
Interface and/or Service Tool displays. inactive modes are enclosed in brackets, []. Note that the
Affects Target: Defines the “target” or what is affected modes used in this column are internal and not generally
by the diagnostic. Usually either the entire Chiller, or a annunciated to any of the formal mode displays.
particular Circuit or Compressor is affected by the Criteria: Quantitatively defines the criteria used in
diagnostic (the same one as the source), but in special generating the diagnostic and, if nonlatching, the criteria
cases functions are modified or disabled by the diagnostic. for auto reset. If more explanation is necessary a hot link
None implies that there is no direct affect to the chiller, sub to the Functional Specification is used.
components or functional operation. Reset Level: Defines the lowest level of manual
Severity: Defines the severity of the above effect. diagnostic reset command which can clear the diagnostic.
Immediate means immediate shutdown of the affected The manual diagnostic reset levels in order of priority are:
portion, Normal means normal or friendly shutdown of Local or Remote. For example, a diagnostic that has a
the affected portion, Special Action means a special reset level of Remote, can be reset by either a remote
action or mode of operation (limp along) is invoked, but diagnostic reset command or by a local diagnostic reset
without shutdown, and Info means an Informational Note command.
or Warning is generated. Help Text: Provides for a brief description of what kind of
Persistence: Defines whether or not the diagnostic and problems might cause this diagnostic to occur. Both
its effects are to be manually reset (Latched), or can be control system component related problems as well as
either manually or automatically reset when and if the chiller application related problems are addressed (as can
condition returns to normal (Nonlatched). possibly be anticipated). These help messages will be
Active Modes [Inactive Modes]: States the modes or updated with accumulated field experience with the
periods of operation that the diagnostic is active in and, as chillers.

Starter Diagnostics
Table 94. Starter diagnostics

Diagnostic Name Affects Persist Active Modes Reset

and Source Target Severity ence [Inactive Modes] Criteria Level
The compressor did not come up to speed (fall to
Compressor Did Not <85%RLA) in the allotted time defined by the Maximum
Accelerate: Transition - *Circuit Info Latch Start Mode Acceleration Timer and a transition was forced (motor Remote
Compressor 1A put across the line) at that time. This applies to all
starter types.
The compressor did not come up to speed (fall to
Compressor Did Not <85%RLA) in the allotted time defined by the Maximum
Accelerate: Transition - *Circuit Info Latch Start Mode Acceleration Timer and a transition was forced (motor Remote
Compressor 2A put across the line) at that time. This applies to all
starter types.
Compressor current exceeded overload time vs. trip
Motor Current Overload
Circuit Immediate Latch Cprsr Energized characteristic. Must trip = 140% RLA, Must hold=125%, Local
- Compressor 1A
nominal trip 132.5% in 30 seconds
Compressor current exceeded overload time vs. trip
Motor Current Overload
Circuit Immediate Latch Cprsr Energized characteristic. Must trip = 140% RLA, Must hold=125%, Local
- Compressor 2A
nominal trip 132.5% in 30 seconds
Non Pre-Start and Any Nom. trip: 60 seconds at greater than 112.5%,  2.5%, Auto
Over Voltage Chiller Normal Remote
Latch Ckt(s) Energzd Reset at 110% or less for 10 cont secs.
a) No current was sensed on one or two of the current
transformer inputs while running or starting (See
Nonlatching Power Loss Diagnostic for all three phases
lost while running). Must hold = 20% RLA. Must trip =
5% RLA. Time to trip shall be longer than guaranteed
Phase Loss - Start Sequence and reset on Starter Module at a minimum, 3 seconds
*Circuit Immediate Latch Local
Compressor 1A Run modes maximum. Actual design trip point is 10%. The actual
design trip time is 2.64 seconds.
b) If Phase reversal protection is enabled and current is
not sensed on one or more current xformer inputs. Logic
will detect and trip in a maximum of 0.3 seconds from
compressor start.

136 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Diagnostics

Table 94. Starter diagnostics (continued)

Diagnostic Name Affects Persist Active Modes Reset

and Source Target Severity ence [Inactive Modes] Criteria Level
a) No current was sensed on one or two of the current
transformer inputs while running or starting (See
Nonlatching Power Loss Diagnostic for all three phases
lost while running). Must hold = 20% RLA. Must trip =
5% RLA. Time to trip shall be longer than guaranteed
Phase Loss - Start Sequence and reset on Starter Module at a minimum, 3 seconds
*Circuit Immediate Latch Local
Compressor 2A Run modes maximum. Actual design trip point is 10%. The actual
design trip time is 2.64 seconds.
b) If Phase reversal protection is enabled and current is
not sensed on one or more current xformer inputs. Logic
will detect and trip in a maximum of 0.3 second from
compressor start
Compressor A phase reversal was detected on the incoming current.
Phase Reversal - energized to On a compressor startup the phase reversal logic must
*Circuit Immediate Latch Local
Compressor 1A transition command detect and trip in a maximum of.3 second from
[All Other Times] compressor start.
Compressor A phase reversal was detected on the incoming current.
Phase Reversal - energized to On a compressor startup the phase reversal logic must
*Circuit Immediate Latch Local
Compressor 2A transition command detect and trip in a maximum of.3 second from
[All Other Times] compressor start.
The compressor had previously established currents
while running and then all three phases of current were
lost. Design: Less than 10% RLA, trip in 2.64 seconds.
This diagnostic will preclude the Phase Loss Diagnostic
and the Transition Complete Input Opened Diagnostic
All compressor from being called out. To prevent this diagnostic from
running modes occurring with the intended disconnect of main power,
Power Loss - Non
*Circuit Immediate [all compressor the minimum time to trip must be greater than the Remote
Compressor 1A Latch
starting and non- guaranteed reset time of the Starter module. Note: This
running modes] diagnostic prevents nuisance latching diagnostics due
to a momentary power loss. This diagnostic is not active
during the start mode before the transition complete
input is proven. Thus a random power loss during a start
would result in either a “Starter Fault Type 3” or a
“Starter Did Not Transition” latching diagnostic.
The compressor had previously established currents
while running and then all three phases of current were
All compressor lost. Design: Less than 10% RLA, trip in 2.64 seconds.
running modes This diagnostic will preclude the Phase Loss Diagnostic
Power Loss - Non
*Circuit Immediate [all compressor and the Transition Complete Input Opened Diagnostic Remote
Compressor 2A Latch
starting and non- from being called out. To prevent this diagnostic from
running modes] occurring with the intended disconnect of main power,
the minimum time to trip must be greater than the
guaranteed reset time of the Starter module.
Severe Current A 30% Current Imbalance has been detected on one
Imbalance - Circuit Immediate Latch All Running Modes phase relative to the average of all 3 phases for 90 Local
Compressor 1A continuous seconds.
Severe Current A 30% Current Imbalance has been detected on one
Imbalance - Circuit Immediate Latch All Running Modes phase relative to the average of all 3 phases for 90 Local
Compressor 2A continuous seconds
While in the Starter Dry Run Mode either 50% Line
Voltage was sensed at the Potential Transformers or
Starter 1A Dry Run Test *Circuit Immediate Latch Starter Dry Run Mode Local
10% RLA Current was sensed at the Current
Transformers.
While in the Starter Dry Run Mode either 50% Line
Voltage was sensed at the Potential Transformers or
Starter 2A Dry Run Test *Circuit Immediate Latch Starter Dry Run Mode Local
10% RLA Current was sensed at the Current
Transformers.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 137
Diagnostics

Table 94. Starter diagnostics (continued)

Diagnostic Name Affects Persist Active Modes Reset

and Source Target Severity ence [Inactive Modes] Criteria Level
Detected compressor currents greater than 10% RLA on
any or all phases when the compressor was commanded
off. Detection time shall be 5 second minimum and 10
seconds maximum. On detection and until the controller
Starter Contactor
Starter Contactor is manually reset: generate diagnostic, energize the
Special not Energized
Interrupt Failure - Chiller Latch appropriate alarm relay, continue to energize the Evap Local
Action [Starter Contactor
Compressor 1A Pump Output, continue to command the affected
Energized]
compressor off, fully unload the effected compressor
and command a normal stop to all other compressors.
For as long as current continues, perform liquid level, oil
return, and fan control on the circuit effected.
Detected compressor currents greater than 10% RLA on
any or all phases when the compressor was commanded
off. Detection time shall be 5 second minimum and 10
seconds maximum. On detection and until the controller
Starter Contactor
Starter Contactor is manually reset: generate diagnostic, energize the
Special not Energized
Interrupt Failure - Chiller Latch appropriate alarm relay, continue to energize the Evap Local
Action [Starter Contactor
Compressor 2A Pump Output, continue to command the affected
Energized]
compressor off, fully unload the effected compressor
and command a normal stop to all other compressors.
For as long as current continues, perform liquid level, oil
return, and fan control on the circuit effected.
The Starter Module did not receive a transition complete
signal in the designated time from its command to
Starter Did Not transition. The must hold time from the Starter Module
On the first check
Transition - Compressor *Circuit Immediate Latch transition command is 1 second. The Must trip time from Local
after transition.
1A the transition command is 6 seconds. Actual design is
2.5 seconds. This diagnostic is active only for Y-Delta,
Auto-Transformer, Primary Reactor, and X-Line Starters.
The Starter Module did not receive a transition complete
signal in the designated time from its command to
Starter Did Not transition. The must hold time from the Starter Module
On the first check
Transition - Compressor *Circuit Immediate Latch transition command is 1 second. The Must trip time from Local
after transition.
2A the transition command is 6 seconds. Actual design is
2.5 seconds. This diagnostic is active only for Y-Delta,
Auto-Transformer, Primary Reactor, and X-Line Starters.
This is a specific starter test where 1M(1K1) is closed
first and a check is made to ensure that there are no
Starter Fault Type I – Starting - Y Delta
*Circuit Immediate Latch currents detected by the CTs. If currents are detected Local
Compressor 1A Starters Only
when only 1M is closed first at start, then one of the
other contactors is shorted.
This is a specific starter test where 1M(1K1) is closed
first and a check is made to ensure that there are no
Starter Fault Type I – Starting - Y Delta
*Circuit Immediate Latch currents detected by the CTs. If currents are detected Local
Compressor 2A Starters Only
when only 1M is closed first at start, then one of the
other contactors is shorted.
a. This is a specific starter test where the Shorting
Contactor (1K3) is individually energized and a check is
made to ensure that there are no currents detected by
Starter Fault Type II – Starting All types of the CTs. If current is detected when only S is energized
*Circuit Immediate Latch Local
Compressor 1A starters at Start, then 1M is shorted. b. This test in a. above
applies to all forms of starters (Note: It is understood
that many starters do not connect to the Shorting
Contactor.).
a. This is a specific starter test where the Shorting
Contactor (1K3) is individually energized and a check is
made to ensure that there are no currents detected by
Starter Fault Type II – Starting – All types of the CTs. If current is detected when only S is energized
*Circuit Immediate Latch Local
Compressor 2A starters at Start, then 1M is shorted. b. This test in a. above
applies to all forms of starters (Note: It is understood
that many starters do not connect to the Shorting
Contactor.).

138 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Diagnostics

Table 94. Starter diagnostics (continued)

Diagnostic Name Affects Persist Active Modes Reset

and Source Target Severity ence [Inactive Modes] Criteria Level
As part of the normal start sequence to apply power to
the compressor, the Shorting Contactor (1K3) and then
Starting the Main Contactor (1K1) were energized. 1.6 seconds
Starter Fault Type III –
*Circuit Immediate Latch [Adaptive Frequency later there were no currents detected by the CT's for the Local
Compressor 1A
Starter Type] last 1.2 Seconds on all three phases. The test above
applies to all forms of starters except Adaptive
Frequency Drives.
As part of the normal start sequence to apply power to
the compressor, the Shorting Contactor (1K3) and then
Starting the Main Contactor (1K1) were energized. 1.6 seconds
Starter Fault Type III –
*Circuit Immediate Latch [Adaptive Frequency later there were no currents detected by the CT's for the Local
Compressor 2A
Starter Type] last 1.2 seconds on all three phases. The test above
applies to all forms of starters except Adaptive
Frequency Drives.
The Transition Complete input was found to be opened
with the compressor motor running after a successful
Immediate completion of transition. This is active only for Y-Delta,
Transition Complete
All running modes Auto-Transformer, Primary Reactor, and X-Line Starters.
Input Opened – *Circuit Latch Local
To prevent this diagnostic from occurring as the result
Compressor 1A
of a power loss to the contactors, the minimum time to
trip must be greater than the trip time for the power loss
diagnostic.
The Transition Complete input was found to be opened
with the compressor motor running after a successful
Immediate completion of transition. This is active only for Y-Delta,
Transition Complete
Auto-Transformer, Primary Reactor, and X-Line Starters.
Input Opened – *Circuit Latch All running modes Local
To prevent this diagnostic from occurring as the result
Compressor 2A
of a power loss to the contactors, the minimum time to
trip must be greater than the trip time for the power loss
diagnostic.
Transition Complete The Transition Complete input was found to be shorted
Input Shorted – *Circuit Immediate Latch Pre-Start before the compressor was started. This is active for all Local
Compressor 1A electromechanical starters.
Transition Complete The Transition Complete input was found to be shorted
Input Shorted – *Circuit Immediate Latch Pre-Start before the compressor was started. This is active for all Local
Compressor 2A electromechanical starters.
Non Pre-Start and Any Nom. trip: 60 seconds at less than 87.5%,  2.8% at 200V 
Under Voltage Chiller Normal Remote
Latch Ckt(s) Energzd 1.8% at 575V, Auto Reset at 90% or greater.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 139
Diagnostics

Main Processor Diagnostics

Table 95. Main processor diagnostics

Active Modes
Affects [Inactive Reset
Diagnostic Name Target Severity Persistence Modes] Criteria Level
The BAS was setup as “installed” at the MP and the
Lontalk® LCIC lost communications with the BAS for 15
contiguous minutes after it had been established. Refer
to Section on Setpoint Arbitration to determine how
setpoints and operating modes may be effected by the
comm loss. The chiller follows the value of the Tracer
BAS Communication Special
None Non Latch All Default Run Command which can be previously written Remote
Lost Action
by Tracer and stored nonvolatilely by the MP (either use
local or shutdown). Note that this diagnostic is never
operational for BACnet® Communication interface
(BCIC) and only operational with a LonTalk®
Communication interface (LCIC) if so configured by the
BAS or Tracer system.
The BAS was setup as “installed” and the BAS did not
communicate with the Lontalk® LCIC within 15 minutes
after chiller controls power-up. Refer to Section on
Setpoint Arbitration to determine how setpoints and
BAS Failed to Establish
None Special Action Non Latch At power-up operating modes may be effected. Note that this Remote
Communication
diagnostic is never operational for BACnet®
Communication interface (BCIC) and only operational
with a LonTalk® Communication interface (LCIC) if so
configured by the BAS or Tracer system.
The real time clock had detected loss of its oscillator at
some time in the past. Check/replace battery? This
Check Clock Chiller Info Latch All diagnostic can be effectively cleared only by writing a Remote
new value to the chiller’s time clock using the
TechView™ or DynaView’s “set chiller time” functions.
Condenser Entering RTWD only: Bad Sensor or LLID. If chiller running, and
Info and
Water Temperature Chiller Latch All condenser water regulating valve option installed, force Remote
Special Action
Sensor valve to 100% flow.
RTWD only: Bad Sensor or LLID. If Chiller is running
Condenser Leaving in the heat mode of operation – normal chiller
Info or Special
Water Temperature Chiller Latch All shutdown, otherwise, informational warning only. Remote
Action
Sensor Discontinue Min Capacity Limit forced cprsr loading due
to Low DP in subsequent startups.
Condenser Refrigerant
Pressure Transducer - Circuit Immediate Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID Remote
Circuit 1
Condenser Refrigerant
Pressure Transducer - Circuit Immediate Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID Remote
Circuit 2
The condenser water flow proof input was open for more
than 6 contiguous seconds (or 15 seconds for thermal
dispersion type flow switch) after flow had been proven.
This diagnostic is automatically cleared once the
compressor is stopped by a fixed time out of 7 sec. In
Cooling Mode: The Cond Pump shall be commanded off
Condenser Water Flow Start and All Run
Chiller Immediate Non Latch but the Evap pump command will not be effected. – Remote
Lost Modes
once the diagnostic auto clears, if diff to start is met, the
cond pump can be restarted. In Heating Mode: The
Cond Pump shall remain on, and the Evap pump shall
shut off – once diagnostic auto clears, if diff to start is
met, the chiller may restart normally and the evap
pump can be restarted.
Condenser water flow was not proven within 20 minutes
of the condenser pump relay being energized. The Cond
Condenser Water Flow Estab Cond Water
Chiller Normal Non Latch Pump shall be commanded off. Diagnostic is reset with Remote
Overdue Flow
return of flow (although only possible with external
control of pump)
Discharge Temperature
Sensor – Compressor Circuit Immediate Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID Remote
1A

140 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Diagnostics

Table 95. Main processor diagnostics (continued)

Active Modes
Affects [Inactive Reset
Diagnostic Name Target Severity Persistence Modes] Criteria Level
Discharge Temperature
Sensor – Compressor Circuit Immediate Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID Remote
2A
a. EMERGENCY STOP input is open. An external
Emergency Stop Chiller Immediate Latch All interlock has tripped. Time to trip from input opening to Local
unit stop shall be 0.1 to 1.0 seconds.
The Evaporator approach temperature for the
respective circuit (ELWT – Evap Sat Temp Ckt x) is
Evaporator Approach Respective circuit negative by 10ºF or more, for 1 minute continuously
Circuit Immediate Latch Remote
Error – Circuit 1 running while the circuit/compressor is operating. Either the
Evap Leaving Water Temp sensor, or Evap Suction Rfgt
Pressure Transducer Ckt 1 is in error.
The Evaporator approach temperature for the
respective circuit (ELWT – Evap Sat Temp Ckt x) is
Evaporator Approach Respective circuit negative by 10ºF or more, for 1 minute continuously
Circuit Immediate Latch
Error – Circuit 2 running while the circuit/compressor is operating. Either the
Evap Leaving Water Temp sensor, or Evap Suction Rfgt
Pressure Transducer Ckt 2 is in error.
Bad Sensor or LLID Note: Entering Water Temp Sensor
Evaporator Entering
is used in EXV pressure control as well as ice making so
Water Temperature Chiller Normal Latch All Remote
it must cause a unit shutdown even if ice or CHW reset
Sensor
is not installed.
Evaporator Leaving
Water Temperature Chiller Normal Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID Remote
Sensor
Evaporator Liquid Level
Circuit Normal Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID Remote
Sensor – Circuit 1
Evaporator Liquid Level
Circuit Normal Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID Remote
Sensor – Circuit 2
The entering evaporator water temp fell below the
leaving evaporator water temp by more than 2°F for
100F-sec. For falling film evaporators, this diagnostic
Any Ckt(s) cannot reliably indicate loss of flow, but can warn of
Evaporator Water Flow
None Info Non Latch Energzd [No improper flow direction through the evaporator, Remote
(Entering Water Temp)
Ckt(s) Energzd] misbound water temperature sensors, improper sensor
installation, partially failed sensors, or other system
problems. Note that either entering or leaving water
temp sensor could be at fault.
a. The Evaporator water flow switch input was open for
more than 6 contiguous seconds (or 15 seconds for
Evaporator Water Flow
Chiller Immediate Non Latch [All Stop modes] thermal dispersion type flow switch). b. This diagnostic Remote
Lost
does not de-energize the evap pump output c. 6
seconds of contiguous flow shall clear this diagnostic.
Evaporator water flow was not proven within 20
Estab. Evap. minutes of the Evaporator water pump relay being
Water Flow on energized in normal “Stop” to “Auto” transition. If the
Evaporator Water Flow
Chiller Normal Non Latch going from STOP pump is overridden to “On” for certain diagnostics, the Remote
Overdue
to AUTO or Evap delay on diagnostic callout shall be only 255 seconds.
Pump Override. The pump command status will not be effected by this
diagnostic in either case.
The condenser pressure transducer of this circuit has
detected a pressure in excess of the safe high side
pressure as limited by the particular compressor type or
Excessive Condenser
Circuit Immediate Latch All the evaporator distributor present on this particular Remote
Pressure – Circuit 1
chiller. For Air Cooled Condenser, check for dirty coils or
any fouling or restrictions as well as proper operation
and rotational direction of all fans.
The condenser pressure transducer of this circuit has
detected a pressure in excess of the safe high side
pressure as limited by the particular compressor type or
Excessive Condenser
Circuit Immediate Latch All the evaporator distributor present on this particular Remote
Pressure – Circuit 2
chiller. For Air Cooled Condenser, check for dirty coils or
any fouling or restrictions as well as proper operation
and rotational direction of all fans.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 141
Diagnostics

Table 95. Main processor diagnostics (continued)

Active Modes
Affects [Inactive Reset
Diagnostic Name Target Severity Persistence Modes] Criteria Level
a. Function Not “Enabled”: no diagnostics. B. “Enabled
“: Out-Of-Range Low or Hi or bad LLID, set diagnostic,
External Chilled (Hot
None Info Latch All default CWS to next level of priority (e.g. Front Panel Remote
Water Setpoint
SetPoint). This Info diagnostic will automatically reset if
the input returns to the normal range.
a. Not “Enabled”: no diagnostics. B. “Enabled “: Out-Of-
Range Low or Hi or bad LLID, set diagnostic, default CLS
External Current Limit
None Info Latch All to next level of priority (e.g. Front Panel SetPoint. This Remote
Setpoint
Info diagnostic will automatically reset if the input
returns to the normal range.
A fault signal has been detected from the respective
Special Mode
Prestart and condenser’s Variable Speed Inverter Drive (fan).
(or in single
Circuit NonLatch (or in Running w/Low Condenser Fan control will revert to constant speed
fan deck:
Fan Fault - Circuit 1 (fan single fan deck: Ambient Variable operation without the use of the inverter’s fan. If the
Circuit
control) Latch) Spd Fan inverter’s fault clears, fan control will switch back to
Immediate
configured variable speed. For single fan deck configurations, this
shutdown
diagnostic causes a latching circuit shutdown.
A fault signal has been detected from the respective
Special Mode
Prestart and condenser’s Variable Speed Inverter Drive (fan).
(or in single
Circuit NonLatch (or in Running w/Low Condenser Fan control will revert to constant speed
fan deck:
Fan Fault - Circuit 2 (fan single fan Ambient Variable operation without the use of the inverter’s fan. If the
Circuit
control) deck:Latch) Spd Fan inverter’s fault clears, fan control will switch back to
Immediate
configured variable speed. For single fan deck configurations, this
shutdown
diagnostic causes a latching circuit shutdown.
High Vi Cprsr: The differential pressure for the
respective circuit was above 275 Psid (1890 kPa) for 2
High Differential
consecutive samples or more than 10 seconds.
Refrigerant Pressure - Circuit Normal Latch Cprsr Energized Remote
Low Vi Cprsr: The system differential pressure was
Circuit 1
above 188 Psid (1296.4 kPa) - for 2 consecutive
samples or more than 10 seconds.
High Vi Cprsr: The differential pressure for the
respective circuit was above 275 Psid (1890 kPa) for 2
High Differential
consecutive samples or more than 10 seconds.
Refrigerant Pressure - Circuit Normal Latch Cprsr Energized Remote
Low Vi Cprsr: The system differential pressure was
Circuit 2
above 188 Psid (1296.4 kPa) - for 2 consecutive
samples or more than 10 seconds.
The compressor discharge temperature exceeded 200F
All (without oil cooler) or 230ºF (with oil cooler). This diagnostic will
High Discharge [compressor run be suppressed during Run-Unload or after the compressor has
Temperature – Circuit Immediate Latch unload or stopped. Note: As part of the Compressor High Temperature Remote
Compressor 1A compressor not Limit Mode (aka Minimum Capacity Limit), the compressor shall
running] be forced loaded as the filtered discharge temperature reaches
190ºF(without oil coolers), or 220ºF (with oil coolers).
The compressor discharge temperature exceeded 200F
All (without oil cooler) or 230ºF (with oil cooler). This diagnostic will
High Discharge [compressor run be suppressed during Run-Unload or after the compressor has
Temperature – Circuit Immediate Latch unload or stopped. Note: As part of the Compressor High Temperature Remote
Compressor 2A compressor not Limit Mode (aka Minimum Capacity Limit), the compressor shall
running] be forced loaded as the filtered discharge temperature reaches
190ºF(without oil coolers), or 220ºF (with oil coolers).
High Evaporator Liquid
The liquid level sensor is seen to be at or near its high
Level – Circuit 1 (early
end of range for 80 contiguous minutes while the
Phase 1 RTWD Starter Contactor
compressor is running. (The diagnostic timer will hold,
production only – Circuit Normal Latch Energized [all Remote
but not clear when the circuit is off). Design: approx
eliminated in 2nd Stop modes]
80% or more of bit count corresponding to +30 mm or
Phase 1 release in Sept
more liquid level for 80 minutes)
08)
High Evaporator Liquid
The liquid level sensor is seen to be at or near its high
Level – Circuit 2 (early
end of range for 80 contiguous minutes while the
Phase 1 RTWD Starter Contactor
compressor is running. (The diagnostic timer will hold,
production only – Circuit Normal Latch Energized [all . Remote
but not clear when the circuit is off). Design: approx
eliminated in 2nd Stop modes]
80% or more of bit count corresponding to +30 mm or
Phase 1 release in Sept
more liquid level for 80 minutes)
08)

142 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Diagnostics

Table 95. Main processor diagnostics (continued)

Active Modes
Affects [Inactive Reset
Diagnostic Name Target Severity Persistence Modes] Criteria Level
The evaporator refrigerant pressure of either circuit has
risen above 190 psig. The evaporator water pump relay
will be de-energized to stop the pump regardless of why
the pump is running. The diagnostic will auto reset and
the pump will return to normal control when all of the
High Evaporator evaporator pressures fall below 185 psig. The primary
Chiller Immediate Non Latch All Remote
Refrigerant Pressure purpose is to stop the evaporator water pump and its
associated pump heat from causing refrigerant side
pressures, close to the evaporator relief valve setting,
when the chiller is not running, such as could occur with
Evap Water Flow Overdue or Evaporator Water Flow
Loss Diagnostics
The leaving water temperature exceeded the high evap water
temp limit (TV service menu settable –default 105F) for 15
Only effective if continuous seconds. The evaporator water pump relay will be
either de-energized to stop the pump but only if it is running due one
1)Evap Wtr Flow of the diagnostics listed on the left. The diagnostic will auto reset
Overdue, and the pump will return to normal control when the temperature
High Evaporator Water Info and 2)Evap Wtr Flow falls 5F below the trip setting. The primary purpose is to stop Remote
Chiller Non Latch
Temperature Special Action Loss, or 3)Low the evaporator water pump and its associated pump heat from
Evap Rfgt Temp,- causing excessive waterside temperatures and waterside
Unit Off, pressures when the chiller is not running but the evap pump is
diagnostic is on due to either Evap Water Flow Overdue, Evaporator Water
active. Flow Loss, or Low Evap Temp – Unit Off Diagnostics. This
diagnostic will not auto clear solely due to the clearing of the
enabling diagnostic.
High Motor
The respective compressor’s motor winding thermostat
Temperature - Circuit Immediate Latch All Local
is detected to be open
Compressor 1A
High Motor
The respective compressor’s motor winding thermostat
Temperature - Circuit Immediate Latch All Local
is detected to be open
Compressor 2A
A high pressure cutout was detected on Compressor
1A; trip at 270 ± 5 PSIG. Note: Other diagnostics that
may occur as an expected consequence of the HPC trip
High Pressure Cutout - will be suppressed from annunciation. These include
Circuit Immediate Latch All Local
Compressor 1A Phase Loss, Power Loss, and Transition Complete Input
Open. For Air Cooled Condenser, check for dirty coils or
any fouling or restrictions as well as proper operation
and rotational direction of all fans.
A high pressure cutout was detected on Compressor
1A; trip at 270 ± 5 PSIG. Note: Other diagnostics that
may occur as an expected consequence of the HPC trip
High Pressure Cutout - will be suppressed from annunciation. These include
Circuit Immediate Latch All Local
Compressor 2A Phase Loss, Power Loss, and Transition Complete Input
Open. For Air Cooled Condenser, check for dirty coils or
any fouling or restrictions as well as proper operation
and rotational direction of all fans.
The pressure ratio for the respective circuit exceeded
High Refrigerant 5.61 for 1 contiguous minute while in service
Service
Pressure Ratio – Circuit Circuit Immediate Latch pumpdown. This pressure ratio is a fundamental Remote
Pumpdown Only
1 limitation of the compressor. The pressure ratio is
defined as Pcond (abs) (Pevap(abs).
The pressure ratio for the respective circuit exceeded
High Refrigerant 5.61 for 1 contiguous minute while in service
Service
Pressure Ratio – Circuit Circuit Immediate Latch pumpdown. This pressure ratio is a fundamental Remote
Pumpdown Only
2 limitation of the compressor. The pressure ratio is
defined as Pcond (abs) (Pevap(abs).
The neuron software in the LCI-C module does not
LCI-C Software match the chiller type. Download the proper software
Mismatch: Use BAS Circuit Info Nonlatch All into the LCI-C neuron. To do this, use the Rover service Remote
Tool tool, or a LonTalk® tool capable of downloading
software to a Neuron 3150®.
Loss of Oil - In running modes, Oil Loss Level Sensor detects lack of
Starter Contactor
Compressor 1A Circuit Immediate Latch oil in the oil sump feeding the compressor Local
Energized
(Running) (distinguishing a liquid flow from a vapor flow)

RLC-SVX09L-EN 143
Diagnostics

Table 95. Main processor diagnostics (continued)

Active Modes
Affects [Inactive Reset
Diagnostic Name Target Severity Persistence Modes] Criteria Level
Loss of Oil - In running modes, Oil Loss Level Sensor detects lack of
Starter Contactor
Compressor 2A Circuit Immediate Latch oil in the oil sump feeding the compressor Local
Energized
(Running) (distinguishing a liquid flow from a vapor flow)
Oil Loss Level Sensor detects a lack of oil in the oil sump
Loss of Oil – Immediate Compressor Pre- feeding the compressor for 90 seconds just prior to
Compressor 1A Circuit and Special Latch start [all other attempted compressor start. Note: Compressor start is Local
(Stopped) Action modes] delayed while waiting for oil to be detected, and
compressor start is not allowed.
Oil Loss Level Sensor detects a lack of oil in the oil sump
Loss of Oil – Immediate Compressor Pre- feeding the compressor for 90 seconds just prior to
Compressor 2A Circuit and Special Latch start [all other attempted compressor start. Note: Compressor start is Local
(Stopped) Action modes] delayed while waiting for oil to be detected, and
compressor start is not allowed.
The system differential pressure for the respective
circuit was below 25 Psid (240.5 kPa) while its
Low Differential
compressor was unstepped or pressure ratio was below
Refrigerant Pressure - Circuit Immediate Latch Cprsr Energized Remote
1.75 if stepped - for a varying period of time – refer to
Circuit 1
specification for trip time as a function of system DP
below the requirement.
The system differential pressure for the respective
circuit was below 25 Psid (240.5 kPa) while its
Low Differential
compressor was unstepped or pressure ratio was below
Refrigerant Pressure - Circuit Immediate Latch Cprsr Energized Remote
1.75 if stepped - for a varying period of time – refer to
Circuit 2
specification for trip time as a function of system DP
below the requirement
While Running Normally, the Discharge Superheat was
Low Discharge Any Running less than 12 degrees F +- 1F for more than 6500 degree
Circuit Normal Latch Remote
Superheat – Circuit 1 Mode F seconds. At circuit startup the Discharge Superheat
will be ignored for 5 minutes.
While Running Normally, the Discharge Superheat was
Low Discharge Any Running less than 12 degrees F +- 1F for more than 6500 degree
Circuit Normal Latch Remote
Superheat – Circuit 2 Mode F seconds. At circuit startup the Discharge Superheat
will be ignored for 5 minutes.
a. The Evap Refrig Pressure dropped below 10 Psia just
prior to compressor start (after EXV preposition). b. For
RTUD A (C during early startup period: The Evap Refrig
Pressure fell below the Condenser Pressure ÷ 8, limited
to between 2 and 10 psia. c. For RTWD (or RTUD,
Low Evaporator
Cprsr Prestart and ACFC=none) during early startup period: The Evap
Refrigerant Pressure - Circuit Immediate Latch Local
Cprsr Energized Refrig Pressure fell below 10 Psia. d. For all chiller types,
Circuit 1
after early Startup Period expires: The Evap Refrig
Pressure fell below 16 Psia.
(Note: the Startup Period for RTWD is 3 min; for RTUD
it is between 1 and 5 min for as an inverse function of
the Cond Temp measured at time of circuit startup).
a. The Evap Refrig Pressure dropped below 10 Psia just
prior to compressor start (after EXV preposition). b. For
RTUD A (C during early startup period: The Evap Refrig
Pressure fell below the Condenser Pressure ÷ 8, limited
to between 2 and 10 psia. c. For RTWD (or RTUD,
Low Evaporator
Cprsr Prestart and ACFC=none) during early startup period: The Evap
Refrigerant Pressure - Circuit Immediate Latch Local
Cprsr Energized Refrig Pressure fell below 10 Psia. d. For all chiller types,
Circuit 2
after early Startup Period expires: The Evap Refrig
Pressure fell below 16 Psia.
(Note: the Startup Period for RTWD is 3 min; for RTUD
it is between 1 and 5 min for as an inverse function of
the Cond Temp measured at time of circuit startup).

144 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Diagnostics

Table 95. Main processor diagnostics (continued)

Active Modes
Affects [Inactive Reset
Diagnostic Name Target Severity Persistence Modes] Criteria Level
The inferred Saturated Evap Refrigerant Temperature
(calculated from suction pressure transducer dropped
below the Low Refrigerant Temperature Cutout Setpoint
for 1125?F-sec (25?F-sec max rate) while the circuit
was running. The minimum LRTC setpoint is -5?F (18.7
Psia) the point at which oil separates from the
Low Evaporator refrigerant. During the time that the trip integral is non
All Ckt Running
Refrigerant Circuit Immediate Latch zero, the unload solenoid(s) of the running compressors Remote
Modes
Temperature - Circuit 1 on the circuit, shall be energized continuously and the
load solenoid shall be off. Normal load (unload
operation will be resumed if the trip integral decays to
zero by temps above the cutout setpoint. The integral
is held nonvolatily though power down, is continuously
calculated, and can decay during the circuit’s off cycle
as conditions warrant.
The inferred Saturated Evap Refrigerant Temperature
(calculated from suction pressure transducer dropped
below the Low Refrigerant Temperature Cutout Setpoint
for 1125?F-sec (25?F-sec max rate) while the circuit
was running. The minimum LRTC setpoint is -5?F (18.7
Psia) the point at which oil separates from the
Low Evaporator refrigerant. During the time that the trip integral is non
All Ckt Running
Refrigerant Circuit Immediate Latch zero, the unload solenoid(s) of the running compressors Remote
Modes
Temperature - Circuit 2 on the circuit, shall be energized continuously and the
load solenoid shall be off. Normal load (unload
operation will be resumed if the trip integral decays to
zero by temps above the cutout setpoint. The integral
is held nonvolatily though power down, is continuously
calculated, and can decay during the circuit’s off cycle
as conditions warrant.
The respective evap sat temp fell below the water temp
cutout setting while the evap liquid level was greater
than –36 mm for 150º-sec degree F seconds while
Chiller is in the Stop mode, or in Auto mode with no
compressors running. Energize small Evap Circulating
Pump (RTUD A (C) and Evap Water pump Relay (but
Unit in Stop Mode,
only if “Evap Water Pump Diagnostic Override” setting
or in Auto Mode
Low Evaporator Temp – Evap is enabled) until diagnostic auto resets, then de-
Special Action Non Latch and No Ckt's Remote
Ckt 1: Unit Off Pump energize the circ pump and return to normal evap pump
Energzd [Any Ckt
control. Automatic reset occurs when the derived evap
Energzd]
sat temp rises 2?F (1.1?C) above the cutout setting for
1 minute or the liquid level is below –36.0 mm for 20
minutes, or any compressor restarts. OA temp is
substituted for evap sat temp in case of invalidity. This
diagnostic even while active, does not prevent
operation of either circuit.
The respective evap sat temp fell below the water temp
cutout setting while the evap liquid level was greater
than –36 mm for 150º-sec degree F seconds while
Chiller is in the Stop mode, or in Auto mode with no
compressors running. Energize small Evap Circulating
Pump (RTUD A (C) and Evap Water pump Relay (but
Unit in Stop Mode,
only if “Evap Water Pump Diagnostic Override” setting
Evap or in Auto Mode
Low Evaporator Temp – is enabled) until diagnostic auto resets, then de-
(and circ) Special Action Non Latch and No Ckts Remote
Ckt 2: Unit Off energize the circ pump and return to normal evap pump
Pump Energzd [Any Ckt
control. Automatic reset occurs when the derived evap
Energzd]
sat temp rises 2?F (1.1?C) above the cutout setting for
1 minute or the liquid level is below –36.0 mm for 20
minutes, or any compressor restarts. OA temp is
substituted for evap sat temp in case of invalidity. This
diagnostic even while active, does not prevent
operation of either circuit.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 145
Diagnostics

Table 95. Main processor diagnostics (continued)

Active Modes
Affects [Inactive Reset
Diagnostic Name Target Severity Persistence Modes] Criteria Level
The leaving Evaporator water temp. fell below the
leaving water temp cutout setting for 30 degree F
seconds while the Chiller is in the Stop mode, or in Auto
mode with no compressors running. Energize small
Unit in Stop Mode,
Evap Circulating Pump (RTUD A (C) and Evap Water
or in Auto Mode
Low Evaporator Water Evap pump Relay (but only if “Evap Water Pump Diagnostic
Special Action Non Latch and No Ckt(s) Remote
Temp: Unit Off Pump Override” setting is enabled) until diagnostic auto
Energzd [Any Ckt
resets, then de-energize the circ pump and return to
Energzd]
normal evap pump control. Automatic reset occurs
when the temp rises 2?F (1.1?C) above the cutout
setting for 30 minutes. This diagnostic even while
active, does not prevent operation of either circuit.
The evaporator water temp. fell below the cutout setpoint for 30
Immediate Any Ckt[s] degree F Seconds while the compressor was running.
Low Evaporator Water
Chiller and Special Non Latch Energzd [No Automatic reset occurs when the temperature rises 2 F (1.1C) Remote
Temp: Unit On
Action Ckt(s) Energzd] above the cutout setting for 2 minutes. This diagnostic shall not
de-energize the Evaporator Water Pump Output.
The intermediate oil pressure transducer for this
compressor was indicating an unacceptable oil pressure
drop as a % of the available oil pressure to move oil,
Cprsr Energized
Low Oil Flow - suggesting significantly reduced oil flow to the
Circuit Immediate Latch and Delta P above Local
Compressor 1A compressor. Possible root causes include oil line service
15 Psid
valve closed or restricted, dirty or restricted oil filter,
compressor oil line kepner valve malfunction, or
plugged (restricted oil cooler (when present).
The intermediate oil pressure transducer for this
compressor was indicating an unacceptable oil pressure
drop as a % of the available oil pressure to move oil,
Cprsr Energized
Low Oil Flow - suggesting significantly reduced oil flow to the
Circuit Immediate Latch and Delta P above Local
Compressor 2A compressor. Possible root causes include oil line service
15 Psid
valve closed or restricted, dirty or restricted oil filter,
compressor oil line kepner valve malfunction, or
plugged (restricted oil cooler (when present).
MP Application Memory
Chiller Immediate Latch All Modes Memory error criteria TBD Remote
CRC Error
MP has determined there was an error with the previous
MP: Could not Store
None Info Latch All power down store. Starts and Hours may have been lost Remote
Starts and Hours
for the last 24 hours.
MP: Invalid MP has an invalid configuration based on the current
None Immediate Latch All Remote
Configuration software installed
MP: Non-Volatile Block MP has determined there was an error with a block in
None Info Latch All Remote
Test Error the Non-Volatile memory. Check settings.
MP has determined there was an error in a sector of the
MP: Non-Volatile
None Info Latch All Non-Volatile memory and it was reformatted. Check Remote
Memory Reformat
settings.
The main processor has successfully come out of a reset
and built its application. A reset may have been due to
MP: Reset Has a power up, installing new software or configuration.
None Info Non Latch All Remote
Occurred This diagnostic is immediately and automatically
cleared and thus can only be seen in the Historic
Diagnostic List in TechView™
No Differential The system differential pressure was below 7.7 Psid (53
Compressor
Refrigerant Pressure – Circuit Immediate Latch kPa) for 6 seconds after the 11 seconds ignore time Remote
running on Circuit
Circuit 1 relative to cprsr (circuit startup had expired.
No Differential The system differential pressure was below 7.7 Psid (53
Compressor
Refrigerant Pressure – Circuit Immediate Latch kPa) for 6 seconds after the 11 seconds ignore time Remote
running on Circuit
Circuit 2 relative to cprsr (circuit startup had expired.
Diagnostic occurs when accumulated circuit operating
Oil Analysis “Service hours since last initialized exceeds 2000 hours.
Recommended – Ckt Circuit Info Latch Messages” Diagnostic can be manually cleared but will reoccur Remote
#1 enabled every month (720 hours on real time clock) as long as
accumulator is not re-initialized.

146 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Diagnostics

Table 95. Main processor diagnostics (continued)

Active Modes
Affects [Inactive Reset
Diagnostic Name Target Severity Persistence Modes] Criteria Level
Diagnostic occurs when accumulated circuit operating
Oil Analysis “Service hours since last initialized exceeds 2000 hours.
Recommended – Ckt Circuit Info Latch Messages” Diagnostic can be manually cleared but will reoccur Remote
#2 enabled every month (720 hours on real time clock) as long as
accumulator is not re-initialized.
Diagnostic occurs only when “service messages” are
enabled and when Oil Filter Life remaining falls below
5%. Diagnostic can be manually cleared but will reoccur
every month real time (720 hours on real time clock) as
Oil Filter Change long as the oil filter life remaining does not rise above
“Service
Recommended – Cprsr 20% (through normal calculations or reinitializing)
Circuit Info Latch Messages” Remote
1A (Prior to RTUD Release in Fall of 09): Diagnostic occurs
enabled
only when “service messages” are enabled and when
average oil pressure drop exceeds 18%. Diagnostic can
be manually cleared but will reoccur every month (720
hours on real time clock) as long as average pressure
drop does not fall below 16%.
Diagnostic occurs only when “service messages” are
enabled and when Oil Filter Life remaining falls below
5%. Diagnostic can be manually cleared but will reoccur
every month real time (720 hours on real time clock) as
long as the oil filter life remaining does not rise above
Oil Filter Change “Service
20% (through normal calculations or reinitializing)
Recommended – Cprsr Circuit Info Latch Messages” Remote
(Prior to RTUD Release in Fall of 09): Diagnostic occurs
2A enabled
only when “service messages” are enabled and when
average oil pressure drop exceeds 18%. Diagnostic can
be manually cleared but will reoccur every month (720
hours on real time clock) as long as average pressure
drop does not fall below 16%.
The Intermediate Oil Pressure Transducer for this cprsr
Starter Contactor is reading a pressure either above its respective circuit’s
Oil Pressure System
Circuit Immediate Latch Energized [all Condenser Pressure by 15 Psia or more, or below its Local
Fault – Circuit 1
Stop modes] respective Suction Pressure 10 Psia or more for 30
seconds continuously.
The Intermediate Oil Pressure Transducer for this cprsr
Starter Contactor is reading a pressure either above its respective circuit’s
Oil Pressure System
Circuit Immediate Latch Energized [all Condenser Pressure by 15 Psia or more, or below its Local
Fault – Circuit 2
Stop modes] respective Suction Pressure 10 Psia or more for 30
seconds continuously.
Oil Pressure
Transducer – Circuit Immediate Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID Remote
Compressor 1A
Oil Pressure
Transducer – Circuit Immediate Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID Remote
Compressor 2A
RTUD with Bad Sensor or LLID. If the outdoor temperature is used
ACFC?NONE– for CHW reset, there shall be no CHW reset. Apply slew
Normal rates per Chilled Water Reset spec. RTUD: if this
Outdoor Air Shutdown;
Chiller Latch All diagnostic occurs, operational pumpdown will be Remote
Temperature Sensor
performed regardless of the last valid temperature. For
OATS=INST- RTWD, if installed for low ambient lockout, there shall
Special Action be no LA lockout.

Operational or Service Pumpdown cycle for this circuit

Service or was terminated abnormally due to excessive time (op
Pumpdown Terminated
Circuit Info NonLatch Operational pd only) or due to a specific set of diagnostic criteria –
- Circuit 1
Pumpdown but w (o associated latching diagnostics. (RTWD max
Operation Pumpdown = 2 min)
Operational or Service Pumpdown cycle for this circuit
Service or was terminated abnormally due to excessive time (op
Pumpdown Terminated
Circuit Info NonLatch Operational pd only) or due to a specific set of diagnostic criteria –
- Circuit 2
Pumpdown but w (o associated latching diagnostics. (RTWD max
Operation Pumpdown = 2 min)
Service Pumpdown cycle for this circuit was terminated
Pumpdown Terminated Service
Circuit Info NonLatch abnormally due to excessive time (RTWD max Service Local
by Time - Circuit 1 Pumpdown
Pumpdown = 4 min).

RLC-SVX09L-EN 147
Diagnostics

Table 95. Main processor diagnostics (continued)

Active Modes
Affects [Inactive Reset
Diagnostic Name Target Severity Persistence Modes] Criteria Level
Service Pumpdown cycle for this circuit was terminated
Pumpdown Terminated Service
Circuit Info NonLatch abnormally due to excessive time (RTWD max Service Local
by Time - Circuit 2 Pumpdown
Pumpdown = 4 min).
A high level software watchdog has detected a condition
in which there was a continuous 1 minute period of
compressor operation, with neither Evaporator water
flow nor a” contactor interrupt failure” diagnostic
Software Error 1001: All
Immediate Latch All active. The presence of this software error message Local
Call Trane Service functions
suggests an internal software problem has been
detected. The events that led up to this failure, if
known, should be recorded and transmitted to Trane
Controls Engineering.
Reported if state chart misalignment in stopped or
inactive state occurred while a compressor was seen to
be operating and this condition lasted for at least 1
minute (cmprsr operation due to Service Pumpdown or
Software Error 1002: All with Contactor Interrupt Failure diagnostic is excluded).
Immediate Latch All Local
Call Trane Service functions The presence of this software error message suggests
an internal software problem has been detected. The
events that led up to this failure, if known, should be
recorded and transmitted to Trane Controls
Engineering.
Reported if state chart misalignment occurred inferred
from either the Capacity Control, Circuit, or Compressor
State Machines remaining in the Stopping state for
Software Error 1003: All more than 3 minutes. The presence of this software
Immediate Latch All Local
Call Trane Service functions error message suggests an internal software problem
has been detected. The events that led up to this failure,
if known, should be recorded and transmitted to Trane
Controls Engineering.
Starter Failed to Arm Starter failed to arm or start within the allotted time (15
Circuit Normal Latch All Local
(Start – Cprsr 1A seconds).
Starter Failed to Arm Starter failed to arm or start within the allotted time (15
Circuit Normal Latch All Local
(Start – Cprsr 2A seconds).
Starter Module Checksum on RAM copy of the Starter LLID
Memory Error Type 1 - None Info Latch All configuration failed. Configuration recalled from Local
Starter 2A EEPROM.
Starter Module Checksum on RAM copy of the Starter LLID
Memory Error Type None Info Latch All configuration failed. Configuration recalled from Local
1Starter 1A EEPROM.
Starter Module
Checksum on EEPROM copy of the Starter LLID
Memory Error Type 2 - Circuit Immediate Latch All Local
configuration failed. Factory default values used.
Starter 1A
Starter Module
Checksum on EEPROM copy of the Starter LLID
Memory Error Type 2 - Circuit Immediate Latch All Local
configuration failed. Factory default values used.
Starter 2A
Starter Panel High Limit Thermostat (170?F) trip was
detected. Compressor 1A is shutdown and inoperative
Starter Panel High Immediate until the thermostat resets. Note: Other diagnostics
Temperature Limit - Circuit and Special Non Latch All that may occur as an expected consequence of the Local
Compressor 1A Action Panel High Temp Limit trip will be suppressed from
annunciation. These include Phase Loss, Power Loss,
and Transition Complete Input for Compressor 1A.
Suction Refrigerant
Pressure Transducer – Circuit Immediate Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID Remote
Circuit 1
Suction Refrigerant
Pressure Transducer – Circuit Immediate Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID Remote
Circuit 2

148 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Diagnostics

Table 95. Main processor diagnostics (continued)

Active Modes
Affects [Inactive Reset
Diagnostic Name Target Severity Persistence Modes] Criteria Level
The Starter module status reported back that it is
All Cprsr Running stopped when the MP thinks it should be running and no
modes, Starting, Starter diagnostic exist. This diagnostic will be logged
Unexpected Starter
Circuit Normal Non latch Running and in the active buffer and then automatically cleared. This NA
Shutdown
Preparing to diagnostic could be caused by intermittent
Shutdown communication problems from the Starter to the MP, or
due to misbinding.
The respective circuit’s evaporator pressure dropped
below 80% of the current Low Evap Refrig Press Cutout
All
Very Low Evaporator setting (see above) or 8 psia, whichever is less,
[compressor or
Refrigerant Pressure – Chiller Immediate Latch regardless of the running state of the circuit’s Local
circuit in manual
Circuit 1 compressor. If a given compressor or circuit is locked
lockout]
out, the suction pressure transducer(s) associated with
it, will be excluded from causing this diagnostic.
The respective circuit’s evaporator pressure dropped
below 80% of the current Low Evap Refrig Press Cutout
All
Very Low Evaporator setting (see above) or 8 psia, whichever is less,
[compressor or
Refrigerant Pressure – Chiller Immediate Latch regardless of the running state of the circuit’s Local
circuit in manual
Circuit 2 compressor. If a given compressor or circuit is locked
lockout]
out, the suction pressure transducer(s) associated with
it, will be excluded from causing this diagnostic.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 149
Diagnostics

Communication Diagnostics
Notes: longer being heard from by the Main Processor. Many
1. The following communication loss diagnostics will not LLIDs, such as the Quad Relay LLID, have more than
occur unless that input or output is required to be one functional output associated with it. A comm loss
present by the particular configuration and installed with such a multiple function board, will generate
options for the chiller. multiple diagnostics. Refer to the Chiller's wiring
diagrams to relate the occurrence of multiple
2. Communication diagnostics (with the exception of communication diagnostics back to the physical LLID
“Excessive Loss of Comm” are named by the boards that they have been assigned to (bound).
Functional Name of the input or output that is no
Table 96. Communication diagnostics
Active
Modes
Affects [Inactive Reset
Diagnostic Name Target Severity Persistence Modes] Criteria Level
Comm Loss: Chiller% RLA Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Chiller Info Latch All Remote
Output the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Cond Head Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Chiller Immediate Latch All Remote
Press Control Output the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Cond Rfgt Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Circuit Immediate Latch All Remote
Pressure, Circuit #1 the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Cond Rfgt Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Circuit Immediate Latch All Remote
Pressure, Circuit #2 the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
RTWD Only: Continual loss of communication between
Info and the MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Comm Loss: Condenser
Chiller Special Latch All second period. If chiller running, and condenser water Remote
Entering Water Temperature
Action regulating valve option installed, force valve to 100%
flow.
RTWD Only: Continual loss of communication between
the MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Info and
Comm Loss: Condenser second period. If Chiller is running in the heat mode of
Chiller Special Latch All Remote
Leaving Water Temperature operation – normal shutdown, otherwise, informational
Action
only. Discontinue Min Capacity Limit forced cprsr loading
due to Low DP in subsequent startups.
Comm Loss: Condenser Rfgt Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Chiller Info Latch All Remote
Pressure Output the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
RTWD only: Continual loss of communication between
Comm Loss: Condenser
Chiller Immediate Latch All the MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 Remote
Water Flow Switch
second period.
RTWD only: Continual loss of communication between
Comm Loss: Condenser
Chiller Normal Latch All the MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 Remote
Water Pump Relay
second period.
Comm Loss: Discharge
Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Temperature Circuit 1, Cprsr Circuit Normal Latch All Remote
the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
1A
Comm Loss: Discharge
Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Temperature, Circuit 2, Circuit Normal Latch All Remote
the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Cprsr 2A
Comm Loss: Electronic Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Circuit Normal Latch All Remote
Expansion Valve, Circuit #1 the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Electronic Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Circuit Normal Latch All Remote
Expansion Valve, Circuit #2 the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Emergency Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Chiller Normal Latch All Remote
Stop the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Continual loss of communication between the MP and
the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Evaporator Note: Entering Water Temp Sensor is used in EXV
Chiller Normal Latch All Remote
Entering Water Temperature pressure control as well as ice making & CHW reset, so
it must cause a unit shutdown even if Ice or CHW reset
is not installed.
Comm Loss: Evaporator Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Chiller Normal Latch All Remote
Leaving Water Temperature the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.

150 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Diagnostics

Table 96. Communication diagnostics (continued)

Active
Modes
Affects [Inactive Reset
Diagnostic Name Target Severity Persistence Modes] Criteria Level
Comm Loss: Evaporator Rfgt Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Circuit Normal Latch All Remote
Liquid Level, Circuit #1 the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Evaporator Rfgt Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Circuit Normal Latch All Remote
Liquid Level, Circuit #2 the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Evaporator Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Chiller Immediate Latch All Remote
Water Flow Switch the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Evaporator Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Chiller Normal Latch All Remote
Water Pump Relay the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Ext Noise Continual loss of communication between the MP and
None Info Latch All Remote
Setback Command the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: External Auto Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Chiller Normal Latch All Remote
(Stop the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Continual loss of communication between the MP and
External
the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: External Chilled Chilled Special
Latch All Chiller shall discontinue use of the External Chilled Remote
(Hot Water Setpoint Water Action
Water Setpoint source and revert to the next higher
setpoint
priority for setpoint arbitration
Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Comm Loss: External Circuit Special the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Circuit Latch All Remote
Lockout, Circuit #1 Action MP will nonvolatilely hold the lockout state (enabled or
disabled) that was in effect at the time of comm loss.
Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Comm Loss: External Circuit Special the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Circuit Latch All Remote
Lockout, Circuit #2 Action MP will nonvolatilely hold the lockout state (enabled or
disabled) that was in effect at the time of comm loss
Continual loss of communication between the MP and
External
the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: External Current Special
Latch All Chiller shall discontinue use of the External Current limit Remote
Current Limit Setpoint Limit Action
setpoint and revert to the next higher priority for
setpoint
Current Limit setpoint arbitration
Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Comm Loss: External Ice Ice Making Special the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Latch All Remote
Building Command Mode Action Chiller shall revert to normal (non-ice building) mode
regardless of last state.
Comm Loss: Fan Control Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Circuit Normal Latch All Remote
Relays, Circuit #1 the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Fan Control Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Circuit Normal Latch All Remote
Relays, Circuit #2 the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Special
Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Mode (or in
Circuit Latch (or in the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Fan Inverter single fan
(fan single fan All Operate the remaining fans as fixed speed fan deck. For Remote
Fault, Circuit #1 deck: Circuit
control) deck:Latch) single fan deck configurations, this diagnostic causes a
Immediate
latching circuit shutdown
shutdown)
Special
Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Mode (or in
Circuit Latch (or in the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Fan Inverter single fan
(fan single fan All Operate the remaining fans as fixed speed fan deck. For Remote
Fault, Circuit #2 deck: Circuit
control) deck:Latch) single fan deck configurations, this diagnostic causes a
Immediate
latching circuit shutdown
shutdown)
Special
Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Mode (or in
Circuit Latch (or in the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Fan Inverter single fan
(fan single fan All Operate the remaining fans as fixed speed fan deck. For
Speed Command, Circuit #1 deck: Circuit
control) deck:Latch) single fan deck configurations, this diagnostic causes a
Immediate
latching circuit shutdown
shutdown)

RLC-SVX09L-EN 151
Diagnostics

Table 96. Communication diagnostics (continued)

Active
Modes
Affects [Inactive Reset
Diagnostic Name Target Severity Persistence Modes] Criteria Level
Special
Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Mode (or in
Circuit Latch (or in the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Fan Inverter single fan
(fan single fan All Operate the remaining fans as fixed speed fan deck. For
Speed Command, Circuit #2 deck: Circuit
control) deck:Latch) single fan deck configurations, this diagnostic causes a
Immediate
latching circuit shutdown
shutdown)
Comm Loss: Female Step Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Circuit Normal Latch All Remote
Load Compressor 1A the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Female Step Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Circuit Normal Latch All Remote
Load Compressor 2A the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Continual loss of communication between the MP and
the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
The external input shall revert to normal (cooling)
Comm Loss: Heat (Cool Special request regardless of last state. Chiller mode shall
Heat Mode Latch All Remote
Switch Action follow “OR” arbitration for heating (cooling mode, i.e. If
any of the remaining inputs (front panel of BAS) are
requesting heat mode, then the chiller shall be in heat
mode.
Comm Loss: High Pressure Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Circuit Immediate Latch All Remote
Cutout Switch, Cprsr 1A the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: High Pressure Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Circuit Immediate Latch All Remote
Cutout Switch, Cprsr 2A the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Comm Loss: Ice-Making Ice- Special the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Latch All Remote
Status Machine Action Chiller shall revert to normal (non-ice building) mode
regardless of last state.
Continual loss of communication between the MP and
the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Local BAS Special Use last valid BAS setpoints.
None Non Latch All Remote
Interface Action Diagnostic is cleared when successful communication is
®
established with the LonTalk LLID (LCIC) or BacNet
LLID (BCIC).
Comm Loss: Male Port Load Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Circuit Normal Latch All Remote
Compressor 1A the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Male Port Load Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Circuit Normal Latch All Remote
Compressor 2A the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Male Port Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Circuit Normal Latch All Remote
Unload Compressor 1A the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Male Port Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Circuit Normal Latch All Remote
Unload Compressor 2A the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Motor Winding Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Circuit Normal Latch All Remote
Thermostat Compressor 1A the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Motor Winding Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Circuit Normal Latch All Remote
Thermostat Compressor 2A the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Noise Setback Continual loss of communication between the MP and
None Info Latch All Remote
Relay the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Oil Loss Level Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Circuit Normal Latch All Remote
Sensor Input – Circuit #1 the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Oil Loss Level Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Circuit Normal Latch All Remote
Sensor Input – Circuit #2 the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Oil Pressure, Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Cprsr Immediate Latch All Remote
Cprsr 1A the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Oil Pressure, Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Cprsr Immediate Latch All Remote
Cprsr 2A the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Oil Return Gas Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Circuit Normal Latch All Remote
Pump Drain – Circuit #1 the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Oil Return Gas Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Circuit Normal Latch All Remote
Pump Drain – Circuit #2 the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.

152 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Diagnostics

Table 96. Communication diagnostics (continued)

Active
Modes
Affects [Inactive Reset
Diagnostic Name Target Severity Persistence Modes] Criteria Level
Comm Loss: Oil Return Gas Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Circuit Normal Latch All Remote
Pump Fill – Circuit #1 the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Oil Return Gas Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Circuit Normal Latch All Remote
Pump Fill – Circuit #2 the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Op Status Continual loss of communication between the MP and
None Info Latch All Remote
Programmable Relays the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Continual loss of communication between the MP and
RTUD with
the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
ACFC?NONE
If the outdoor temperature is used for CHW reset, there
- Normal
Comm Loss: Outdoor Air shall be no CHW reset. Apply slew rates per Chilled
Chiller Shutdown; Latch All Remote
Temperature Water Reset spec. For RTUD if this diagnostic occurs,
OATS=INST-
operational pumpdown will be performed regardless of
Special
the last valid temperature. For RTWD, if installed for low
Action
ambient lockout, there shall be no lockout
Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Comm Loss: Starter 1A Circuit Immediate Latch All Local
the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Comm Loss: Starter 2A Circuit Immediate Latch All Local
the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Comm Loss: Starter Panel
Continual loss of communication between the MP and
High Temperature Limit, None Info Latch All Local
the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Compressor 1A
Continual loss of communication between the MP and
All
Comm Loss: Suction Rfgt the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Circuit Immediate Latch [Ckt (Cprsr Remote
Pressure, Circuit #1 Note: This diagnostic is replaced by diagnostic 5FB
lock out]
below with Rev 15.0
Continual loss of communication between the MP and
All
Comm Loss: Suction Rfgt the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Circuit Immediate Latch [Ckt (Cprsr Remote
Pressure, Circuit #2 Note: This diagnostic is replaced by diagnostic 5FD
lock out]
below with Rev 15.0
Comm Loss:Evaporator Off-
Continual loss of communication between the MP and
Cycle Freeze Protection None Info Latch All Remote
the Functional ID has occurred for a 30 second period.
Relay
Starter has had a loss of communication with the MP for
Starter 1A Comm Loss: MP Cprsr Immediate Latch All Local
a 15 second period.
Starter has had a loss of communication with the MP for
Starter 2A Comm Loss: MP Cprsr Immediate Latch All Local
a 15 second period.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 153
Diagnostics

Main Processor (Boot Messages and Diagnostics

Table 97. Main processor (boot messages and diagnostics)
Description
DynaView Display Message Troubleshooting
A valid configuration is present in the MP’s nonvolatile memory. The configuration is a set of variables and
settings that define the physical makeup of this particular chiller. These include: number (airflow, (and type of
A Valid Configuration is Present
fans, number (and size of compressors, special features, characteristics, and control options.
//Temporary display of this screen is part of the normal power up sequence.
An invalid configuration has been detected in the Main Processor’s nonvolatile memory and the MP is unable
An Invalid Configuration is Present to proceed with the boot up. Communication via the service serial port is supported and the TechView™ service
tool, (Configuration View), needs to be employed to correct the configuration.
An application has been detected in the Main Processor’s nonvolatile memory and the boot code is proceeding
App Present. Running Selftest.…
to run a check on its entirety. 8 seconds later, the boot code had completed and passed the (CRC) test.
Selftest Passed
//Temporary display of this screen is part of the normal power up sequence.
An application has been detected in Main Processor’s nonvolatile memory and the boot code is proceeding to
run a check on its entirety. A few seconds later, the boot code had completed but failed the (CRC) test.
App Present. Running Selftest… //Connect a TechView™ Service Tool to the MP’s serial port, provide chiller model number (configuration
information) and download the configuration if prompted by TechView™. Then proceed to download the most
Err3: CRC Failure
recent RTWD application or specific version as recommended by Technical Service. Note that this error display
may also occur during the programming process, if the MP never had a valid application any time prior to the
download. If the problem persists, replace the MP.
The “boot code” is the portion of the code that is resident in all MPs regardless of what application code (if any)
is loaded. Its main function is to run power up tests and provide a means for downloading application code via
the MP’s serial connection. The Part numbers for the code are displayed in the lower left hand corner of the
Boot Software Part Numbers:
DynaView during the early portion of the power up sequence and during special programming and converter
LS Flash --> 6200-0318-04
modes. See below. For the EasyView, the extension of the boot code part number is displayed for approximately
MS Flash --> 6200-0319-04 3 immediately following power up.
//This is normal, but you should provide this information when contacting Technical Service about power up
problems.
A command was received from the Service Tool (Tech View) to stop the running application and run in the
Converter Mode “converter mode”. In this mode the MP acts as a simple gateway and allows the TechView™ service computer
to talk to all the LLIDS on the IPC3 bus.
There were RAM errors detected in RAM Address Test #1.
Err2: RAM Addr Test #1 Failure
//Recycle power, if error persists, replace MP.
There were RAM errors detected in RAM Address Test #2.
Err2: RAM Addr Test #2 Failure
//Recycle power, if the error persists, replace MP.
There were RAM errors detected in RAM Test Pattern #1.
Err2: RAM Pattern 1 Failure
//Recycle power, if the error persists, replace MP.
There were RAM errors detected in RAM Test Pattern #2.
Err2: RAM Pattern 2 Failure
//Recycle power, if the error persists, replace MP.
An unhandled interrupt has occurred while running the application code. This event will normally cause a safe
shutdown of the entire chiller. Once the countdown timer reaches 0, the processor will reset, clear diagnostics,
and attempt to restart the application and allow a normal restart of chiller as appropriate.
Err4: UnHandled Interrupt //This condition might occur due to a severe electro-magnetic transient such as can be caused by a near
lightening strike. Such events should be rare or isolated and if no damage results to the CH530 control system,
Restart Timer:
the Chiller will experience a shutdown and restart. If this occurs more persistently it may be due to an MP
[3 sec countdown timer] hardware problem. Try replacing the MP. If replacement of the MP proves ineffective, the problem may be a result
of extremely high radiated or conducted EMI. Contact Technical Service.
If this screen occurs immediately after a software download, attempt to reload both the configuration and the
application. Failing this, contact Technical Service.
An Operating System error has occurred while running the application code. This event will normally cause a
Err5: Operating System Error
safe shutdown of the entire chiller. Once the countdown timer reaches 0, the processor will reset, clear
Restart Timer:
diagnostics, and attempt to restart the application and allow a normal restart of chiller as appropriate.
[30 sec countdown timer]
//See Err 4 above
Err6: Watch Dog Timer Error A Watch Dog Timer Error has occurred while running the application code. This event will normally cause a safe
Restart Timer: shutdown of the entire chiller. Once the countdown timer reaches 0, the processor will reset, clear diagnostics,
[30 sec countdown timer] and attempt to restart the application allowing a normal restart of chiller as appropriate.
Err7: Unknown Error An unknown Error has occurred while running the application code. This event will normally cause a safe
Restart Timer: shutdown of the entire chiller. Once the countdown timer reaches 0, the processor will reset, clear diagnostics,
[30 sec countdown timer] and attempt to restart the application allowing a normal restart of chiller as appropriate
The boot detected a key press in the center of the DynaView or both the + and – keys pressed on an EasyView
Err8: Held in Boot by User Key Press while the MP was in the boot code. Upon seeing this message the user can use Techview™ to connect to the
MP to perform a software download or another service tool function.

154 RLC-SVX09L-EN
 Diagnostics

Table 97. Main processor (boot messages and diagnostics) (continued)

Description
DynaView Display Message Troubleshooting
The configuration currently in the nonvolatile memory has the LonTalk® or BACnet® communication option
installed and the DynaView™ hardware does not contain adequate memory to support the option. The MP is
unable to proceed with the boot up. Communication via the service serial port is supported and the TechView™
LCI-C Hardware Mismatch
service tool, (Configuration View), needs to be employed to correct the configuration to remove the unsupported
comm option and return to the previous configuration. The communication option can only be supported with
MP hardware version -05 or newer.
No Main Processor Application is present – There are no RAM Test Errors.
No Application Present //Connect a TechView™ Service Tool to the MP’s serial port, provide chiller model number (configuration
Please Load Application... information) and download the configuration if prompted by TechView™. Then proceed to download the most
recent RTWD application or specific version as recommended by Technical Service.
A command was received by the MP from the Tech View Service Tool and the MP is in the process of first erasing
and then writing the program code to its internal Flash (nonvolatile) Memory. Note that if the MP never had a
Programming Mode
prior application already in memory, the error code “Err3”will be displayed instead of this, during the
programming download process.
Software Error 1001: Call Trane
See item in Main Processor Diagnostics table above
Service
Software Error 1002: Call Trane
See item in Main Processor Diagnostics table above
Service
Software Error 1003: Call Trane
See item in Main Processor Diagnostics table above
Service

Limit Conditions
CH530 will automatically limit certain operating prevent nuisance diagnostic trips. These limit conditions
parameters to maintain optimum chiller performance and are noted in Table 98.

Table 98. Limit conditions

The chiller, circuit, and compressor are currently running, but the operation of the chiller
(compressor is being actively limited by the controls. Further information is provided by the sub-
Running - Limited mode.
Capacity Limited by High The circuit is experiencing condenser pressures at or near the condenser limit setting. The compressor will be unloaded
Cond Press to prevent exceeding the limits.
Capacity Limited by High The compressor is running and its capacity is being limited by high currents. The current limit setting is 120% RLA (to
Current avoid overcurrent trips).
Capacity Limited by Low The circuit is experiencing saturated evaporator temperatures at or near the Low Refrigerant Temperature Cutout
Evap Rfgt Temp setting. The compressors will be unloaded to prevent tripping.
Capacity Limited by Low The circuit is experiencing low refrigerant liquid levels and the EXV is at or near full open. The compressor will be
Liquid Level unloaded to prevent tripping.
Capacity Limited by Phase
The compressor is running and its capacity is being limited by excessive phase current unbalance.
Unbalance

RLC-SVX09L-EN 155
Wiring
Table 99 provides a list of field wiring diagrams, electrical schematics and connection diagrams for RTWD and RTUD units.
The complete wiring package is documented in RLC-SVE01*-EN. A laminated wiring diagram booklet is also shipped with
each unit.
To determine the specific electrical characteristics of a particular chiller, refer to the nameplates mounted on the units.

Table 99. RTWD/UD wiring diagrams

Drawing Description
Sheet 1 Compressor - Ckt 1 (1A)
Sheet 2 Compressor - Ckt 2 (2A)
2309-7584 Sheet 3 Schematic - Wye-Delta Starter Controls
Sheet 4 Controls/LLID Bus
Sheet 5 Controls/Legend/LLID Bus
Sheet 1 Compressor - Ckt 1 (1A)
Sheet 2 Compressor - Ckt 2 (2A)
2309-7585 Sheet 3 Schematic - X-line Starters Controls
Sheet 4 Controls/LLID Bus
Sheet 5 Controls/Legend/LLID Bus
Sheet 1 Diagram
2309-7596 Unit Component Location
Sheet 2 Legend/Notes
Sheet 1 Diagram
2309-7597 Control Panel Component Location
Sheet 2 Legend
Sheet 1 Diagram
2309-1913 Field Wiring
Sheet 2 Notes/Fuses
Sheet 1 Diagram
2309-1969 Interconnection Wiring, Field Wiring RTUD Paired Condenser
Sheet 2 Notes
Sheet 1 Diagram
2309-7598 Field Layout
Sheet 2 Notes

156 RLC-SVX09L-EN
Log and Check Sheets
The operator log and check sheet are included for use as
appropriate, for installation completion verification before
Trane start-up is scheduled, and for reference during the
Trane start-up.
Where the log or check sheet also exists outside of this
publication as standalone literature, the literature order
number is also listed.
• Model RTWD Installation Completion Check Sheet and
Request for Trane Service (RLC-ADF007*-EN)
• Model RTUD Installation Completion Check Sheet and
Request for Trane Service (RLC-ADF009*-EN)
• Chiller Log Sheet

RLC-SVX09L-EN 157
Log and Check Sheets

Page left intentionally blank

158 RLC-SVX09L-EN
Model RTWD Chiller Installation Completion
Check Sheet and Request for Trane Service
Important: A copy of this completed form must be submitted to the Trane service agency that will be responsible for the start-
up of the chiller. Start-up will NOT proceed unless applicable items listed in this form have been satisfactorily
completed. See unit IOM RLC-SVX09*-EN for detailed installation instructions.

To: Trane Service Office:

S.O. Number: Serial Numbers:
Job/Project Name:
Address:
The following items are being installed and will be completed by:

Important: Start-up must be performed by Trane or an agent of Trane specifically authorized to perform start-up of Trane®
products. Contractor shall provide Trane (or an agent of Trane specifically authorized to perform start-up) with
notice of the scheduled start-up at least two weeks prior to the scheduled start-up.
Important: It is required that heaters are energized for a minimum of 24 hours prior to start up. Therefore, chiller
should have power for this amount of time before Trane Service arrives to do start-up.

Check boxes if the task is complete or if the answer is “yes.”

1. Screw Chiller
 Installation meets foundation requirements.
 In place and piped.
 Isolation pads or isolators installed.

2. Piping
Note: See bulletin RLC-PRB022*-EN for piping installation considerations affecting sound.
Chilled water piping connected to:
 Evaporator
 Air handling units
 Pumps
 Flow switch or flow proving device installed (if not factory provided)
 Strainer installed and cleaned
 Drain and vents in both evaporator waterboxes are piped with shutoff valve, or plugs have been reinstalled.
Condenser piping connected to:
 Condenser
 Pumps
 Flow switch or flow proving device installed (if not factory provided)
 Condenser water regulating valve
 Cooling tower
 Drain and vents in both condenser waterboxes are piped with shutoff valve, or plugs have been reinstalled.
 Make-up water connected to cooling tower
 Water supply connected to filling system
 Does unit have freeze inhibitor? If unit has freeze inhibitor:
 Verify type and concentration correct per unit submittal
 Calculate and record freeze point of the solution: _____________________________
 Systems filled
 Pumps run, air bled from system
 Strainer installed in entering water piping (evaporator and condenser) and cleaned
 Relief valve ventilation piping installed

3. Flow balancing valves installed

 Leaving chilled water
 Leaving condenser water
 Proper porting to measure flow and balance

4. Gauges, thermometers, and air vents

 Installed on both sides of evaporator
 Installed on both sides of condenser and heat recovery condenser (as applicable)
RLC-ADF007C-EN 1
 5. Wiring
 Wire size per submittal and NEC 310-16
 Full power available
 External interlocks (flow switch, pumps auxiliary, etc.)
 Chilled water pump (connected and tested)
 Condenser water pump (connected and tested)
 Cooling tower fan rotation checked
 Separate power sources available for 220V water regulating valve, if selected
 115 Vac power available for service tools as required
 All controls installed and connected

6. Testing
 Dry nitrogen available for pressure testing
 Trace gas amounts of R-134a available for leak testing, if necessary

7. Unit Charging
 Refrigerant on job site if nitrogen charge option selected

8.  Systems can be operated under all actual load conditions

9. Heaters
 Energize oil separator and compressor heaters and verify they are operational using a temperature probe.
 If unit was factory charged (model number digit 45 = 0), energize heaters for 24 hours prior to start up.
Important: It is required that heaters are energized for a minimum of 24 hours prior to start up.
Therefore, chiller should have power for this amount of time before Trane Service arrives
to do start-up.
 If unit has nitrogen charge (model number digit 45 = 1), contact Trane Service for unit charging prior to start-up.

10.Equipment room
 Does the equipment room have a refrigerant monitor/sensor capable of monitoring and alarming within the allowable
exposure level of the refrigerant?
 Does the installation have properly placed and operating audible and visual refrigerant alarms?
 Does the equipment room have proper mechanical ventilation?
 If it is required by local code, is a self-contained breathing apparatus available?

11.Owner awareness
 Does the owner have a copy of the MSDS for refrigerant?

2 RLC-ADF007C-EN
Note: Additional time required to properly complete the start-up and commissioning, due to any incompleteness of the
installation, will be invoiced at prevailing rates.
This is to certify that the Trane® equipment has been properly and completely installed, and that the applicable items listed above
have been satisfactorily completed.
Important: It is required that the chiller heaters are energized for a minimum of 24 hours prior to start up. Therefore, the chiller
should have power for this amount of time before Trane Service arrives to do start-up of the equipment.
Checklist completed by: ______________________________________________________________________________________________
Signed: _____________________________________________________________________ Date: _______________________________
In accordance with your quotation and our purchase order number __________________, we will therefore require the presence
of Trane service on this site, for the purpose of start-up and commissioning, by __________________ (date).
Note: Minimum two-week advance notification is required to allow scheduling of the chiller start-up.
Additional comments/instructions: ____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Note: A copy of this completed from must be submitted to the Trane Service Office that will be responsible for start-up of chiller.

RLC-ADF007C-EN 3
Trane - by Trane Technologies (NYSE: TT), a global climate innovator - creates comfortable, energy
efficient indoor environments for commercial and residential applications. For more information,
please visit trane.com or tranetechnologies.com.
Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserves the right to change design and specifications without
notice. We are committed to using environmentally conscious print practices.

RLC-ADF007C-EN 18 May 2020

Supersedes RLC-ADF007B-EN (Oct 2016) ©2020 Trane
Model RTUD Compressor-Chiller Installation Completion
Check Sheet and Request for Trane Service
Important: A copy of this completed form must be submitted to the Trane service agency that will be responsible for the start-
up of the chiller. Start-up will NOT proceed unless applicable items listed in this form have been satisfactorily
completed. See unit IOM RLC-SVX09*-EN for detailed installation instructions.

To: Trane Service Office:

S.O. Number: Serial Numbers:
Job/Project Name:
Address:
The following items are being installed and will be completed by:

Important: Start-up must be performed by Trane or an agent of Trane specifically authorized to perform start-up of Trane®
products. Contractor shall provide Trane (or an agent of Trane specifically authorized to perform start-up) with
notice of the scheduled start-up at least two weeks prior to the scheduled start-up.
Important: It is required that heaters are energized for a minimum of 24 hours prior to start up. Therefore, chiller
should have power for this amount of time before Trane Service arrives to do start-up.

Check boxes if the task is complete or if the answer is “yes.”

1. Screw Chiller
 Installation meets foundation requirements.
 In place and piped.
 Isolation pads or isolators installed.

2. Piping
Note: See bulletin RLC-PRB022*-EN for piping installation considerations affecting sound.
Chilled water piping connected to:
 Evaporator
 Air handling units
 Pumps
 Flow switch or flow proving device installed (if not factory provided)
 Strainer installed and cleaned
 Drain and vents in both evaporator waterboxes are piped with shutoff valve, or plugs have been reinstalled.
Piping to air-cooled condenser is completed properly.
 Liquid and suction lines sized properly per guidelines in IOM RLC-SVX09*-EN
 Refrigerant piping has been pressure and leak tested.
 Make-up water connected to cooling tower
 Water supply connected to filling system
 Does unit have freeze inhibitor? If unit has freeze inhibitor:
 Verify type and concentration correct per unit submittal
 Calculate and record freeze point of the solution: _____________________________
 Systems filled
 Pumps run, air bled from system
 Strainer installed in entering water piping (evaporator and condenser) and cleaned
 Relief valve ventilation piping installed

3. Flow balancing valves installed

 Leaving chilled water
 Leaving condenser water
 Proper porting to measure flow and balance

4. Gauges, thermometers, and air vents

 Installed on both sides of evaporator
 Installed on both sides of condenser and heat recovery condenser (as applicable)

RLC-ADF009C-EN 1
 5. Wiring
 Wiring between RTUD compressor-chiller and outdoor condenser unit(s) is correct per list on RTUD unit.
 Wire size per submittal and NEC 310-16.
 Full power available
 External interlocks (flow switch, pumps auxiliary, etc.)
 Chilled water pump (connected and tested)
 Condenser water pump (connected and tested)
 Cooling tower fan rotation checked
 Separate power sources available for 220V water regulating valve, if selected
 115 Vac power available for service tools as required
 All controls installed and connected

6. Testing
 Dry nitrogen available for pressure testing
 Trace gas amounts of R-134a available for leak testing, if necessary

7. Unit Charging
 Refrigerant on job site
 System vac complete and charged to proper amount for jobsite per IOM guidelines.

8.  Systems can be operated under all actual load conditions

9. Heaters
 Energize oil separator and compressor heaters and verify they are operational using a temperature probe.
 Energize heaters for 24 hours prior to start up.
Important: It is required that heaters are energized for a minimum of 24 hours prior to start up.
Therefore, chiller should have power for this amount of time before Trane Service arrives
to do start-up.

10.Equipment room
 Does the equipment room have a refrigerant monitor/sensor capable of monitoring and alarming within the allowable
exposure level of the refrigerant?
 Does the installation have properly placed and operating audible and visual refrigerant alarms?
 Does the equipment room have proper mechanical ventilation?
 If it is required by local code, is a self-contained breathing apparatus available?

11.Owner awareness
 Does the owner have a copy of the MSDS for refrigerant?

2 RLC-ADF009C-EN
Note: Additional time required to properly complete the start-up and commissioning, due to any incompleteness of the
installation, will be invoiced at prevailing rates.
This is to certify that the Trane® equipment has been properly and completely installed, and that the applicable items listed above
have been satisfactorily completed.
Important: It is required that the chiller heaters are energized for a minimum of 24 hours prior to start up. Therefore, the chiller
should have power for this amount of time before Trane Service arrives to do start-up of the equipment.
Checklist completed by: ______________________________________________________________________________________________
Signed: _____________________________________________________________________ Date: _______________________________
In accordance with your quotation and our purchase order number __________________, we will therefore require the presence
of Trane service on this site, for the purpose of start-up and commissioning, by __________________ (date).
Note: Minimum two-week advance notification is required to allow scheduling of the chiller start-up.
Additional comments/instructions: ____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Note: A copy of this completed from must be submitted to the Trane Service Office that will be responsible for start-up of chiller.

RLC-ADF009C-EN 3
Trane - by Trane Technologies (NYSE: TT), a global climate innovator - creates comfortable, energy
efficient indoor environments for commercial and residential applications. For more information,
please visit trane.com or tranetechnologies.com.
Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserves the right to change design and specifications without
notice. We are committed to using environmentally conscious print practices.

RLC-ADF009C-EN 18 May 2020

Supersedes RLC-ADF009B-EN (Oct 2016) ©2020 Trane
 RTWD/RTUD CHILLER LOG SHEET
Tab Measurement 15 minutes 30 minutes 1 hour
Main
Chiller Mode
Evaporator Entering/Leaving Water Temperature
Condenser Entering/Leaving Water Temperature
Active Chiller Water Setpoint (°F)
Average Line Current (%RLA)
Active Current Limit Setpoint (%RLA)
Software Type
Software Version
Reports
EVAPORATOR
Entering Water Temperature (°F)
Leaving Water Temperature (°F)
Saturated Refrigerant Temperature (°F)
Refrigerant Pressure (psia)
Approach Temperature (°F)
Water Flow Switch Status
EXV Position (%)
EXV Position Steps
Refrigerant Liquid Level (inch)
CONDENSER
Entering Water Temperature (°F)
Leaving Water Temperature (°F)
Saturated Refrigerant Temperature (°F)
Refrigerant Pressure (psia)
Approach Temperature (°F)
Water Flow Switch Status
Head Pressure Control Command (%)
COMPRESSOR 1
Starts
Run Time
System Refrigerant Differential Pressure (psid)
Oil Pressure (psia)
Refrigerant Discharge Temperature (°F)
Discharge Superheat (°F)
% RLA L1 L2 L3 (%)
Amps L1 L2 L3 (amps)
Volts AB BC CA
COMPRESSOR 2
Starts
Run Time
System Refrigerant Differential Pressure (psid)
Oil Pressure (psia)
Refrigerant Discharge Temperature (°F)
Discharge Superheat (°F)
% RLA L1 L2 L3 (%)
Amps L1 L2 L3 (amps)
Volts AB BC CA
 RTWD/RTUD CHILLER SETTINGS
Tab Category Setting
Settings
CHILLER
Front Panel Water Setpoint (°F)
Front Panel Current Limit Setpoint (°F)
Differential to Start (°F)
Differential to Stop (°F)
Setpoint Source
FEATURE SETTINGS
Chilled Water Reset
Return Reset Ratio
Return Start Reset
Return Maximum Reset
Outdoor Reset Ratio
Outdoor Start Reset
Outdoor Maximum Reset
MODE OVERRIDES
Evaporator Water Pump
Condenser Water Pump
Expansion Valve Control
Slide Valve Control
Service Pumpdown
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Date Format
Date
Time Format
Time of Day
Keypad/Display Lockout
Display Units
Pressure Units
Language Selection
Trane - by Trane Technologies (NYSE: TT), a global climate innovator - creates comfortable, energy
efficient indoor environments for commercial and residential applications. For more information,
please visit trane.com or tranetechnologies.com.
Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserves the right to change design and specifications without
notice. We are committed to using environmentally conscious print practices.

RLC-SVX09L-EN 12 Jun 2020

Supersedes RLC-SVX09K-EN (Nov 2016) ©2020 Trane